This is a modern-English version of Woodwork Joints: How They Are Set Out, How Made and Where Used., originally written by Fairham, William. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Transcriber's Note:
The Table of Contents has been changed to match the actual chapter headings.
A few hyphenations have been changed to make them consistent.
Minor typographic errors have been corrected.

WOODWORK JOINTS

(THE WOODWORKER SERIES)








REVISED EDITION










WOODWORK
JOINTS



HOW THEY ARE SET OUT, HOW MADE AND
WHERE USED; WITH FOUR HUNDRED
ILLUSTRATIONS AND INDEX









REVISED EDITION











LONDON

EVANS BROTHERS, LIMITED

MONTAGUE HOUSE, RUSSELL SQUARE, W.C.1










THE
WOODWORKER SERIES



WOODWORK JOINTS.
CABINET CONSTRUCTION.
STAINING AND POLISHING.
WOODWORK TOOLS.
PRACTICAL UPHOLSTERY.
WOOD TURNING.
WOODCARVING.
TIMBERS FOR WOODWORK.
FURNITURE REPAIRING AND RE-UPHOLSTERY.
HOUSEHOLD REPAIRS AND RENOVATIONS.
CARPENTRY FOR BEGINNERS.
KITCHEN FURNITURE DESIGNS.
BUREAU AND BOOKCASE DESIGNS.
LIGHT CARPENTRY DESIGNS.
DOORMAKING.
EVANS BROTHERS, LIMITED,
MONTAGUE HOUSE, RUSSELL SQUARE,
LONDON, W.C.1.






EDITORIAL FOREWORD

To be successful in woodwork construction the possession of two secrets is essential—to know the right joint to use, and to know how to make that joint in the right way. The woodwork structure or the piece of cabinet-work that endures is the one on which skilful hands have combined to carry out what the constructive mind planned. And it is just here that the present Volume will help, not alone the beginner who wishes preliminary instruction, but also the expert who desires guidance over ground hitherto unexplored by him.

To be successful in woodworking, two key skills are essential: knowing the right joint to use and knowing how to make that joint properly. The woodworking structure or piece of furniture that lasts is the one crafted by skilled hands that bring the creative vision to life. This is where the current volume will assist not only beginners seeking foundational instruction but also experienced craftsmen looking for guidance on new techniques they haven’t explored before.

In the preparation of this new edition the Publishers have secured the services of Mr. William Fairham, by whom the chapters have been carefully revised and re-illustrated. Although intended for the practical man, and not professing to be a graded course of "educational woodwork," the Volume is one which Handicraft Instructors will find of the greatest value in conducting woodwork classes. No book hitherto published contains such a variety of illustrations of joints, almost all of which will form suitable exercises of practical educational importance in a woodworking course.

In preparing this new edition, the Publishers have enlisted Mr. William Fairham, who has carefully revised and re-illustrated the chapters. While it's aimed at practical users and doesn't claim to be a structured course in "educational woodwork," this book is incredibly valuable for Handicraft Instructors running woodwork classes. No other book published so far offers such a wide range of illustrations of joints, nearly all of which provide suitable exercises with real educational significance in a woodworking course.

J. C. S. B.

J. C. S. B.


Old Oak Chests, showing the Method of Structure which forms the origin of most of our English Furniture. (From The Woodworker, January, 1927.) Old Oak Chests, demonstrating the construction technique that is the foundation of much of our English furniture.
(From The Woodworker, January, 1927.)

CONTENTS


Staircase of the Second Half of Seventeenth Century. (From The Woodworker, September, 1929.) Staircase from the Second Half of the 17th Century.
(From The Woodworker, September 1929.)

THE GLUED JOINT

The glued joint in its various forms is in use in every country in the world, and is frequently met with in mummy cases and other examples of ancient woodwork. Alternative names under which it is known are the butt joint, the rubbed joint, the slipped joint, whilst in certain localities it is known as the slaped (pronounced slayped) joint.

The glued joint in its different forms is used in every country around the world and is often found in mummy cases and other examples of ancient woodworking. It is also called the butt joint, the rubbed joint, and the slipped joint, while in some areas, it is referred to as the slaped (pronounced slayped) joint.

Fig. 1.—Simplest Form of Glued or Rubbed Joint. Fig. 1.—Most Basic Version of a Glued or Rubbed Joint.

The glued joint is made by planing two pieces of timber so that when placed together they are in contact with each other at every point; they are then usually united with glue. Fig. 1 shows a sketch of a butt joint in its simplest form. In Fig. 2 is indicated the method of holding the joint whilst being glued; the upright portion is held rigid in the bench vice, thus leaving the left hand to hold the piece which is to be jointed, whilst the right hand operates the glue brush. The pieces of wood which form a butt joint may be glued together with or without the aid of cramps or artificial pressure. If the joint is to be made without cramping, the two surfaces of the timber are warmed so as not to chill the[Pg 2] glue. The surfaces are then glued and put together and rubbed backwards and forwards so as to get rid of the superfluous glue. They are then put aside to dry.

The glued joint is created by planing two pieces of wood so that when they're placed together, they touch at every point; they are then usually joined with glue. Fig. 1 shows a sketch of a butt joint in its most basic form. In Fig. 2, the method for holding the joint while it's being glued is indicated; the upright section is kept steady in the bench vice, allowing the left hand to hold the piece being joined, while the right hand uses the glue brush. The wood pieces that form a butt joint can be glued together with or without the help of clamps or additional pressure. If the joint is made without clamps, the two surfaces of the wood are warmed to prevent the glue from cooling too quickly. The surfaces are then glued and brought together, rubbing back and forth to remove any excess glue. They are then set aside to dry.

Glueing.—The better the glue penetrates into the pores of the wood, the stronger the joint will be; for this reason timber of the loose-fibred variety, such as pine, etc., will hold up at the joint better than hardwoods like teak and rosewood. The glue used for jointing should be neither too thick nor too thin; the consistency of cream will be found suitable for most purposes. It should be nice and hot, and be rapidly spread over the surface of the wood.

Gluing.—The better the glue seeps into the wood's pores, the stronger the bond will be; for this reason, softwoods like pine will hold joints together better than hardwoods like teak and rosewood. The glue used for bonding shouldn't be too thick or too thin; a creamy consistency is ideal for most projects. It should be warm and spread quickly over the wood's surface.

Fig. 2.—How the Wood is held whilst Glueing. Fig. 2.—How the wood is held while gluing.

If light-coloured woods, such as pine, satinwood, sycamore, etc., have to be jointed, a little flake white should be procured and mixed into the liquid glue. This will prevent the glue showing a thin black line on the joint.

If you need to joint light-colored woods like pine, satinwood, or sycamore, you should get some flake white and mix it into the liquid glue. This will stop the glue from leaving a thin black line on the joint.

Broad surfaces of close-grained hardwood having a shiny surface are usually carefully roughened with a fine toothing plane blade previous to glueing.

Broad surfaces of close-grained hardwood with a shiny finish are typically carefully roughened with a fine-toothed plane blade before gluing.

Supporting the Joint.—The jointed boards should not be reared up against a "bench leg" or wall without having any support in the centre, as dotted line at Fig. 5, because in all probability they will fracture before the glue has time to set; and, when we go to take them up to renew working operations, we shall be[Pg 3] annoyed to find that they have assumed a position similar to that at Fig. 5 (shown exaggerated), and this will, of course, necessitate re-jointing.

Supporting the Joint.—The jointed boards shouldn't be propped up against a "bench leg" or wall without support in the center, as indicated by the dotted line at Fig. 5. Otherwise, they'll likely break before the glue has time to set. When we go to lift them for more work, we’ll be[Pg 3] frustrated to see that they have ended up in a position like the one at Fig. 5 (shown exaggerated), which will obviously mean we'll have to re-joint them.

Fig. 3.—Correct Jointing.

Fig. 3.—Correct Jointing.

Fig. 3.—Proper Jointing.

Fig. 4.—Faulty Jointing.

Fig. 4.—Faulty Jointing.

Fig. 4.—Faulty Joint.

Fig. 5.—Boards unsupported.

Fig. 5.—Boards unsupported.

Fig. 5.—Floating boards.

Fig. 6.—Boards supported.

Fig. 6.—Boards supported.

Fig. 6.—Supported boards.

Fig. 7.—(A) Glued Slip, (B) Glued Moulding.

Fig. 7.—(A) Glued Slip, (B) Glued Moulding.

Fig. 7.—(A) Adhesive Slip, (B) Adhesive Molding.

Fig. 8.—Grain alternating.

Fig. 8.—Grain alternating.

Fig. 8.—Alternating grain.

A correct method to adopt is seen at Fig. 6. Here we have supported the joint by rearing up against the wall[Pg 4] a couple of pieces of batten, one at each end of the board, thus supporting it throughout its entire width until the glue is thoroughly set. The two or more pieces of timber in a butt joint adhere by crystallisation of the glue and atmospheric pressure. A well-fitted joint made with good quality glue is so strong that, when boards of 3 feet and upwards are jointed together by this method, the timber in most cases will break with the grain sooner than part at the joint.

A proper method to use is shown at Fig. 6. Here, we've supported the joint by leaning a couple of pieces of batten against the wall[Pg 4]—one at each end of the board—so it stays supported across its entire width until the glue is completely dry. The two or more pieces of wood in a butt joint stick together through the crystallization of the glue and atmospheric pressure. A well-fitted joint made with high-quality glue is so strong that, when boards of 3 feet or more are joined this way, the wood will usually break along the grain before coming apart at the joint.

Butt joints may be cramped up, if desired, and it is customary to warm them as previously stated. In the absence of the usual iron cramp, the amateur may make an excellent wooden arrangement out of any odd pieces of timber that happen to be handy. Two blocks of hardwood are screwed on the base board at a suitable distance for the work in hand; the boards to be jointed are glued and placed in position between the blocks; and the two hardwood wedges are inserted and hammered in opposite directions to each other, thus exerting the desired pressure. An example of this method of cramping is shown in Fig. 25, which also indicates the use of iron "dogs."

Butt joints can be tightened up if needed, and it’s common to warm them as mentioned earlier. If you don’t have the usual iron clamp, you can create a great wooden setup with any spare pieces of timber you have around. Screw two blocks of hardwood onto the baseboard at the right distance for your project; glue the boards that need to be joined and position them between the blocks. Then, insert two hardwood wedges and hammer them in opposite directions to apply the necessary pressure. An example of this clamping method is shown in Fig. 25, which also demonstrates the use of iron "dogs."

When jointing, care should be taken to first plane up the boards true on one side—i.e., take them out of winding. The method of testing for this is shown at Fig. 9, and it may with advantage be used when jointing the edges of the boards. Two laths or strips of wood are planed up to exactly the same width, having their edges straight and parallel. One edge of each lath may, if desired, be bevelled a little. The method of using these "twist sticks" or "winding laths" is to put them on the board as indicated, and sight along their top edges. The winding laths, being much longer than the width of the board, show up the irregularity greatly pronounced.[Pg 5]

When joining boards, you should first plane one side flat—i.e., remove any warp. The testing method for this is demonstrated at Fig. 9, and it's beneficial to use it when jointing the edges of the boards. Two strips of wood are planed to the same exact width, with their edges straight and parallel. If you want, you can slightly bevel one edge of each strip. To use these "twist sticks" or "winding laths," place them on the board as shown and look along their top edges. Because the winding laths are much longer than the width of the board, they make any irregularities stand out significantly.[Pg 5]

The Tools generally used for making the butt joints are:—

The Tools typically used for creating butt joints are:—

The jack plane, for roughing the edges, etc.

The jack plane, for smoothing out the edges, etc.

The wooden trying plane (or iron jointing plane) for trueing up the work.

The wooden trying plane (or iron jointing plane) for smoothing out the work.

The try square for testing purposes.

The try square for testing purposes.

The winding laths and straight edge.

The curved strips and straight edge.

The Method of Work is as follows: Each board is in turn put in the vice and planed straight lengthwise; it is then tested with winding laths and a try square (the latter method is shown at Fig. 22).

The Method of Work is as follows: Each board is placed in the vice and planed straight along its length; it is then checked with winding laths and a try square (the latter method is shown at Fig. 22).

Fig. 9.—Testing Surface with Winding Laths. Fig. 9.—Testing Surface with Winding Laths.

The boards are then put on the top of one another as at Fig. 1 and tested with a straight edge; they should appear true as shown at Fig. 3; if they show faulty as at Fig. 4 the joints must be again fitted until the required degree of accuracy is obtained. Difficulties may be avoided by care in selecting timber suitable for jointing, and it must be remembered that timber shrinks circumferentially (the heart side becoming curved) as dotted lines in Fig. 10. If the timber be jointed with all the heart side one way as at Fig. 10, the tendency will be for it to cast as shown by the[Pg 6] dotted line. If the timber be alternated as at Fig. 11, the tendency will be to cast wavy, whereas if quartered timber can be obtained it will stand practically straight as the tendency to shrink is in thickness only. The grain of quartered timber is shown in Fig. 12.

The boards are then stacked on top of each other as shown at Fig. 1 and checked with a straightedge; they should look straight as illustrated at Fig. 3; if they don't as shown at Fig. 4, the joints need to be adjusted again until the required accuracy is achieved. Problems can be avoided by carefully choosing timber that is good for jointing, and it's important to remember that timber shrinks around its circumference (the heart side tends to curve) as indicated by the dotted lines in Fig. 10. If all the heart sides of the timber are aligned in the same direction as at Fig. 10, it will likely warp as shown by the dotted line. If the timber is alternated as in Fig. 11, it will tend to warp in a wavy pattern, whereas if quartered timber is used, it will stay mostly straight since it only shrinks in thickness. The grain of quartered timber is illustrated in Fig. 12.

Fig. 10.—Showing Heart side of Timber one way. Fig. 10.—Displaying one orientation of the heart side of the timber.
Fig. 11.—Heart side of Timber shown     alternated.

Fig. 11.—Heart side of Timber shown alternated.

Fig. 11.—Heart side of Timber shown alternated.

Fig. 12.—Grain of     Quartered Timber.

Fig. 12.—Grain of Quartered Timber.

Fig. 12.—Grain of Quartered Wood.

Fig. 13.—Boards showing uniformity of Grain. Fig. 13.—Boards displaying consistent grain patterns.

Judgment should also be exercised to avoid jointing in which one piece of timber is wild and large in the grain, and the adjoining piece of a mild-grained nature. Jointed boards should always be glued up with the[Pg 7] grain running in the same direction if possible; this we show at Fig. 13, and nothing looks worse than a dressing chest end or similar piece of work in which the grain runs haphazard. When jointing thin timber (say, 14-in., 38-in., 12-in. and 58-in. boards) the best method is to use a shooting board (Fig. 26). It must be noted, however, that a shooting board and plane practically never give a true right angle, owing to wear and the grinding of the blade. Therefore, the boards should not all be laid with the "face mark" on the shooting board whilst the edges are shot, because any inequality would be multiplied by the number of pieces jointed. A better method is to alternate the boards, face side up, then face side down, whilst shooting the edges; this will prevent convexity or concavity on the face of the jointed board, because any slight error in the angle is neutralised (see Fig. 8).

Judgment should also be used to avoid joining pieces of timber where one is wild and has a large grain, and the other is mild-grained. Jointed boards should always be glued together with the grain running in the same direction when possible; we illustrate this at Fig. 13, and nothing looks worse than a dressing chest end or similar piece of work where the grain runs randomly. When joining thin timber (like 1/4-in., 3/8-in., 1/2-in., and 5/8-in. boards), the best method is to use a shooting board (Fig. 26). However, it’s important to note that a shooting board and plane rarely provide a true right angle due to wear and blade grinding. Therefore, the boards should not all be placed with the "face mark" on the shooting board while the edges are trimmed, because any discrepancy would be amplified by the number of pieces joined. A better approach is to alternate the boards, placing one face side up and the next face side down while trimming the edges; this prevents convexity or concavity on the surface of the jointed board, as any slight error in the angle is balanced out (see Fig. 8).

Applications of the Joint.—The following show various applications of the butt or glued joint:—

Applications of the Joint.—The following outlines different uses of the butt or glued joint:—

Fig. 14.—Carcase Wing-pieces Glued on. Fig. 14.—Attached Carcase Wing Pieces.

Fig. 7A shows a mahogany or other hardwood slip glued on the edge of a cheaper wood, such as pine or whitewood, as is the case on bookcase shelves when only the front edge is seen and polished.

Fig. 7A shows a mahogany or other hardwood strip glued onto the edge of a less expensive wood, like pine or whitewood, which is how bookcase shelves are made when only the front edge is visible and polished.

Fig. 7B shows a moulding glued on a shelf, both mould and shelf in this instance being of polished hardwood. A shelf of this type might be used in a recess, the object of the overhanging moulding being to hide a small 38-in. iron rod which would carry the curtain[Pg 8] rings and heading of the curtain which covers the recess. The shelf would be fixed about 3 ft. 9 ins. to 4 ft. 3 ins. from the floor.

Fig. 7B shows a molding glued onto a shelf, both the molding and shelf being made of polished hardwood. This type of shelf could be used in a recess, with the purpose of the overhanging molding being to conceal a small 38-inch iron rod that holds the curtain[Pg 8] rings and the top of the curtain covering the recess. The shelf would be mounted about 3 ft. 9 in. to 4 ft. 3 in. off the floor.

Fig. 14 shows the wing pieces glued on the top bearer of carcase work. The application of this bearer in its position will be shown in the chapter on Dovetailing.

Fig. 14 shows the wing pieces glued onto the top beam of the carcase work. The use of this beam in its position will be explained in the chapter on Dovetailing.

Fig. 15 shows a butt joint planed at an angle of 45 degrees (commonly called a mitre), used for box feet, etc.

Fig. 15 shows a butt joint trimmed at a 45-degree angle (commonly called a miter), used for box feet, etc.

Fig. 16 shows jointing up of an ogee-shaped panel. The dotted lines indicate the thickness of the timber previous to its being worked up to the finished shape. Bow-fronted and semicircular panels are jointed in a similar manner.

Fig. 16 shows how to join an ogee-shaped panel. The dotted lines represent the thickness of the timber before it is shaped into its final form. Bow-fronted and semicircular panels are joined in a similar way.

Fig. 15.—Butting Mitred Angle Joint. Fig. 15.—Butting Mitered Angle Joint.
Fig. 16.—Jointing Ogee-shaped Panel. Fig. 16.—Joining Ogee-shaped Panel.

Fig. 17 shows timber jointed at right angles to the upright piece, and at an angle of 30 degrees.[Pg 9]

Fig. 17 shows wood joined at right angles to the vertical piece, and at an angle of 30 degrees.[Pg 9]

Fig. 18 indicates quarter-circle jointing, as used in round-cornered chests of drawers, wardrobes, cupboards, etc.

Fig. 18 indicates quarter-circle jointing, as used in rounded-corner chests of drawers, wardrobes, cupboards, etc.

Fig. 19 is similar to Fig. 18, but with hollow (or concave) corners.

Fig. 19 is like Fig. 18, but has hollow (or concave) corners.

Fig. 17.—Jointed Timber     at 30° and 90° angles.

Fig. 17.—Jointed Timber at 30° and 90° angles.

Fig. 17.—Jointed Timber at 30° and 90° angles.

Fig. 18.—Convex Corner.

Fig. 18.—Convex Corner.

Fig. 18.—Rounded Corner.

Fig. 19.—Concave Corner.

Fig. 19.—Concave Corner.

Fig. 19.—Rounded Corner.

Fig. 20.—Jointing a     shaped Spandrel.

Fig. 20.—Jointing a shaped Spandrel.

Fig. 20.—Joining a shaped spandrel.

Fig. 21.—Building     up Case of Piano     Front.

Fig. 21.—Building up Case of Piano Front.

Fig. 21.—Constructing the Piano Case Front.

Fig. 22.—Use of the     Try-square for     Testing Edge.

Fig. 22.—Use of the Try-square for Testing Edge.

Fig. 22.—Using the Try-square to Check Edge.

Fig. 23.—Example of Circular Laminated work. Fig. 23.—Example of circular laminated construction.
Fig. 24.—Glueing Ploughslips     to Drawer.

Fig. 24.—Glueing Ploughslips to Drawer.

Fig. 24.—Gluing Ploughslips to Drawer.

Fig. 25.—Method of holding     Glued Joints with Iron Dogs.

Fig. 25.—Method of holding Glued Joints with Iron Dogs.

Fig. 25.—How to hold Glued Joints with Iron Dogs.

Fig. 26.—Method of using Shooting Board. Fig. 26.—How to Use a Shooting Board.

Fig. 20 gives us the jointing up of a shaped spandrel to the required width. In a case of this description suitably grained and coloured wood should be selected, otherwise the bad match will at once draw attention to the joint.

Fig. 20 provides the connection of a shaped spandrel to the required width. In this situation, appropriately grained and colored wood should be chosen; otherwise, the poor match will immediately attract attention to the joint.

Fig. 21 shows the application of butt or glued jointing to the building up of the core of a piano fall previous to shaping up and veneering.

Fig. 21 illustrates how butt or glued joints are used to construct the core of a piano fall before shaping and veneering.

Fig. 23.—Laminated work—the building up of circular rims for cabinet and joinery work. Plan and elevation show rim pattern of a pulley as used in the pattern-making trade.

Fig. 23.—Laminated work—the creation of circular edges for cabinets and woodworking. The plan and elevation illustrate the rim design of a pulley as used in the pattern-making industry.

Fig. 27.—Cramping Glued Joints:  Handscrews and Batten shown at left; temporary Batten at right to keep the wood flat. Fig. 27.—Cramping Glued Joints: Handscrews and Batten on the left; temporary Batten on the right to keep the wood flat.

Fig. 24.—The glueing of a ploughslip to a drawer side is seen here, the ploughslip being used to carry the drawer bottom.

Fig. 24.—This shows how to attach a ploughslip to the side of a drawer, with the ploughslip serving to support the bottom of the drawer.

Fig. 26 shows the method of jointing with shooting board and trying plane; the right hand operates the[Pg 12] plane whilst the left hand holds the wood firm upon the shooting board.

Fig. 26 demonstrates how to use a shooting board and a trying plane together; the right hand uses the[Pg 12] plane while the left hand keeps the wood steady on the shooting board.

Owing to the importation of narrow and faulty timber the necessity of jointing is greater to-day than ever it was, wide timber of course meaning higher cost for raw material.

Due to the import of narrow and flawed timber, the need for jointing is greater today than it has ever been; wider timber, of course, comes with a higher cost for raw materials.

The method of using iron dogs is illustrated in Fig. 25, and it will be observed that owing to the wedge-like formation of each fang (see enlarged sketch) the dog exerts the necessary pressure to close the joint. At the centre of this illustration is suggested the home-made hardwood blocks, baseboard and wedges referred to on page 4.

The way to use iron dogs is shown in Fig. 25, and you’ll see that because of the wedge shape of each fang (refer to the enlarged sketch), the dog applies the needed pressure to close the joint. In the middle of this illustration, you can see the homemade hardwood blocks, baseboard, and wedges mentioned in page 4.

Fig. 27 shows how the iron sash cramps are used to apply pressure to the joint. As this method is in some cases apt to bend and distort thin boards it is wise practice to fix (as a temporary measure) a stout piece of straight wood on to the board to be joined by using two handscrews as shown at the left hand of the illustration. At the right hand of the sketch a wooden cramping arrangement of the box type is given, and by wedging up the boards are closed together. It is obvious that if this type of box cramp be used it will prevent the boards buckling and the handscrew method at the left may be dispensed with.[Pg 13]

Fig. 27 demonstrates how iron sash clamps are used to apply pressure to the joint. Since this method can sometimes bend and warp thin boards, it's a good idea to temporarily secure a sturdy straight piece of wood to the board being joined using two handscrews, as shown on the left side of the illustration. On the right side of the sketch, there's a wooden cramping setup in a box shape, and by wedging, the boards can be pressed together. Clearly, if this kind of box clamp is used, it will prevent the boards from buckling, making the handscrew method on the left unnecessary.[Pg 13]


THE HALVED JOINT

T he halved joint is frequently known as half-lapping, and sometimes as checking and half-checking. In the majority of cases it is made by halving the two pieces, i.e., by cutting half the depth of the wood away. There are, however, exceptions to this rule, as in the case of "three-piece halving" (or, as it is sometimes called, "third lapping") and in the halving of timber with rebated or moulded edges. Halving is one of the simplest methods of connecting two pieces of timber, especially where it is desired to make frames and bracket supports for either inside or outside use.

T he halved joint is often referred to as half-lapping, and sometimes as checking or half-checking. Typically, it involves cutting halfway through the depth of both pieces of wood. However, there are exceptions, such as in the case of "three-piece halving" (also known as "third lapping") and when halving timber with rebated or molded edges. Halving is one of the easiest ways to connect two pieces of wood, especially when creating frames and bracket supports for indoor or outdoor use.

Fig. 28.—Frame, with various halved joints. These joints, numbered 1, 2, 3, etc., are shown in detail in Figs. 29 to 38. Fig. 28.—Frame with different types of halved joints. These joints, numbered 1, 2, 3, etc., are detailed in Figs. 29 to 38.

Fig. 28 shows the elevation of an imaginary frame which is indicated as made up of a number of halving joints; it shows also the application of the various joints to this class of work. Each joint used in the construction of this frame may be dealt with separately. The numbers marked on Fig. 28 refer to the individual joints, shown separately in Figs. 29 to 38.

Fig. 28 displays the elevation of a fictional frame, composed of several halving joints; it also illustrates how the different joints are applied to this type of work. Each joint used in building this frame can be addressed individually. The numbers labeled on Fig. 28 correspond to the specific joints, which are shown individually in Figs. 29 to 38.

Fig. 29.—Halved Corner Joint.

Fig. 29.—Halved Corner Joint.

Fig. 29.—Split Corner Joint.

Fig. 30.—Halved T Joint.

Fig. 30.—Halved T Joint.

Fig. 30.—Split T Joint.

Fig. 29 shows the "Halved Joint" at the corner of the frame where the two pieces form a right angle (see Fig. 28, 1). Each piece is halved and shouldered at opposite sides, thus forming a perfect fit one with the other and giving a strong joint with a minimum amount of labour. For inside work the joint would be glued and screwed together, the screw heads being countersunk so as not to come in contact with the cutting iron of the plane when levelling off the work. For outside work, in exposed positions where the work will have to withstand the weather, the alternative method of smearing the joint with paint or with a mixture of varnish and white lead would be advisable, the joint[Pg 15] being nailed or screwed. Fig. 29 shows the two pieces separated.

Fig. 29 shows the "Halved Joint" at the corner of the frame where the two pieces come together at a right angle (see Fig. 28, 1). Each piece is halved and shouldered on opposite sides, creating a perfect fit and providing a strong joint with minimal effort. For indoor work, the joint would be glued and screwed together, with the screw heads countersunk to avoid hitting the cutting edge of the plane when smoothing the surface. For outdoor work, in exposed areas where it needs to endure weather conditions, it's better to coat the joint with paint or a mixture of varnish and white lead. The joint should be nailed or screwed. Fig. 29 shows the two pieces apart.

Fig. 30 shows a similar joint to the above, but in this case the top rail runs through and it is generally spoken of as a "Halved T Joint" (Fig. 28, 2). It may be used in nearly all cases where a top or bottom rail runs through an upright. The method of securing the joint is as before. Fig. 30 shows a sketch of the joint separated.

Fig. 30 shows a similar joint to the one above, but in this case, the top rail runs through, and it's typically referred to as a "Halved T Joint" (Fig. 28, 2). It can be used in almost any situation where a top or bottom rail runs through an upright. The way to secure the joint is the same as before. Fig. 30 shows a sketch of the joint separated.

Fig. 31.—Oblique Halving     with Shoulder.

Fig. 31.—Oblique Halving with Shoulder.

Fig. 31.—Slanted Halving with Shoulder.

Fig. 32.—Oblique Halving.

Fig. 32.—Oblique Halving.

Fig. 32.—Slant Halving.

At Fig. 31 is shown an "Oblique Halving Joint," where the oblique piece, or strut, does not run through (Fig. 28, 3). This type of joint is used for strengthening framings and shelf brackets; an example of the latter is shown at Fig. 48. A strut or rail of this type prevents movement or distortion to a frame diagonally (generally spoken of in the trade as "racking"). Fig. 31 shows the joint apart.

At Fig. 31 is shown an "Oblique Halving Joint," where the oblique piece, or strut, does not run through (Fig. 28, 3). This type of joint is used to strengthen frames and shelf brackets; an example of the latter is shown at Fig. 48. A strut or rail like this prevents diagonal movement or distortion of a frame (commonly referred to in the trade as "racking"). Fig. 31 shows the joint separately.

Fig. 32 is an example of Oblique Halving with the upper piece running through (Fig. 28, 4). This joint is[Pg 16] used in similar positions to Fig. 31, and has in some cases the disadvantage of showing end grain at the top of the frame. The sketch shows the two pieces separated.

Fig. 32 is an example of Oblique Halving with the upper piece going through (Fig. 28, 4). This joint is[Pg 16] used in similar positions to Fig. 31, and in some cases, it has the downside of exposing end grain at the top of the frame. The sketch shows the two pieces apart.

Fig. 33 is "Dovetail Halving," the dovetail running through the top piece (Fig. 28, 5). This is a strong joint, used where outside strain is likely to occur in the top piece, the dovetail preventing the rail from being drawn away from the shoulder. The two pieces are shown separate.

Fig. 33 is "Dovetail Halving," the dovetail that goes through the top piece (Fig. 28, 5). This joint is very sturdy, used in situations where there might be external pressure on the top piece, with the dovetail stopping the rail from being pulled away from the shoulder. The two pieces are shown separately.

Fig. 33.—Dovetail Halving.

Fig. 33.—Dovetail Halving.

Fig. 33.—Dovetail Joint.

Fig. 34.—Mitre Halving.

Fig. 34.—Mitre Halving.

Fig. 34.—Miter Halving.

At Fig. 34 is seen "Mitred Halving," a somewhat weak joint, but necessary in mirror frames, etc., where good appearance is required on the face side (Fig. 28, 6). Its use is obvious if the face of the frame be moulded with beads or other sections which require to intersect one with the other. This also applies if the frame be moulded on its face edges.

At Fig. 34 is seen "Mitred Halving," a relatively weak joint, but it's necessary in mirror frames, etc., where a good appearance on the front side is important (Fig. 28, 6). Its use is clear if the front of the frame has designs like beads or other sections that need to connect with each other. This also applies if the frame has moldings on its front edges.

Fig. 35 is a halved joint with one side of the piece dovetailed (Fig. 28, 8). This joint is used in similar positions to Fig. 33, and rather less labour is required in the making. The two pieces are shown separate for clearness.[Pg 17]

Fig. 35 is a joint that’s been cut in half, with one side of the piece having dovetails (Fig. 28, 8). This joint is used in similar situations to Fig. 33, and it takes less effort to create. The two pieces are shown separately for clarity.[Pg 17]

Fig. 36 indicates the "Halved Joint," the pieces at one end showing a double dovetail (Fig. 28, 7). This particular joint is seldom used except for Manual Training purposes. The illustration shows a sketch of the joint apart.

Fig. 36 represents the "Halved Joint," with the pieces at one end featuring a double dovetail (Fig. 28, 7). This specific joint is rarely used, except for Manual Training purposes. The illustration provides a sketch of the joint separated.

Fig. 37 is "Oblique Dovetail Halving," one side of the piece being dovetailed. The joint is used to prevent "racking," and as a cross brace to framing. It is occasionally made with both its sides dovetailed as shown at Fig. 33. (For reference, see Fig. 28, 9).

Fig. 37 is "Oblique Dovetail Halving," where one side of the piece is dovetailed. This joint helps stop "racking" and acts as a cross brace for framing. Sometimes, both sides are dovetailed, as shown at Fig. 33. (For reference, see Fig. 28, 9).

Fig. 35.—Halved Joint with     one side Dovetailed.

Fig. 35.—Halved Joint with one side Dovetailed.

Fig. 35.—Halved Joint with one side Dovetailed.

Fig. 36.—Halved Joint with     Double Dovetail.

Fig. 36.—Halved Joint with Double Dovetail.

Fig. 36.—Halved Joint with Double Dovetail.

Fig. 37.—Oblique Dovetail     Halving.

Fig. 37.—Oblique Dovetail Halving.

Fig. 37.—Oblique Dovetail Halving.

Fig. 38.—Stopped Dovetail     Halving.

Fig. 38.—Stopped Dovetail Halving.

Fig. 38.—Stopped Dovetail Halving.

Fig. 38 shows "Stopped Dovetail Halving." In this[Pg 18] case the dovetail is similar to Fig. 33, with the exception that it does not run through the bottom rail. This is an advantage if the bottom edge of the rail is in evidence, or if it is required to glue a moulding or hardwood facing slip on the lower edge. The glue adheres better with the grain than it would end way of the grain, and if slight shrinkage occurs across the width of the bottom rail the moulding would not be forced away by the upright (see example at Fig. 28, 10).

Fig. 38 shows "Stopped Dovetail Halving." In this[Pg 18] case, the dovetail is similar to Fig. 33, except it doesn’t go through the bottom rail. This is beneficial if the bottom edge of the rail is visible, or if you need to glue a molding or hardwood facing onto the lower edge. The glue sticks better with the grain than it would end way of the grain, and if there’s slight shrinkage across the width of the bottom rail, the molding won’t be pushed away by the upright (see example at Fig. 28, 10).

Fig. 39.—Cross Halving Joint.

Fig. 39.—Cross Halving Joint.

Fig. 39.—Cross Halving Joint.

Fig. 40.—Cross     Halving Joint Edgeways.

Fig. 40.—Cross Halving Joint Edgeways.

Fig. 40.—Cross Halving Joint Edgewise.

Fig. 41.—Tee Halving Joint. Fig. 41.—Tee Halving Joint.

The joint lettered B in Fig. 28 is a "Cross Halving Joint" where each piece runs through the other. Fig. 39[Pg 19] shows this joint separated, and Fig. 40 shows a similar joint separated where the joint is made edgeways.

The joined letter B in Fig. 28 is a "Cross Halving Joint," where each piece interlocks with the other. Fig. 39[Pg 19] illustrates this joint separated, and Fig. 40 shows a similar joint separated where the connection is made edge to edge.

Fig. 41 shows a "Tee Halving Joint" with a dovetail cut on the edge. This is seldom used except as a woodwork exercise.

Fig. 41 shows a "Tee Halving Joint" with a dovetail cut on the edge. This is rarely used except as a woodworking exercise.

Fig. 42 is a "Dovetailed Halving Joint" used for lengthening timber, and is also a favourite Manual Training model. It might also come under the heading of scarf joint, although rarely used in actual practice as such. As a practical woodwork exercise it calls for accurate marking out and careful fitting.

Fig. 42 is a "Dovetailed Halving Joint" used for extending timber and is also a popular model in Manual Training. It might also be classified as a scarf joint, although it's rarely used in that way in real practice. As a practical woodworking task, it requires precise marking and careful fitting.

Fig. 42.—Dovetailed Halving Joint used for Lengthening Timber. Fig. 42.—Dovetailed Halving Joint Used for Lengthening Timber.
Fig. 43.—Dovetailed and     Halved Joint.

Fig. 43.—Dovetailed and Halved Joint.

Fig. 43.—Dovetail and Half Joint.

Fig. 44.—Dovetailed Halved     Joint with Shoulders.

Fig. 44.—Dovetailed Halved Joint with Shoulders.

Fig. 44.—Dovetailed Halved Joint with Shoulders.

Fig. 43 shows a combination of a halved joint dovetailed edgeways, whilst Fig. 44 shows a dovetailed[Pg 20] halved joint with the shoulders housed. This latter is seldom used in actual work.

Fig. 43 shows a split joint with dovetails on the sides, while Fig. 44 shows a dovetailed[Pg 20] split joint with the ends fitted in. This latter method is rarely used in practice.

At Fig. 45 we have the application of halving joints when constructing a barrow wheel. The centre portion is an example of three pieces half-lapped or, as it is sometimes called, one-third lapped. A sketch of the three pieces separated is shown at L, B, C, Fig. 46.

At Fig. 45 we use halving joints when building a barrow wheel. The center part is an example of three pieces that are half-lapped, which is also known as one-third lapped. A sketch of the three separated pieces is shown at L, B, C, Fig. 46.

This joint is extensively used in the pattern making trade for lap-jointing the arms of pulley patterns, etc. It is probably the most difficult of the halving joints to mark out and construct with the desired degree of accuracy.

This joint is widely used in the pattern-making industry for lap-jointing the arms of pulley patterns and similar items. It's likely the most challenging of the halving joints to layout and build with the required level of precision.

Fig. 45.—Halved Joints on Barrow Wheels.

Fig. 45.—Halved Joints on Barrow Wheels.

Fig. 45.—Halved Joints on Barrow Wheels.

Fig. 46.—Detail of Halved Joints in Fig. 45.

Fig. 46.—Detail of Halved Joints in Fig. 45.

Fig. 46.—Detail of Halved Joints in Fig. 45.

Fig. 47 shows a combination of a bevelled dovetail half-lapped joint. This is only used as a puzzle joint. When neatly constructed and glued together it is apparently impossible to make it, showing as it does a half lap on one side and a dovetailed half lap on the reverse side.

Fig. 47 shows a mix of a beveled dovetail half-lapped joint. This is only used as a puzzle joint. When it’s well made and glued together, it seems impossible to take apart, since it has a half lap on one side and a dovetailed half lap on the other side.

Fig. 48 is the end view of a kitchen table with drop leaf, showing the skirting board scribed to the solid side. A table of this type is fastened to the wall with two iron holdfasts which engage the ends of the table.[Pg 21]

Fig. 48 shows a kitchen table with drop leaves from the end view, displaying the skirting board fitted to the solid side. This type of table is attached to the wall with two iron holdfasts that secure the ends of the table.[Pg 21]

Fig. 47.—Bevelled Dovetailed     Half Lap.

Fig. 47.—Bevelled Dovetailed Half Lap.

Beveled Dovetail Half Lap.

Fig. 48.—Bracket of     Drop Table.

Fig. 48.—Bracket of Drop Table.

Fig. 48.—Bracket of Drop Table.

Figs. 49 and 50.—Separate pieces of Halved Moulded Joint. Figs. 49 and 50.—Individual parts of Halved Moulded Joint.
Fig. 51.—Oblique Cross Halving Joint. Fig. 51.—Oblique Cross Halving Joint.

[Pg 22] The hinged bracket frame shows the application of the halving joint to bracket supports for this and similar purposes, such as brackets to support shelving, etc. In this example the hinged brackets turn underneath the table top, and allow the leaf to drop out of the way when not required. The dotted lines show the position of a shelf for boots and shoes.

[Pg 22] The hinged bracket frame demonstrates how to use the halving joint with bracket supports for this and similar purposes, like supporting shelves, etc. In this example, the hinged brackets fold under the tabletop, allowing the leaf to drop down when not needed. The dotted lines indicate where a shelf for boots and shoes would be placed.

Fig. 52.—Manual Training     Halved Exercise Joint.

Fig. 52.—Manual Training Halved Exercise Joint.

Fig. 52.—Manual Training Halved Exercise Joint.

Fig. 53.—Exercise     Dovetail Joint.

Fig. 53.—Exercise Dovetail Joint.

Fig. 53.—Exercise Dovetail Joint.

Fig. 54.—Carpentry Tie Joint. Fig. 54.—Carpentry Tie Joint.

Figs. 49 and 50 indicate the halving of cross pieces which have their edges moulded; the pieces are shown separately, the moulding being omitted to give a clearer representation of the method of construction.

Figs. 49 and 50 show the halving of cross pieces with molded edges; the pieces are displayed separately, with the molding left out for a clearer representation of the construction method.

Fig. 55.—Cross Halving Joint     with Housed Corners.

Fig. 55.—Cross Halving Joint with Housed Corners.

Fig. 55.—Cross Halving Joint with Housed Corners.

Fig. 56.—The parts of Fig. 55     shown separate.

Fig. 56.—The parts of Fig. 55 shown separate.

Fig. 56.—The parts of Fig. 55 shown separately.

Fig. 51 is an "Oblique Cross Halving Joint" where the two pieces are not at right angles. A plan and elevation of the joint are shown at the left, whilst a sketch of one piece of the joint is given in the right-hand illustration.

Fig. 51 is an "Oblique Cross Halving Joint" where the two pieces meet at an angle instead of being at right angles. A plan and elevation of the joint are shown on the left, while a sketch of one piece of the joint is provided in the right-hand illustration.

Figs. 52 and 53 are principally used as Manual Training models, and call for patience and manual dexterity.

Figs. 52 and 53 are mainly used as hands-on training models and require patience and skillful hands.

Fig. 54 is used in carpentry and joinery where a tie or cross piece ties joists or beams at an angle.

Fig. 54 is used in carpentry and joinery where a tie or cross piece connects joists or beams at an angle.

Fig. 55 shows the elevation and end view of a "Cross Halving Joint" with housed or notched shoulders. This joint is seldom used in actual practice. The separate parts are given in Fig. 56.

Fig. 55 shows the elevation and end view of a "Cross Halving Joint" with housed or notched shoulders. This joint is rarely used in practice. The separate parts are given in Fig. 56.

At Fig. 57 are shown two cross rails and an upright halved together. This type of joint is used where three[Pg 24] pieces meet, as is the case in building the framing of a poultry house. The joint is nailed together.

At Fig. 57 are shown two cross rails and an upright joined together. This type of joint is used where three[Pg 24] pieces meet, like when framing a poultry house. The joint is nailed together.

Fig. 57.—Cross Rail and     Upright Halved Joint.

Fig. 57.—Cross Rail and Upright Halved Joint.

Fig. 57.—Cross Rail and Upright Halved Joint.

Fig. 58.—Workshop     Trestle Joint.

Fig. 58.—Workshop Trestle Joint.

Fig. 58.—Workshop Trestle Joint.

Fig. 59.—Cellarette Partition Joints. Fig. 59.—Cellarette Partition Joints.

Fig. 58 is the end view of an ordinary workshop trestle, showing the application of dovetailed halving[Pg 25] where the legs have a tendency to strain outwards. The inset sketch of joint shows the housing of the top rail to receive the legs.

Fig. 58 is the end view of a typical workshop trestle, demonstrating the use of dovetailed halving[Pg 25] where the legs tend to spread outward. The inset sketch of the joint illustrates how the top rail is designed to accommodate the legs.

Fig. 59 shows a deep drawer, generally known as a cellarette, and used in a sideboard to accommodate wine bottles. Here we have a good example of halving the cross pieces so as to form compartments. The part shown separately illustrates the method of construction. The ends of these pieces engage the housings or grooves of the drawer sides. Pigeon holes or compartments in stationery cases, bookcases and writing bureaux are constructed in a similar manner, although the method of housing, or combined halving and housing, is to be preferred in some cases.

Fig. 59 shows a deep drawer, commonly known as a cellarette, used in a sideboard to hold wine bottles. Here, we see a great example of splitting the cross pieces to create compartments. The part shown separately demonstrates the construction method. The ends of these pieces fit into the slots or grooves of the drawer sides. Pigeonholes or compartments in stationery cases, bookcases, and writing desks are built in a similar way, although the method of housing, or the combination of halving and housing, is preferred in some cases.

Fig. 60.—Joint used for Table with Circular Top or Rim. Fig. 60.—Joint used for a table with a round top or rim.

At Fig. 60 is the plan of a circular table having a small circular shelf with the top removed. The rims or[Pg 26] framing are built by the method known as laminating (see Fig. 23 in chapter on the The Glued Joint), after which they are veneered on the face sides. The application[Pg 27] of the halving joint to the shaped bottom rails, which in this case carry and support the small shelf, is shown in the part elevation.

At Fig. 60 is the design of a circular table featuring a small round shelf with the top taken off. The edges or[Pg 26] frame are constructed using a technique called laminating (see Fig. 23 in the chapter on The Glued Joint), after which they are covered with veneer on the front sides. The use of the halving joint on the shaped bottom rails, which in this case support the small shelf, is illustrated in the elevation view.[Pg 27]

Fig. 61 (A).—Oxford Frame with Halved Joints. (Four alternative corner treatments are given.) Fig. 61 (A).—Oxford Frame with Halved Joints. (Four different options for corner treatments are provided.)
Fig. 61 (B).—Halved Joint of Oxford     Frame with front edges champered.

Fig. 61 (B).—Halved Joint of Oxford Frame with front edges champered.

Fig. 61 (B).—Halved Joint of Oxford Frame with front edges beveled.

Fig. 61 (C).—Back     view of Oxford Frame.

Fig. 61 (C).—Back view of Oxford Frame.

Fig. 61 (C).—Back view of Oxford Frame.

Fig. 61 (A) shows the well-known "Oxford frame," illustrating halved joints when the edge is rebated. Figs. 61 (B) and 61 (C) make clear the construction of this type of joint. Alternative suggestions are shown for the treatment of the corners, the simple inlay being black and white (ebony and holly or boxwood). Frames of this type are made in various widths and sizes and are used for pictures, mirrors, etc.

Fig. 61 (A) shows the famous "Oxford frame," demonstrating halved joints when the edge is rebated. Figs. 61 (B) and 61 (C) clarifies the construction of this kind of joint. Other options are provided for corner treatment, with a simple inlay of black and white (ebony and holly or boxwood). Frames like this come in different widths and sizes and are used for pictures, mirrors, and more.

Fig. 62.—The Two Pieces of a Halved Joint. Fig. 62.—The Two Halved Pieces of a Joint.

The tools used for making joints of the above class are: planes, the gauge, tenon or other saw, chisels, try square, and in some cases a joiner's bevel to obtain and mark the necessary angles, pencil and marking knife.

The tools used for making joints of the above class are: planes, gauges, tenon or other saws, chisels, try squares, and in some cases a joiner's bevel to get and mark the necessary angles, pencil and marking knife.

Plane up the face side and face edge of the timber, gauge and plane to both thickness and width; mark shoulders with pencil or marking knife; gauge to the thickness of the required halving; saw waste portions away; pare up with chisel to a good fit; glue or glue and screw, or use paint as previously mentioned, and then level off the surfaces.[Pg 28]

Flatten the face side and edge of the wood, measure and smooth both thickness and width; mark the shoulders with a pencil or marking knife; measure to the thickness of the needed halving; saw away the waste parts; trim smoothly with a chisel for a good fit; glue or glue and screw, or use paint as mentioned earlier, and then even out the surfaces.[Pg 28]

Setting out the Halved Joint.—Although at first sight the halved joint may appear to be a very easy item of construction, it requires much care and attention in marking out and sawing. Fig. 62 shows the two pieces which form the joint separated, and it will be noticed that each piece of wood has half its thickness cut away, so as to accommodate the other piece. This type of joint is used where two pieces of wood cross each other at right angles, or at an angle as shown in Fig. 51. The halving joint is used also for joining two pieces of wood at their ends, as, for instance, the corner of a frame, one half of this joint being shown at Fig. 65 (B).

Setting out the Halved Joint.—At first glance, the halved joint might seem like an easy construction task, but it needs a lot of care and precision in marking and cutting. Fig. 62 shows the two pieces that make up the joint apart, and you’ll notice that each piece of wood has half of its thickness removed to fit the other piece. This type of joint is used when two pieces of wood cross each other at right angles, or at an angle as illustrated in Fig. 51. The halved joint is also used to connect two pieces of wood at their ends, such as at the corner of a frame, with one half of this joint depicted in Fig. 65 (B).

Fig. 63.—How the Timber is Marked. Fig. 63.—How the Timber is Labeled.
Fig. 64.—Marking the Joint with Try Square. Fig. 64.—Marking the Joint with a Try Square.

To make the joint, the timber should be carefully[Pg 29] planed to its exact width and thickness. The two pieces may then be placed upon the bench (as shown at Fig. 63) or fixed in the vice.

To create the joint, the wood should be carefully[Pg 29] planed to its precise width and thickness. The two pieces can then be set on the bench (as shown at Fig. 63) or secured in the vice.

Find the centre of the timber, C, Fig. 63, and set out half the width of the wood on each side of the dotted centre line. Thus, suppose the wood (W) to be 2 ins. wide, then set 1 in. on each side of the centre line. Take a square as at Fig. 64, and with a sharp penknife blade score or cut a line all round each piece of timber.

Find the center of the wood, C, Fig. 63, and mark half the width of the wood on each side of the dotted centerline. For example, if the wood (W) is 2 inches wide, mark 1 inch on each side of the centerline. Use a square as shown at Fig. 64, and with a sharp knife, score or cut a line all the way around each piece of wood.

Fig. 65.—Using the Marking Gauge. Fig. 65.—Using the Marking Tool.

Next take up a marking gauge, and set the marking point to half the thickness of the wood. The distance may be measured, and its exactness tested, by pricking a small hole from each side of the wood with the marking gauge and carefully noting that the pricked holes coincide. The gauge mark is clearly shown in the various illustrations. Now, take a pencil and scribble or mark "waste" on the parts you intend to cut away. This will save trouble later on, especially if you are making several joints at once. Take your sharp penknife or marking knife blade, and cut fairly deeply into the marked line on the portion you are going to pare away.[Pg 30]

Next, grab a marking gauge and set the marking point to half the thickness of the wood. You can measure the distance and check its accuracy by making a small hole from each side of the wood with the marking gauge and ensuring that the holes line up. The gauge mark is clearly shown in the various illustrations. Now, take a pencil and write "waste" on the parts you plan to cut away. This will save you trouble later, especially if you're making several joints at once. Use your sharp penknife or marking knife blade to cut fairly deeply along the marked line on the section you’re going to remove.[Pg 30]

Fig. 66.—Chiselling away Wood up to Gauge Line. Fig. 66.—Chiseling Wood to the Gauge Line.
Fig. 67.—How work is held when Sawing Shoulder. Fig. 67.—How to hold work when sawing a shoulder.

Fix the wood firmly in your vice, or against your cutting board or bench stop, as may be more convenient to you, and with a sharp chisel cut away the wood up to the marked line, as at Fig. 66. The channel in the sketch is exaggerated, so as to show the method clearly. The object of using a penknife or marking knife to mark your work, instead of using a pencil, will[Pg 31] be obvious. Owing to the knife having scored about 116 in. deep across the fibres of the wood, the timber will come away cleanly when the chisel is used, as at Fig. 66. The small channel thus made will form a guide in which to start your tenon or dovetail saw; it prevents the saw cutting on the wrong side of the marked line and thus making the halving too wide.

Fix the wood securely in your vice, or against your cutting board or bench stop, whichever is more convenient for you, and with a sharp chisel, cut away the wood up to the marked line, as at Fig. 66. The channel in the sketch is exaggerated to clearly show the method. The reason for using a penknife or marking knife instead of a pencil will[Pg 31] be obvious. Since the knife has scored about 1/16 in. deep across the fibers of the wood, the timber will come away cleanly when the chisel is used, as at Fig. 66. The small channel created will serve as a guide for starting your tenon or dovetail saw; it prevents the saw from cutting on the wrong side of the marked line, which would make the halving too wide.

Fig. 68.—Paring away Waste with Chisel. Fig. 68.—Removing Waste with a Chisel.
Fig. 69.—Showing an Oblique Halved Joint. Fig. 69.—Displaying an Oblique Halved Joint.

Sawing.—Lay the work on the cutting board as at Fig. 67; or, if you prefer, put the work in the vice. Carefully saw down the work until you just touch the gauge line. Do not press heavily with the saw; use it lightly; the weight of the back iron which is fixed on the saw will ensure the saw feeding into the work quite fast enough. If the saw is newly sharpened it will, in fact, be an advantage to slightly ease the weight of the[Pg 32] saw from off the wood, owing to the keenness of its edge. If the halving is a very wide one, additional cuts may be sawn between the outside marks, and these will greatly facilitate the removal of the waste wood when paring it away. For sawing the joint reference may be made to the chapter on Dovetailing.

Sawing.—Place the work on the cutting board as shown at Fig. 67; or, if you'd rather, secure the work in the vice. Carefully saw down until you just touch the gauge line. Don’t apply too much pressure with the saw; use it lightly; the weight of the back iron attached to the saw will ensure it cuts into the work quickly enough. If the saw is freshly sharpened, it’s actually better to lift the weight of the[Pg 32] saw slightly off the wood because of its sharp edge. If the halving is very wide, you can make additional cuts between the outer marks, which will make it much easier to remove the waste wood when cleaning it up. For sawing the joint, refer to the chapter on Dovetailing.

Fig. 70.—Sawing the Cheek of a Halving Joint. Fig. 70.—Cutting the Cheek of a Halving Joint.

Paring away the waste material with a chisel is the next step, and this is shown at Fig. 68. The work may be chiselled either in a vertical or a horizontal position. The horizontal position is the easiest for the amateur who has a vice or handscrew, because he may hold the work securely with a mechanical device and so avoid the unnecessary risk to his fingers.

Removing the excess material with a chisel is the next step, which is shown at Fig. 68. The work can be chiseled either vertically or horizontally. The horizontal position is the easiest for beginners who have a vice or handscrew, as they can secure the work with a mechanical device, minimizing the risk to their fingers.

Take the chisel and cut away A, Fig. 68; now turn[Pg 33] the chisel and cut away B; after which keep the chisel horizontal and cut off "the top of the hill," as it were, C. Repeat the three operations until you gradually pare the wood away exactly to the gauge line. When chiselling, if you find a tendency for the work to chip or crumble at the back edge owing to the forward pressure of the chisel, turn your wood round and begin to cut from the other edge, allowing the chisel to finish paring at the centre.

Take the chisel and cut away A, Fig. 68; now turn[Pg 33] the chisel and cut away B; after that, keep the chisel horizontal and trim off "the top of the hill," so to speak, C. Repeat these three steps until you gradually shave the wood down to the gauge line. When chiseling, if you notice that the work tends to chip or crumble at the back edge due to the chisel's forward pressure, turn your wood around and start cutting from the other edge, letting the chisel finish trimming in the center.

Joints Other than a Right Angle.—If the halving joint is at an angle similar to the sketch shown at Fig. 69, great care will have to be exercised in the use of the chisel, owing to the change in the direction of the grain of the wood. The arrow marks in this sketch distinctly indicate the direction in which the chiselling must be done so as to give a smooth result. This change of direction for cutting also applies to the bottom of the halving joint.

Joints Other than a Right Angle.—If the halving joint is at an angle like the one shown in Fig. 69, you need to be very careful when using the chisel because of the change in the direction of the wood grain. The arrows in this sketch clearly show the direction you should chisel to achieve a smooth finish. This change in cutting direction also applies to the bottom of the halving joint.

Cutting Joint at End of Timber (Fig. 70).—Should the halving joint be used at the end of a piece of wood, as at Fig. 30, the waste material may be roughly sawn away and the flat surface trimmed up with a chisel.

Cutting Joint at End of Timber (Fig. 70).—If you use a halving joint at the end of a piece of wood, like at Fig. 30, you can roughly saw away the excess material and then clean up the flat surface with a chisel.

To saw out this type of halving joint, proceed to work the shoulder line as already described; then place the piece of wood obliquely in the vice as shown (Fig. 70) and proceed to saw down the vertical line, carefully watching the gauge line to see that you saw on the waste side of the lines. Then turn the piece of timber with its opposite edge towards you, and again use the saw as illustrated. You will this time only have to watch the gauge mark on the edge of the wood, because the saw will readily follow in the saw kerf already made. Now place the wood vertically in the vice, and keeping the saw in a horizontal position, saw down to the shoulder line.

To cut this type of halving joint, first work on the shoulder line as previously described; then position the piece of wood at an angle in the vice as shown (Fig. 70) and saw down the vertical line, making sure to stay on the waste side of the lines. Next, turn the piece of timber so the opposite edge is facing you, and use the saw as illustrated again. This time, just focus on the gauge mark on the edge of the wood because the saw will easily follow the groove already cut. Now, place the wood vertically in the vice, keeping the saw horizontal, and saw down to the shoulder line.

Halving joints properly made and fitted should knock together with the weight of the clenched fist; the use of a heavy mallet or hammer will deface the work.[Pg 34]

Halved joints that are correctly made and fitted should fit together tightly with the force of a clenched fist; using a heavy mallet or hammer will damage the work.[Pg 34]

Fig. 71.—Joints used in the erection of a Queen Post Roof Truss. Fig. 71.—Joints used in building a Queen Post Roof Truss.

THE BRIDLE JOINT

A bridle joint is often defined as the reverse of a mortise and tenon, and is chiefly used in the carpentry and joinery trades. The name probably originated from the fact that it bears some resemblance to the manner in which a bit slips into the horse's mouth and is fastened to the bridle. There are fewer varieties of the bridle joint than of the halved or the mortise and tenon; and this being the case we may take the opportunity of giving a few detailed directions, with explanatory illustrations, on the setting out and the making.

A bridle joint is typically seen as the opposite of a mortise and tenon and is mainly used in carpentry and joinery. The name likely comes from its resemblance to how a bit fits into a horse's mouth and attaches to the bridle. There are fewer types of bridle joints compared to halved joints or mortise and tenons; since this is the case, we can take a moment to provide some detailed instructions, along with illustrative examples, on how to set it out and create it.

Fig. 72.—Simple Bridle Joint. Fig. 72.—Basic Bridle Joint.

Fig. 72 shows a bridle joint in what is perhaps its simplest form, the separate pieces being given at the left and the completed joint at the right. A joint of[Pg 36] this type may be applied in nearly all cases where a halved or a mortise and tenon joint could be used. Bridle joints have an advantage as regards appearance over the mortise and tenoned variety in cases such as Fig. 73, which shows an occasional table leg fitted to the circular top framing. The bridle joint here allows the grain of the leg to run through to the top, and gives a better and more workmanlike appearance to the completed article.

Fig. 72 shows a bridle joint in its simplest form, with the separate pieces illustrated on the left and the finished joint on the right. A joint like this can be used in almost any situation where a halved or a mortise and tenon joint might work. Bridle joints are visually more appealing than the mortise and tenon type in cases like Fig. 73, which depicts a table leg attached to the circular top frame. The bridle joint here lets the grain of the leg extend through to the top, resulting in a better and more professional look for the finished piece.

Fig. 73.—Table Leg Bridle-jointed to Rail. Fig. 73.—Table leg connected to the rail with a bridle joint.

Fig. 74 is a "Mitred bridle joint," the part a showing the upright portion separated. This is a most useful joint for positions similar to that shown in the small glass frame, Fig. 75. The wood framing in this case is only 138 in. in width, and if a mortise were used it would have to[Pg 37] be exceptionally small. The shaped rail at the bottom of this frame again shows the application of the bridle joint.

Fig. 74 is a "Mitred bridle joint," with part a indicating the upright section that's separated. This joint is really handy for setups like the one seen in the small glass frame, Fig. 75. In this case, the wood framing is only 138 in. wide, and if we used a mortise, it would have to be very small. The shaped rail at the bottom of this frame also demonstrates how the bridle joint is applied.

Fig. 76 shows an "Oblique bridle joint," used in many instances as a brace, or strut, to prevent framing from racking. (See also Figs. 31 and 32.)

Fig. 76 shows an "Oblique bridle joint," which is often used as a brace or strut to stop the framing from twisting. (See also Figs. 31 and 32.)

Fig. 77 is a "Stopped bridle joint," used in positions where the top or bottom edge of the work meets the eye, and where, if the rail were allowed to run through, the end grain would appear unsightly.

Fig. 77 is a "Stopped bridle joint," used in places where the top or bottom edge of the work is visible, and where, if the rail were to extend through, the end grain would look unattractive.

Fig. 74.—Mitre     Bridle Joint.

Fig. 74.—Mitre Bridle Joint.

Fig. 74.—Miter Bridle Joint.

Fig. 75.—Mirror Frame     with Bridle Joints.

Fig. 75.—Mirror Frame with Bridle Joints.

Fig. 75.—Mirror Frame with Bridle Joints.

Fig. 78 is a so-called bridle-joint at the corner of a frame. This is also called an "Open slot mortise and tenon joint," a good strong, serviceable joint which can be used instead of the closed mortise and tenon type, its advantage being that less labour is required in the making. (See also Fig. 169.)

Fig. 78 is a bridle joint at the corner of a frame. This is also known as an "open slot mortise and tenon joint," which is a strong and functional joint that can replace the closed mortise and tenon type. Its advantage is that it requires less labor to create. (See also Fig. 169.)

Fig. 79 is an "Oblique angle bridle joint," used in similar positions to the above, but when the two pieces meet at an acute angle at the end of a frame.

Fig. 79 is an "Oblique angle bridle joint," used in similar positions as mentioned above, but when the two pieces come together at an acute angle at the end of a frame.

Fig. 80 shows the application of the bridle joint to a roof truss. Two sketches are shown at the joining of the tie beam and the principal rafter. The joint a is the type generally used. (See also Fig. 71 for the joints in a queen post roof.)[Pg 38]

Fig. 80 illustrates how the bridle joint is used in a roof truss. Two sketches display the connection between the tie beam and the principal rafter. Joint a is the one that is mostly used. (Refer to Fig. 71 for the joints in a queen post roof.)[Pg 38]

Fig. 76.—Oblique     Bridle Joint.

Fig. 76.—Oblique Bridle Joint.

Fig. 76.—Angled Bridle Joint.

Fig. 77.—Stopped Bridle     Joint.

Fig. 77.—Stopped Bridle Joint.

Fig. 77.—Stopped Bridle Joint.

Fig. 78.—Bridle Joint     at Corner of Frame.

Fig. 78.—Bridle Joint at Corner of Frame.

Fig. 78.—Bridle Joint at Corner of Frame.

Fig. 79.—Oblique Angle     Bridle Joint.

Fig. 79.—Oblique Angle Bridle Joint.

Oblique Angle Bridle Joint.

Fig. 80.—Application of Bridle Joint to Roof Truss. Fig. 80.—Using a Bridle Joint in a Roof Truss.

Setting Out and Marking.—It is a safe rule, when setting out a bridle joint, to divide the thickness of the timber into three equal parts. This will leave the timber on each side of the tongue equal to the thickness of the tongue, thus giving uniform strength to the joint. The bridle joint is chiefly used for connecting the internal parts of wooden frames. It is stronger than the halving joint, and, owing to its peculiar construction, requires little in the way of pegs, screws or nails to secure it in position. Fig. 81 illustrates the joint, both open and closed.

Setting Out and Marking.—A good rule when marking a bridle joint is to split the thickness of the wood into three equal parts. This will leave equal thickness on both sides of the tongue, which ensures the joint has uniform strength. The bridle joint is mainly used for connecting the internal parts of wooden frames. It's stronger than the halving joint and, because of its unique design, needs few pegs, screws, or nails to hold it in place. Fig. 81 shows the joint, both open and closed.

To understand the method of setting out and marking, glance at the sketch, Fig. 81. It is not necessary that the bridle piece A be the same width as the cross piece B; but it must be remembered when setting out the joint with the marking knife or pencil that the width marked W on piece B must be equal to the width W on the piece A. The timber should be fairly accurately sawn or planed to the same thickness, and all edges should be square and true.

To understand how to lay out and mark, check out the sketch, Fig. 81. It’s not essential for the bridle piece A to be the same width as the cross piece B; however, when marking the joint with a knife or pencil, keep in mind that the width marked W on piece B must match the width W on piece A. The timber should be cut or planed to a consistent thickness, and all edges should be clean and straight.

The wood is placed upon the bench, and the joint marked out by using a marking knife or penknife blade and the try square. A knife blade is much better than a pencil, as the sharp edge severs the fibres of the wood and gives a finer line than the pencil. It is not always necessary to exactly square and trim the end of piece A; it may with advantage in many cases be left at least 14 in. longer than necessary and levelled off with the saw, plane and chisel after the joint is put together. (See Method of Cutting in Fig. 92, page 47.)

The wood is placed on the bench, and the joint is marked out using a marking knife or penknife blade along with a try square. A knife blade is much better than a pencil because the sharp edge cuts through the wood fibers and creates a finer line than a pencil. It’s not always necessary to perfectly square and trim the end of piece A; in many cases, it can be beneficial to leave it at least 14 in. longer than needed and trim it down with a saw, plane, and chisel after the joint is assembled. (See Method of Cutting in Fig. 92, page 47.)

When the piece A has to have a bridle joint fitted at each end, it is customary to cut the timber about 38 in. longer than necessary, and mark the shoulder lines C to the exact length, after which the joints are cut. This leaves the ends standing over the horizontal[Pg 40] rails, and, after fixing the complete frame together, the small projecting ends are levelled off flush with the cross rails.

When you need to fit a bridle joint at each end of piece A, it's standard practice to cut the timber about 38 inches longer than necessary, and then mark the shoulder lines C to the exact length before cutting the joints. This leaves the ends extending over the horizontal [Pg 40] rails. After assembling the complete frame, the small protruding ends are trimmed flush with the cross rails.

Gauging.—After squaring all the shoulder lines round the timber with the knife and try square, the mortise gauge should be set so as to strike the two gauge lines marked G, Figs. 83 and 84, at one operation. If the worker does not possess a mortise gauge the lines may be marked at two distinct operations with the aid of the marking gauge (Fig. 82). The gauge should be adjusted so as to mark the wood into thirds, and the stock of the gauge (the portion of the gauge containing the thumb screw in Fig. 82) must be used from the face side of the timber when gauging up the whole of the pieces forming a frame. The face mark on the work is indicated by a glorified comma, and the edge mark is shown by X, as in the various illustrations. Fig. 82 shows the method of holding the gauge in the right hand whilst gauging the lines on the work.

Gauging.—After evening out all the shoulder lines around the timber with a knife and try square, the mortise gauge should be set to strike the two gauge lines marked G, Figs. 83 and 84, in one go. If the worker doesn’t have a mortise gauge, the lines can be marked in two separate steps using the marking gauge (Fig. 82). The gauge should be adjusted to mark the wood into thirds, and the stock of the gauge (the part that has the thumb screw in Fig. 82) must be used from the face side of the timber when marking all the pieces that make up a frame. The face mark on the work is represented by a fancy comma, and the edge mark is shown by X, as illustrated in various diagrams. Fig. 82 demonstrates how to hold the gauge in the right hand while marking the lines on the work.

Fig. 81.—Bridle Joint, open     and closed.

Fig. 81.—Bridle Joint, open and closed.

Fig. 81.—Bridle Joint, open and closed.

Fig. 82.—Gauging the     Timber.

Fig. 82.—Gauging the Timber.

Fig. 82.—Measuring the Timber.

The joint, when marked out, will appear as at[Pg 41] Figs. 83 and 84, and the portions which are to be cut away may be shaded with a pencil as indicated; this will prevent mistakes arising whilst cutting the work, especially by one who is not thoroughly familiar with the joint.

The joint, when marked out, will look like at[Pg 41] Figs. 83 and 84, and the parts that need to be cut away can be shaded with a pencil as shown; this will help avoid mistakes during the cutting process, especially for someone who isn't completely familiar with the joint.

The distance A B, in Fig. 84, must not be less than the distance A B in Fig. 83.

The distance A B, in Fig. 84, must be at least as long as the distance A B in Fig. 83.

Fig. 83.

Fig. 83.

Fig. 83.

Fig. 84.

Fig. 84.

Fig. 84.

The Two Parts of the Joint Marked.

The Two Parts of the Joint Marked.

Boring Away Waste.—Examine Fig. 84; the shaded portion in the centre has to be cut away, and it will greatly facilitate the removal of this waste piece by boring a hole with a twist bit at the position shown. The twist bit should be about 18 in. less in diameter than the width between the gauge lines G. The easiest method of boring out this hole is shown at Fig. 85, which gives the correct position of the worker.

Removing Waste Material.—Look at Fig. 84; the shaded area in the middle needs to be cut out, and it will make it much easier to take out this waste piece by drilling a hole with a twist bit at the indicated spot. The twist bit should be about 18 inches smaller in diameter than the space between the gauge lines G. The simplest way to drill this hole is shown at Fig. 85, which illustrates the correct position of the worker.

Fig. 85.—Vertical Boring previous to Chiselling. Fig. 85.—Vertical Boring before Chiseling.

Sawing.—The wood should be put in the vice as Fig. 86. Taking up a saw, with the index finger on the side of the handle, commence sawing, and proceed until you come to the position indicated by the dotted hand and saw A; this will leave a saw kerf or cut running diagonally from the shoulder line to corner of the wood. Release the vice and refix the wood so that it leans in exactly the opposite direction to Fig. 86; then reverse your own position and repeat the sawing, so as to cut[Pg 42] another diagonal saw cut from the shoulder line to the corner. Fix the wood upright, as shown at Fig. 87, and saw as shown, when you will find that the saw has no tendency to run out of the guide cuts already formed by the method used at Fig. 86. Remember, when commencing to saw at Fig. 86, that it is necessary to saw inside the gauge line; otherwise the joint will be too slack, owing to the amount of sawdust removed by the thickness of the saw blade. The index finger on the side of the saw, pointing in the direction of the saw cut,[Pg 43] will greatly help the worker to saw in a straight line, as it is natural to point with this finger to any object that is to be aimed at.

Sawing.—The wood should be secured in the vice as Fig. 86. Take a saw, placing your index finger on the side of the handle, and start sawing. Keep going until you reach the spot indicated by the dotted hand and saw A; this will create a saw kerf or cut running diagonally from the shoulder line to the corner of the wood. Release the vice and reposition the wood so it leans in the exact opposite direction of Fig. 86; then change your position and repeat the sawing to create another diagonal saw cut from the shoulder line to the corner. Set the wood upright, as shown at Fig. 87, and saw as demonstrated. You’ll find that the saw stays aligned with the guide cuts already made using the technique at Fig. 86. Remember that when starting to saw at Fig. 86, you need to saw inside the gauge line; otherwise, the joint will be too loose due to the sawdust removed by the thickness of the saw blade. Keeping your index finger on the side of the saw, pointing in the direction of the saw cut, will help you saw in a straight line, as it’s natural to aim this finger at an object.

Fig. 86.—How the Saw is held for the first Cut. Fig. 86.—How to hold the saw for the first cut.

Cut down the other line in a similar manner, and then with a chisel of suitable width carefully chop away the waste material. The wood may be placed edge way upon the bench, or in the vice, and the chisel should be held vertically. The hole which has been bored with the twist bit will allow the chips which are cut away to offer little or no resistance to the chisel blade. The chiselling should not all be done from one side, or a chipped under-edge will be the result; it is better to chisel the work until half-way through and then turn the other edge of the wood uppermost and again begin to chisel from the top. This method will finish the cutting in the centre of the work and prevent burred and ragged or chipped edges at the shoulder.[Pg 44]

Cut down the other side in a similar way, and then use a chisel of appropriate width to carefully remove the excess material. You can place the wood on the bench edgewise or in a vice, and hold the chisel vertically. The hole made with the twist bit will help the shavings come out easily with little resistance to the chisel blade. Don't do all the chiseling from one side, or you'll end up with a chipped under-edge; it's better to chisel halfway through and then flip the wood over to started chiseling from the top again. This technique will finish the cutting in the center and help avoid rough, jagged, or chipped edges at the shoulder.[Pg 44]

Fig. 87.—Third, or Horizontal Cut. Fig. 87.—Third (Horizontal) Cut.
Fig. 88.—Chiselling Operation. Fig. 88.—Chiseling Process.

Cutting the Shoulders.—With regard to working the piece B, Fig. 81, place the wood against the bench stop or in the vice, and taking up a 34-in. chisel carefully cut away a small channel, as shown at Fig. 88; treat the other shoulder lines in a similar manner. If the[Pg 45] marking knife or penknife blade has been used with a fair amount of pressure so as to score the fibres of the wood, this small channel, which is to form a guide for the saw, will quickly and easily be cut. Next place the wood in the vice or on the cutting board as shown at Fig. 89, and begin by sawing lightly at the back edge as shown. When the saw has entered the wood 14 in. gradually bring the handle down from position A to position B (dotted lines) whilst the saw is in motion. Continue sawing until just on the gauge line; then treat the other shoulder lines in a similar manner.

Cutting the Shoulders.—To work on piece B, Fig. 81, position the wood against the bench stop or in the vice. Using a 34-inch chisel, carefully cut a small channel as shown at Fig. 88; do the same for the other shoulder lines. If the marking knife or penknife blade has been pressed down sufficiently to score the wood fibers, this small channel, which will serve as a guide for the saw, will be easy to cut. Next, place the wood in the vice or on the cutting board as shown at Fig. 89, and start by sawing lightly at the back edge as illustrated. Once the saw has penetrated the wood by 14 inch, gradually lower the handle from position A to position B (dotted lines) while the saw is moving. Keep sawing until you reach just on the gauge line; then proceed with the other shoulder lines in the same way.

Fig. 89.—Sawing the Shoulders. Fig. 89.—Cutting the Shoulders.

Chiselling away Waste.—Fix your wood firmly in any suitable manner, vice or otherwise, and, holding[Pg 46] your chisel tilted as at Fig. 90, pare away the blacked portion 1; then pare away the blacked portion 2; after which hold the chisel flat and by gradual operations pare away the dotted lines 3, until you come down to the gauge line; then repeat the method of cutting on the opposite side of the wood. If any difficulty be experienced by chipped or ragged edges whilst chiselling, it can easily be overcome by chiselling alternately from the outside of the wood, so that the finish of the chisel cut takes place in the centre of the work. Some prefer to chisel away the waste by placing the wood on its edge and using the chisel vertically instead of horizontally. The same methods (1, 2 and 3) hold good in this case.

Removing Waste Material.—Secure your wood firmly using a vice or another method, and, while holding your chisel angled as at Fig. 90, chip away the blackened area 1; then remove the blackened area 2; after that, hold the chisel flat and gradually chip away the dotted lines 3, until you reach the gauge line; then repeat the cutting method on the other side of the wood. If you face any issues with chipped or rough edges while chiseling, you can easily fix this by alternating your chiseling from the outer edge of the wood, ensuring that the chisel cut finishes in the center of the work. Some people prefer to remove waste by positioning the wood on its edge and using the chisel vertically instead of horizontally. The same methods (1, 2 and 3) apply in this scenario.

Fig. 90.—Chiselling away Waste. Fig. 90.—Removing Waste.

Joints Other than at 90°.—The two pieces forming a bridle joint are not always at right angles, as at Fig. 81; in many instances it is necessary that the joint be at other than 90 degrees. The work, however, is treated in a similar manner, with the exception that an adjustable joiner's bevel is used instead of a try[Pg 47] square to mark out the shoulder lines, and that a change of direction in the grain of the wood will occur when chiselling out the work. Fig. 91 indicates the change in the grain of the wood, and the adjustable joiner's bevel is also shown.

Joints Other than at 90°.—The two pieces that make up a bridle joint aren't always at right angles, like at Fig. 81; often, the joint needs to be at angles other than 90 degrees. The process is similar, except that you use an adjustable joiner's bevel instead of a try[Pg 47] square to mark the shoulder lines, and you’ll notice a change in the direction of the wood grain when chiseling out the work. Fig. 91 shows the shift in the wood grain, along with the adjustable joiner's bevel.

Fig. 91.—Bridle Joint at Angle other than Right Angle. Fig. 91.—Bridle Joint at an Angle Other Than a Right Angle.
Fig. 92.—Sawing off Waste from Bridle Joint. (See reference on page 39.) Fig. 92.—Cutting Off Excess from Bridle Joint. (See reference on __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.)

THE TONGUED AND
GROOVED JOINT

T he tongued and grooved joint is used in one form or another throughout the whole of the woodworking trades, covering, as it does, a great variety of work from the laying of flooring boards to the construction of dressers, bookcases and other cabinet work.

The tongue and groove joint is used in various ways across the woodworking industry, as it applies to a wide range of tasks from installing flooring boards to building dressers, bookcases, and other cabinetry.

Flooring and match boarding generally have the tongues worked on the solid board, and examples of a few of the various types are shown as follows:—

Flooring and match boarding typically have the tongues cut into the solid board, and examples of some of the different types are shown below:—

Fig. 93.—Tongued and Grooved Flooring Board. Fig. 93.—Tongued and Grooved Flooring Board.
Fig. 94.

Fig. 94.

Fig. 94.

Fig. 95.

Fig. 95.

Fig. 95.

Method of Nailing Hardwood Floors.

Hardwood Floor Nailing Method.

Fig. 93 shows the end view of the ordinary 78-in. "Tongued and Grooved Flooring board," as used in the construction of floors for mills, workshops and cottage[Pg 49] property. This type of flooring is nailed to the joists in the ordinary manner, no attempt being made to conceal the nails used.

Fig. 93 shows the end view of the standard 78-in. "Tongued and Grooved Flooring board," which is used in building floors for mills, workshops, and cottages[Pg 49]. This type of flooring is nailed to the joists in a typical way, with no effort made to hide the nails.

Fig. 94 is a section of flooring which is generally made of hardwood, such as maple, oak, or jarrah. It is used in positions such as ballroom and skating rink floors, etc., the tongue and groove being worked in such a manner that the joint covers the nails as shown. Each nail is driven into its position at one edge of the board, the groove holding the next board and hiding the nail (Fig. 95).

Fig. 94 is a type of flooring typically made from hardwood like maple, oak, or jarrah. It's commonly used in places like ballroom and skating rink floors, with the tongue and groove designed so that the joint hides the nails, as illustrated. Each nail is driven in at one edge of the board, while the groove of the next board holds it in place and conceals the nail (Fig. 95).

Fig. 96.—Tongued     and Grooved     Matchboarding,     with Bead on     One Side.

Fig. 96.—Tongued and Grooved Matchboarding, with Bead on One Side.

Fig. 96.—Tongued and Grooved Matchboarding, with Bead on One Side.

Fig. 97.—Tongued     and Grooved     Matchboarding,     with Bead at     Each Side.

Fig. 97.—Tongued and Grooved Matchboarding, with Bead at Each Side.

Fig. 97.—Tongued and Grooved Matchboarding, with Bead at Each Side.

Fig. 98.—Matchboarding,     Tongued,     Grooved and     Vee'd.

Fig. 98.—Matchboarding, Tongued, Grooved and Vee'd.

Fig. 98.—Matchboarding, Tongued, Grooved, and Vee'd.

Fig. 96 shows an example of matchboarding known as "Tongued, Grooved and Beaded" on one side only, and Fig. 97 shows a similar type tongued, grooved and beaded on both sides. This variety of matchboarding is known in the trade as "T. G. and B." It is used for nailing on framing to form partitions for rooms, offices, etc., for panelling corridors, etc., and for making framed and ledged doors, building tool houses, cycle sheds and other outhouses.

Fig. 96 shows an example of matchboarding called "Tongued, Grooved and Beaded" on one side only, while Fig. 97 shows a similar type that is tongued, grooved, and beaded on both sides. This type of matchboarding is referred to in the industry as "T. G. and B." It's used for nailing onto framing to create partitions for rooms, offices, etc., for paneling corridors, and for making framed and ledged doors, tool sheds, bike sheds, and other outbuildings.

Fig. 98 is an example of matchboarding that is tongued, grooved and vee'd on one side, and Fig. 99 shows tongued, grooved and vee'd both sides. These are used for similar purposes to Figs. 96 and 97, and many prefer the V matchboarding variety because it is more easily painted than the beaded variety.[Pg 50]

Fig. 98 is an example of matchboarding that has tongue and groove on one side, while Fig. 99 features tongue and groove on both sides. These are used for similar purposes as Figs. 96 and 97, and many people prefer the V matchboarding style because it is easier to paint than the beaded variety.[Pg 50]

The object of working a bead or beads on matchboarding is to break the jointing of the various pieces and to aim at ornamental effect; also to prevent unsightliness should the timber shrink slightly. When a moderate amount of shrinkage takes place, as is nearly always the case, the joint at the side of the bead appears to the casual observer to be the fillet or channel worked at the side of the bead. If the tongues are not painted before the work is put together, the shrinkage will cause the raw wood to show and thus make the joint too much in evidence.

The purpose of adding a bead or beads on matchboarding is to break up the joints between different pieces for decorative effect and to avoid an unattractive appearance if the wood shrinks a little. When a moderate amount of shrinkage occurs, which is nearly always the case, the joint next to the bead looks to the casual observer like the groove or channel created next to the bead. If the tongues aren't painted before assembling the work, the shrinkage will expose the raw wood, making the joint too noticeable.

Fig. 99.—Matchboarding     Vee'd     Both Sides.

Fig. 99.—Matchboarding Vee'd Both Sides.

Fig. 99.—Matchboarding V-shaped Both Sides.

Fig. 100.—Double-tongued     Matchboarding.

Fig. 100.—Double-tongued Matchboarding.

Fig. 100.—Double-tongued Matchboarding.

Fig. 101.—Double-dovetailed,     Tongued and     Grooved.

Fig. 101.—Double-dovetailed, Tongued and Grooved.

Fig. 101.—Double-dovetail, Tongued and Grooved.

Fig. 100 shows a "Double tongued and grooved" joint used in the wholesale cabinet factories. It is preferred for the jointing of cabinet stock, and the amateur can make a similar joint by working two grooves and inserting loose tongues.

Fig. 100 shows a "Double tongued and grooved" joint used in wholesale cabinet factories. It's favored for joining cabinet stock, and beginners can create a similar joint by cutting two grooves and inserting loose tongues.

Fig. 101 is the end view of a "Double-dovetailed, tongued and grooved" joint, and Fig. 102 is a sketch of a similar joint having only one dovetailed tongue.

Fig. 101 is the end view of a "double-dovetail, tongue and groove" joint, and Fig. 102 is a sketch of a similar joint with just one dovetailed tongue.

From a constructional point of view Fig. 101 is far and away the best joint that has yet been produced. Unfortunately, however, there is not at the present time any hand tool that will economically produce it, owing probably to the fact that the joint is the subject of a patent. The dovetail tongue tapers slightly throughout its entire length, gripping the joint on the principle of the wedge and squeezing the glue into the pores of the wood.[Pg 51]

From a construction perspective, Fig. 101 is by far the best joint ever made. Unfortunately, there isn’t any hand tool right now that can produce it cost-effectively, likely due to the fact that the joint is patented. The dovetail tongue tapers slightly along its entire length, holding the joint together based on the wedge principle and pressing the glue into the wood’s pores.[Pg 51]

Fig. 102.—Joint with Single Dovetail Tongue and Groove. Fig. 102.—Joint with a Single Dovetail Tongue and Groove.
Fig. 103.—(A) Cross Tongue.     (B) Feather Tongue.

Fig. 103.—(A) Cross Tongue. (B) Feather Tongue.

Fig. 103.—(A) Cross Tongue. (B) Feather Tongue.

Fig. 104.—Method of     Secret-nailing Hardwood     Flooring Boards.

Fig. 104.—Method of Secret-nailing Hardwood Flooring Boards.

Fig. 104.—How to Secretly Nail Hardwood Flooring Boards.

Cabinet-work Joints.—With regard to tongued and grooved joints which apply more particularly to the jointing of cabinet work, Fig. 93 is produced by planes which are specially made for the purpose. One plane makes the tongue and another the groove. The handiest sizes to buy are those which joint 38 in., 58 in., and 34 in. timber, it being usual to dowel or loose-tongue thicker boards. The 38 in. partitions (or, as they are sometimes called, dustboards) between the drawers of a sideboard or dressing chest are in good work jointed in this manner. The 58 in. and 34 in. ends and tops of[Pg 52] pine or American whitewood dressing tables, wardrobes, etc., call for the larger sized plane.

Cabinet-work Joints.—When it comes to tongued and grooved joints used mainly for cabinet work, Fig. 93 is created using specially designed planes. One plane cuts the tongue and another cuts the groove. The most practical sizes to buy are for jointing 38 in., 58 in., and 34 in. timber, as it’s common to dowel or use loose tongues for thicker boards. The 38 in. partitions (or dustboards, as they’re sometimes called) between the drawers of a sideboard or dressing chest are typically jointed this way. The 58 in. and 34 in. ends and tops of[Pg 52] pine or American whitewood dressing tables, wardrobes, etc., require the larger-sized plane.

Loose Tongues.—There are two methods of jointing with loose tongues, viz., the use of the cross tongue, Fig. 103 A, and the use of the feather tongue, Fig. 103 B. Cross tongues are the stronger when glued in their position and can be used very much thinner than feather tongues. Feather tongues are cut diagonally across the grain as illustrated.

Loose Tongues.—There are two methods for joining with loose tongues: the use of the cross tongue, Fig. 103 A, and the use of the feather tongue, Fig. 103 B. Cross tongues are stronger when glued in place and can be made much thinner than feather tongues. Feather tongues are cut diagonally across the grain as shown.

Fig. 105.—Cradle for Planing. Fig. 105.—Planing Cradle.

Fig. 105 is a cradle for planing up loose tongues to the required width (generally 78 in.). Two grooves are made in a piece of 114 in. hardwood; one groove is used for planing the width way of the tongue and the other for planing the edge way. These tongues can be cut to accurate size on a circular saw bench if power and machinery are at hand.

Fig. 105 is a tool for trimming loose tongues to the desired width (usually 78 in.). Two grooves are made in a piece of 114 in. hardwood; one groove is for trimming the width of the tongue and the other is for trimming the edge. If you have access to power tools and machinery, you can cut these tongues to the correct size on a circular saw bench.

Applications of the Joint.Fig. 106 is a sketch of a portion of a sideboard top, showing the plough groove ready worked out to receive the tongue; the other half of the top is treated in a similar manner. It will be noticed that the groove is not worked through the full length of the board, but stopped about 114 in. from each end; this leaves a square joint at each end of the top on which the moulding is worked. If the groove be run through the board it looks very unsightly when the mould is finished.

Applications of the Joint.Fig. 106 is a sketch of a part of a sideboard top, showing the plough groove prepared to receive the tongue; the other half of the top is done in a similar way. You'll notice that the groove doesn't go all the way through the full length of the board, but stops about 114 in. from each end; this leaves a square joint at each end of the top where the moulding is applied. If the groove runs all the way through the board, it looks very unattractive when the moulding is finished.

Fig. 107 is a shaped spandrel, such as is fixed in the[Pg 53] recess of a sideboard or cupboard or shop window fitment. It is of such a width that, were it cut from a wide board, the shaped portion would be apt to break off owing to the short grain at C. The shaping is therefore built up out of three separate pieces, the grain running as indicated. The loose tongue is represented by the dotted line and a section is shown of the joint at the line A B. At the opposite corner the tongue is left blind, i.e., not run through the edge. This is the method that should be used when the shaping is above the level of the eye.

Fig. 107 is a shaped spandrel, like the ones installed in the[Pg 53] recesses of sideboards, cupboards, or shop window displays. It's designed with a width that would likely break off if cut from a wide board because of the short grain at point C. To prevent this, the shape is made from three separate pieces, with the grain running as shown. The loose tongue is indicated by the dotted line, and a section of the joint at line A B is provided. In the opposite corner, the tongue is left blind, meaning it doesn’t extend through the edge. This method should be used when the shape is higher than eye level.

Fig. 106.—Part of Sideboard Top; grooved with ends left blind. (The boards are shown upright.) Fig. 106.—Section of Sideboard Top; grooved with ends left concealed. (The boards are shown standing.)
Fig. 107.—Shaped Spandrel for Recess. Fig. 107.—Shaped Spandrel for Nook.

Fig. 108 shows part of a carcase of a dressing table. The drawer runner A is shown grooved across the end to receive a cross tongue; this cross tongue engages a[Pg 54] similar groove in the front bearer. This method of fastening the runner to the bearer is in everyday use.

Fig. 108 shows part of a dressing table carcass. The drawer runner A has a groove at the end to hold a cross tongue; this cross tongue fits into a similar groove in the front support. This way of attaching the runner to the support is commonly used.

Fig. 108.—Part Carcase of Dressing Table. Fig. 108.—Part of the Dressing Table Frame.
Fig. 109.—Framed Writing Table Top. Fig. 109.—Framed Writing Desk Top.

Fig. 109 is a writing table top. The centre boards are first jointed and glued up, after which the ends and sides are grooved ready to receive the cross tongues. The hardwood margins are shown at one end and at the front, and the grooves are arranged so that, on completion, the marginal frame stands above the top just the amount of the thickness of the leather which will cover the table. In some cases the margin at the end runs the same way of the grain as the top, thus allowing for slight shrinkage. Cross tongues would of course be used in this case.[Pg 55]

Fig. 109 is a writing tabletop. The center boards are first joined and glued together, then the ends and sides are grooved to accept the cross tongues. The hardwood edges are shown at one end and at the front, and the grooves are arranged so that, upon completion, the edge frame sits above the top by the thickness of the leather that will cover the table. In some cases, the edge at the end runs in the same direction as the grain of the top, allowing for slight shrinkage. Cross tongues would naturally be used in this scenario.[Pg 55]

Fig. 110 is a sketch showing one-quarter of a barred or tracery cabinet door. An enlarged section of the astragal mould which is grooved to fit on the bar which forms the rebate is also shown.

Fig. 110 is a sketch displaying one-quarter of a barred or tracery cabinet door. An enlarged section of the astragal mold, which is shaped to fit on the bar that creates the rebate, is also included.

Fig. 111 is a "Combing or corner locking" joint, a method of making boxes by means of a continuous use of tongues and grooves instead of dovetails. This type of joint is generally machine made. The amateur, however, who is not proficient to undertake a dovetailed box frequently uses this method.

Fig. 111 is a "Combing or corner locking" joint, a technique for making boxes using a continuous application of tongues and grooves instead of dovetails. This type of joint is usually made by machines. However, someone who isn't skilled enough to make a dovetailed box often resorts to this method.

Fig. 110.—Corner     of Barred Door.

Fig. 110.—Corner of Barred Door.

Fig. 110.—Corner of Barred Door.

Fig. 111.—Combing or     Locking Joint.

Fig. 111.—Combing or Locking Joint.

Fig. 111.—Combing or Lock Joint.

Fig. 112.—Single     Loose     Tongue and     Double-tongue     Joint.

Fig. 112.—Single Loose Tongue and Double-tongue Joint.

Fig. 112.—Single Loose Tongue and Double-tongue Joint.

Corner Joints.Fig. 112 shows both a single loose tongue and a double solid tongue. Both are methods used to connect circular cornered work, such as a counter end, to the front framing.

Corner Joints.Fig. 112 shows both a single loose tongue and a double solid tongue. Both are methods used to connect circular cornered work, like a counter end, to the front framing.

Fig. 113 indicates a tongued and grooved joint suitable for edge or end jointing, such as fitting matchboarding round a chimney breast, making small jewel drawers, etc.

Fig. 113 indicates a tongue-and-groove joint that's good for edge or end jointing, like fitting matchboarding around a chimney breast, making small jewel drawers, etc.

Fig. 114 is a tongued and grooved joint with a bead worked on same to hide the joint, sometimes called a staff-bead. It would be used in positions such as[Pg 56] boarding around an upright iron pillar, etc., the bead giving a neat finish at each corner.

Fig. 114 is a joint with a tongue and groove design featuring a bead applied to conceal the joint, often referred to as a staff-bead. This joint is commonly used in places like[Pg 56] boarding around a vertical iron pillar, with the bead providing a tidy finish at each corner.

Fig. 115 is a similar joint, but at an obtuse angle. An example of its use is in fixing boarding around an octagonal column of brickwork.

Fig. 115 is a similar joint, but at a wide angle. An example of its use is in securing boarding around an octagonal brick column.

Fig. 113.

Fig. 113.

Fig. 113.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 115.

Fig. 115.

Fig. 115.

Examples of Tongued and Grooved Corner Joints.

Examples of Tongued and Grooved Corner Joints.

Fig. 116 shows a tongued and grooved mitre as used for strengthening the corners of cabinet work, such as tea caddies, small boxes, plinths, etc. Two pieces of wood are glued in position and allowed to set prior to glueing and cramping the joint proper. These pieces are afterwards planed away, thus leaving a clear surface to the box sides.

Fig. 116 shows a tongue-and-groove miter used to reinforce the corners of cabinet work, like tea caddies, small boxes, plinths, and more. Two pieces of wood are glued in place and allowed to set before gluing and clamping the actual joint. These pieces are then planed down, leaving a smooth surface on the sides of the box.

Fig. 117 shows the method of working the groove in the above joints. The pieces are turned back to back, the mitres thus making a right angle. The guide on the grooving plane thus works against each face of the joint, and this ensures correct jointing.

Fig. 117 shows how to work the groove in the joints above. The pieces are set back to back, with the miters forming a right angle. The guide on the grooving plane works against each side of the joint, ensuring proper alignment.

Fig. 118 is somewhat similar to Fig. 113, but with a quarter circle mould to hide the joint.

Fig. 118 is somewhat similar to Fig. 113, but with a quarter-circle shape to cover the joint.

Fig. 119 indicates the building up of a double skirting mould. C represents the brickwork, A the oak-framed panelling, and B the packing and fixing block. A wide skirting of this type is made in two portions for convenience in working the moulding and to prevent undue shrinkage.[Pg 57]

Fig. 119 shows the creation of a double skirting mold. C stands for the brickwork, A for the oak-framed paneling, and B for the packing and fixing block. A wide skirting like this is made in two parts for easier molding and to prevent excessive shrinkage.[Pg 57]

Fig. 116.—Cramping a Tongued and Grooved Mitre. Fig. 116.—Clamping a Tongued and Grooved Mitre.
Fig. 117.—Working a Groove.

Fig. 117.—Working a Groove.

Fig. 117.—Cutting a Groove.

Fig. 118.—Corner     Joint with Corner     Mould.

Fig. 118.—Corner Joint with Corner Mould.

Fig. 118.—Corner Joint with Corner Mould.

Fig. 120 illustrates the use of a tongued and grooved joint for fixing together the sides of a corner bracket, and the same method holds good when jointing a corner cupboard. A capping mould or top shelf will conceal the joint; it then has the appearance of a glued butt joint, but is of course considerably stronger. No screws or nails are required if this joint be used.[Pg 58]

Fig. 120 shows how to use a tongued and grooved joint to connect the sides of a corner bracket, and this method is just as effective for joining a corner cupboard. A capping molding or top shelf will cover the joint; it will look like a glued butt joint, but it's actually much stronger. This joint doesn't need any screws or nails.[Pg 58]

Ploughing.—When grooves have to be worked in the edge or face of a board to receive tongues, the process is generally called ploughing, and it is usually accomplished by a special tool called a plough (or, as it is occasionally spelt, "plow"). When a plough plane is bought it is usual to procure eight plough bits or blades of various sizes to fit the plane. In Fig. 121 is given the sketch of a plough plane with the names of the various parts lettered thereon.

Ploughing.—When grooves need to be cut into the edge or surface of a board to accommodate tongues, this process is commonly referred to as ploughing, and it’s typically done using a specialized tool called a plough (or "plow," as it’s sometimes spelled). When purchasing a plough plane, it’s standard to buy eight plough bits or blades of different sizes that fit the plane. In Fig. 121 is presented a sketch of a plough plane with the names of the various parts labeled on it.

Fig. 119.—Double     Skirting Mould.

Fig. 119.—Double Skirting Mould.

Fig. 119.—Double Skirting Moulding.

Fig. 120.—Joint     for Corner     Bracket or     Cupboard.

Fig. 120.—Joint for Corner Bracket or Cupboard.

Fig. 120.—Joint for Corner Bracket or Cupboard.

The board or boards which it is desired to groove are first planed straight and true, exactly as though it were desired to make a glued or butt joint. One of the boards is now placed edge way up in the vice and with the face side to the worker.

The board or boards that need to be grooved are first planed straight and flat, just like you would if you were making a glued or butt joint. One of the boards is then positioned edge up in the vise with the face side facing the worker.

Take the plough plane and select a suitably-sized[Pg 59] blade; fix it in the plane in the usual way, allowing the cutting edge to project beyond the steel skate about 132 in., and securely drive up the wedge. Next loosen the small boxwood wedges at the side of each stem, and adjust the plane by tapping the stems with a hammer until the cutting iron is in the desired position; then knock up the small wedges nice and tight. When setting the fence to or from the blade it is a wise precaution to measure the distance from the fence to the skate at each end of the plane; this will ensure the skate being parallel to the fence. The neglect of this is a source of annoyance to many amateurs. Now adjust the depth stop by turning the screw at the top of the plane, measuring the depth of the required groove from the edge of the blade to the stop, and carefully lock the screw which adjusts this stop.

Take the plough plane and choose an appropriately sized[Pg 59] blade; secure it in the plane as usual, allowing the cutting edge to extend about132 inch beyond the steel skate, and firmly drive up the wedge. Next, loosen the small boxwood wedges on the side of each stem, and adjust the plane by tapping the stems with a hammer until the cutting iron is in the desired position; then, tighten the small wedges securely. When setting the fence to or from the blade, it's a good idea to measure the distance from the fence to the skate at each end of the plane; this will ensure that the skate is parallel to the fence. Ignoring this step can be frustrating for many beginners. Now adjust the depth stop by turning the screw at the top of the plane, measuring the depth of the desired groove from the edge of the blade to the stop, and carefully lock the screw that adjusts this stop.

Fig. 121.—The Plough Plane and its Parts. Fig. 121.—The Plough Plane and Its Components.

The plane is now ready for use. Hold the fence close up to the side of the timber, the hands in position as shown at Fig. 122, the position of the body being that[Pg 60] generally assumed in planing. Move the plane backwards and forwards in the usual manner, beginning the cut at the end of the board nearest to the vice jaws (the front), and proceed with the planing until the depth stop is in contact with the wood. Then take a step backwards and repeat the process until the whole length of the groove is ploughed. Care must be taken to force the fence up to the board with the left hand, whilst the right hand thrusts the plane backwards and forwards, and the plane must be kept vertical.

The plane is now ready to use. Position the fence close to the side of the wood, with your hands set as shown at Fig. 122, and keep your body in the typical stance for planing. Move the plane back and forth as usual, starting the cut at the end of the board that's closest to the vice jaws (the front), and continue planing until the depth stop contacts the wood. Then take a step back and repeat the process until you've ploughed the entire groove. Make sure to press the fence against the board with your left hand while your right hand moves the plane back and forth, and keep the plane vertical.

Fig. 122.—Method of using the Plough Plane. Fig. 122.—How to use the Plough Plane.

Tongueing.—The grooves having been completed, the tongues have to be made. Fig. 123 shows a sketch of a board and the method of marking out cross tongues (A) and feather tongues (B). The usual procedure for making cross tongues is to plane the end of the board and use a cutting gauge to give a line the required distance from the end (see sketch). The board is sawn with a tenon or panel saw, and the piece of timber for the tongue is thus procured. If a feather tongue is to be used it is cut diagonally from the board (B) and the ends cut square as shown by the dotted line.

Tongueing.—Now that the grooves are done, it’s time to create the tongues. Fig. 123 shows a sketch of a board and the method for marking out cross tongues (A) and feather tongues (B). The usual process for making cross tongues involves planing the end of the board and using a cutting gauge to mark the required distance from the end (see sketch). The board is then sawn with a tenon or panel saw, providing the piece of wood needed for the tongue. If you’re using a feather tongue, it’s cut diagonally from the board (B), with the ends cut square as shown by the dotted line.

Fig. 123.—Method of Marking Out for Cross Tongues and Feather Tongues. Fig. 123.—How to Mark Out for Cross Tongues and Feather Tongues.

Feather tongues can be obtained in fairly long lengths out of narrow boards, whilst on the other hand cross tongues are limited by the width of the board. After cutting off the tongues, they require planing with nicety to fit the grooves, and the advantage of a grooved board (Fig. 105) will be appreciated. A glue spoon similar to a plumber's ladle is generally used to pour the glue into the grooves, and it is customary to glue the tongue into one board first; after allowing this to set, the joint is completed in the usual manner.

Feather tongues can be cut from narrow boards in pretty long lengths, while cross tongues are restricted by the board's width. After trimming the tongues, they need to be planed carefully to fit the grooves, and you'll see the benefit of a grooved board (Fig. 105). A glue spoon, like a plumber's ladle, is typically used to pour glue into the grooves, and it's standard practice to glue the tongue into one board first; after allowing it to set, the joint is finished in the usual way.

Tongueing Planes.Fig. 124 shows the end view of a tongueing plane for working matched joints out of[Pg 62] the solid. The method of holding and using the plane is similar to the directions given for using the plough. The part lettered F (in front) represents the fence, which in this case is not adjustable.

Tongueing Planes.Fig. 124 shows the end view of a tongueing plane for crafting matched joints from the solid piece. The way you hold and use the plane is similar to the instructions provided for using the plough. The part labeled F (in front) represents the fence, which here is not adjustable.

Fig. 124.

Fig. 124.

Fig. 124.

Fig. 125.

Fig. 125.

Fig. 125.

End Views of Tongueing and Grooving Planes.

End Views of Tonguing and Grooving Planes.

In description Fig. 125 is similar to Fig. 124. The steel skate runs in the groove and supports the cutting blade similar to that in the plough plane, and provided a grooving plane of this type is of suitable width it may be used for making grooves for loose tongues. There is on the market a metal plane which is specially[Pg 63] designed with handles at both ends. This plane carries a grooving iron on one side and a tongueing iron on the other side; thus with one plane both the tongue and the groove can be worked.

In description Fig. 125 is similar to Fig. 124. The steel skate fits into the groove and supports the cutting blade just like that in the plough plane, and as long as a grooving plane of this type is the right width, it can be used to create grooves for loose tongues. There is a metal plane available on the market that is specially designed with handles at both ends. This plane has a grooving iron on one side and a tongueing iron on the other side; therefore, with just one plane, both the tongue and the groove can be worked.

Fig. 126.—Tongueing Shoulders of Tenons. Fig. 126.—Tongue and Groove Joints.

Fig. 126 shows the method of tongueing the shoulders of tenons as used in thick timber which is to be veneered on the face. A temporary piece of wood (A) is put between the tenon cheek and the saw, thus forming a guide for the latter. After cutting one saw kerf a thicker piece is made and a second saw kerf cut; the waste between the saw kerfs is now removed with an 18 in. chisel and this completes the groove. A tongue of this type acts as an extra tenon and prevents the joint from "lipping" (becoming uneven) on the face side.[Pg 64]

Fig. 126 shows how to tongue the shoulders of tenons in thick timber that will be veneered on the front. A temporary piece of wood (A) is placed between the tenon cheek and the saw, serving as a guide. After cutting the first saw kerf, a thicker piece is used to cut a second saw kerf; then, the waste between the saw kerfs is removed with a 18 in. chisel, completing the groove. This kind of tongue acts like an extra tenon and stops the joint from "lipping" (becoming uneven) on the front side.[Pg 64]


THE MORTISE AND TENON JOINT

A mortise and tenon joint is the method of joining timber by working a solid rectangular projection in the one piece and cutting a corresponding cavity to receive it in the adjoining piece. The projection is called the tenon, and the cavity the mortise. Joints of this type are secured in various ways. Small wedges, wooden dowels, metal dowel pins, glue and paint are frequently used, and prior to the introduction of glue we have examples of Egyptian furniture in which the mortise and tenon joints were united by a composition of cheese.

A mortise and tenon joint is a method of connecting wood by creating a solid rectangular projection on one piece and cutting a matching cavity in the adjacent piece to fit it. The projection is called the tenon, and the cavity is the mortise. These joints can be secured in various ways. Small wedges, wooden dowels, metal pins, glue, and paint are often used. Before glue was introduced, there are examples of Egyptian furniture where mortise and tenon joints were held together using a mixture that included cheese.

Fig. 127.—Barefaced     Tenon Joint.

Fig. 127.—Barefaced Tenon Joint.

Fig. 127.—Barefaced Tenon Joint.

Fig. 128.—Stub     Tenon.

Fig. 128.—Stub Tenon.

Fig. 128.—Stub Tenon.

Barefaced Tenons.Fig. 127 illustrates the joint in its simplest form and shows a tenon having only one shoulder. This is called a barefaced tenon, and it will[Pg 65] be noticed that the portion which carries the mortise is thicker than the rail on which the tenon is cut. The joint is therefore level (or flush as it is called) on one side only, and it should never be used at the corner of a frame. It is a useful interior joint for framing that has to be covered on the back side with matchboarding, and allows the work to finish level at the back when the boarding has been applied (see plan, Fig. 127).

Barefaced Tenons.Fig. 127 shows the joint in its most basic form and demonstrates a tenon with only one shoulder. This is known as a barefaced tenon, and you'll notice that the part that fits into the mortise is thicker than the rail from which the tenon is cut. The joint is therefore level (or flush, as it’s called) on just one side, and it should never be used at the corner of a frame. It's a practical interior joint for framing that needs to be covered on the back with matchboarding and allows the work to finish level at the back once the boarding is applied (see plan, Fig. 127).

Stub or Stump Tenon (Fig. 128; also occasionally called a joggle tenon).—The illustration shows a tenon as used in the interior of a frame. The tenon is not allowed to run through the stile, and unslightliness on the edge is thus avoided. This type of tenon is often used at the corner of a frame, and it then requires to be haunched. A good workshop method of gauging the depth of the mortise for a stub tenon is shown in Fig. 129; a piece of gummed stamp paper is stuck on the side of the mortise chisel, indicating the desired depth of the mortise. This greatly facilitates the work, as it is not necessary to be constantly measuring.

Stub or Stump Tenon (Fig. 128; also sometimes called a joggle tenon).—The illustration shows a tenon used in the interior of a frame. The tenon doesn’t run through the stile, which helps avoid any unsightly edges. This type of tenon is often used at the corners of a frame, and it needs to be haunched. A practical method for measuring the depth of the mortise for a stub tenon is shown in Fig. 129; a piece of gummed stamp paper is attached to the side of the mortise chisel, indicating the desired depth of the mortise. This makes the work much easier, as there's no need for constant measuring.

A Haunched Tenon as used at the end of a door frame is shown at Fig. 130.—In this case it will be seen that the width of the tenon is reduced, so that sufficient timber will be left at the end of the stile to resist the pressure of the tenon when the joint is driven together. The short portion (A) which is left on the tenon is called the haunch, and the cavity it engages is termed the haunching. The haunch and haunching prevent the two pieces of timber lipping, or becoming uneven on the face side, as would be the result if it were cut away entirely up to the shoulder.

A Haunched Tenon used at the end of a door frame is shown at Fig. 130. In this instance, you'll notice that the width of the tenon is narrowed, ensuring that enough wood remains at the end of the stile to withstand the pressure of the tenon when the joint is pushed together. The short part (A) left on the tenon is called the haunch, and the space it fits into is called the haunching. The haunch and haunching stop the two pieces of wood from lipping, or becoming uneven on the face side, which would happen if it were cut all the way to the shoulder.

Fig. 131 shows the type of tenon and haunch used when the stile or upright rail is grooved to receive[Pg 66] a panel. In this and similar cases the haunch is made[Pg 67] the same width and the same depth as the groove; the groove therefore acts as the haunching. An application of this joint is shown in the top rail of the door frame, Fig. 132.

Fig. 131 shows the type of tenon and haunch used when the stile or upright rail is grooved to hold[Pg 66] a panel. In this and similar situations, the haunch is made[Pg 67] the same width and depth as the groove; therefore, the groove functions as the haunching. An example of this joint is shown in the top rail of the door frame, Fig. 132.

This type of joint is also used to connect the rail to the leg of an ordinary kitchen table (see Fig. 167).

This kind of joint is also used to attach the rail to the leg of a regular kitchen table (see Fig. 167).

Fig. 129.—Method of Gauging for depth of Tenon. Fig. 129.—Method for Measuring the Depth of a Tenon.
Fig. 130.—Haunched Tenon     used at end of Door Frame.

Fig. 130.—Haunched Tenon used at end of Door Frame.

Fig. 130.—Haunched Tenon used at the end of the Door Frame.

Fig. 131.—Haunched Tenon     used when Stile is Grooved     for Panel.

Fig. 131.—Haunched Tenon used when Stile is Grooved for Panel.

Fig. 131.—Haunched Tenon used when Stile is Grooved for Panel.

Fig. 132.—Application of Haunched     Tenon Joint to Door Frame.

Fig. 132.—Application of Haunched Tenon Joint to Door Frame.

Fig. 132.—Using a Haunched Tenon Joint in a Door Frame.

Fig. 133.—Occasional     Stump Tenon.

Fig. 133.—Occasional Stump Tenon.

Occasional Stump Tenon.

Fig. 133 is a variation of the stump tenon, occasionally used where the work in hand demands a thin tenon and a stout stump to take heavy strains.

Fig. 133 is a type of stump tenon, sometimes used when the task requires a narrow tenon and a strong stump to handle heavy loads.

Fig. 134.—Joint for Inside     Framing.

Fig. 134.—Joint for Inside Framing.

Fig. 134.—Joint for Interior Framing.

Fig. 135.—Haunched     Barefaced Tenon.

Fig. 135.—Haunched Barefaced Tenon.

Fig. 135.—Haunched Barefaced Tenon.

A joint used for inside framing is seen at Fig. 134. The rails may be used as shown, but in the case of a door frame (as Fig. 132) they would have the inside edges grooved to receive the panels; the tenons would therefore be slightly narrower than shown, owing to the groove at each edge.

A joint used for interior framing is shown at Fig. 134. The rails can be used as shown, but in the case of a door frame (as Fig. 132), the inside edges would be grooved to hold the panels; therefore, the tenons would be slightly narrower than shown because of the groove on each edge.

A Haunched Barefaced Tenon, used in similar positions to Fig. 131, is shown at Fig. 135. The door or frame in this case would be made of matchboarding nailed on the back as shown in the plan at Fig. 127.

A Haunched Barefaced Tenon, used in similar positions to Fig. 131, is shown at Fig. 135. The door or frame in this case would be made of matchboarding nailed on the back as shown in the plan at Fig. 127.

Wedges.Fig. 136 shows the method of cutting wedges which are to be used to wedge the tenons; this avoids waste of material. Some workers cut the wedges[Pg 68] from the pieces left out of the haunching of the lock rail, or the bottom rail.

Wedges.Fig. 136 shows how to cut wedges that are used to secure the tenons, which helps prevent material waste. Some workers cut the wedges[Pg 68] from the leftover pieces after haunching the lock rail or the bottom rail.

Fig. 136.—Cutting Wedges     from Waste of Haunching.

Fig. 136.—Cutting Wedges from Waste of Haunching.

Fig. 136.—Cutting Wedges from Waste of Haunching.

Fig. 137.—Stile     and Cross Rail     with Horn.

Fig. 137.—Stile and Cross Rail with Horn.

Fig. 137.—Style and Cross Rail with Horn.

A Stile and Cross Rail, framed together, are shown at Fig. 137. The portion above the rail is called the horn, and it is usual to leave sufficient length of stile to project above and below the cross rails, so that there will be no tendency for the stile to burst out at the end whilst the cramping and wedging of the frame is in progress. On completing the framing the horn is cut away.

A Stile and Cross Rail, framed together, are shown at Fig. 137. The part above the rail is called the horn, and it's common to leave enough length of the stile to extend above and below the cross rails, to prevent the stile from splitting at the ends while the cramping and wedging of the frame is happening. Once the framing is finished, the horn is cut away.

In Fig. 138 we have a type of joint frequently used for garden gates. The illustration shows the method of tenoning the three pieces to the top rail, barefaced tenons being employed.

In Fig. 138 we have a type of joint commonly used for garden gates. The illustration shows how to tenon the three pieces to the top rail, using barefaced tenons.

Fig. 138.—Joint used for     Garden Gates.

Fig. 138.—Joint used for Garden Gates.

Fig. 138.—Joint used for Garden Gates.

Fig. 139.—     Sprocket Wheel.

Fig. 139.— Sprocket Wheel.

Fig. 139.— Sprocket Wheel.

Fig. 140.—     Boring Tool.

Fig. 140.— Boring Tool.

Boring Tool.

Sprocket Wheel.—At Fig. 139 are shown the guide bar and chain of a chain-mortising machine, two enlarged links of the chain being indicated at A. The chain is similar in construction to the driving chain of a bicycle, with the exception that it is provided with teeth which cut away the timber as the chain revolves.[Pg 69] When using a chain mortiser the portion of the machine carrying the chain is fed downwards into the timber, thus cutting a clean and true mortise. If, however, a stump mortise is required it is necessary to pare away a certain amount of timber by hand, because the machine obviously leaves a semicircular bottom to the mortise. To overcome this difficulty the latest types of mortising machines have a square hole-boring attachment fixed alongside the chain. This tool, the working portion of which is illustrated in Fig. 140, consists of a square hollow chisel (E), which is sharpened from the inside, and a revolving twist bit (D) fitted with spurs or nickers, but without a point (one spur can be seen at the bottom of the illustration). This bit revolves inside the shell like a chisel, and bores away the superfluous timber,[Pg 70] whilst the pressure exerted on the chisel causes the corners to be cut away dead square. A mortise 38 in. square by 6 ins. in depth may thus be cut. The portion marked A is the shank of the chisel (Fig. 140), where it is fixed into the body of the machine, and the hole at E allows the boring bit to free itself.

Sprocket Wheel.—At Fig. 139 you can see the guide bar and chain of a chain mortising machine, with two enlarged links of the chain shown at A. The chain is built like the driving chain of a bicycle, except it has teeth that cut into the wood as the chain moves. [Pg 69] When you use a chain mortiser, the part of the machine that holds the chain is pushed down into the wood, creating a clean and precise mortise. However, if you need a stump mortise, you must manually trim away some wood because the machine leaves a semicircular bottom to the mortise. To solve this issue, the latest models of mortising machines come with a square hole-boring attachment next to the chain. This tool, shown in Fig. 140, has a square hollow chisel (E) that is sharpened on the inside, and a rotating twist bit (D) with spurs or nickers, but no point (one spur is visible at the bottom of the illustration). This bit rotates inside the shell like a chisel, drilling away excess wood, [Pg 70] while the pressure on the chisel ensures the corners are cut perfectly square. A mortise measuring 38 in. square and 6 in. deep can be created this way. The part marked A is the shank of the chisel (Fig. 140), where it is attached to the machine, and the hole at E allows the boring bit to move freely.

Fig. 141.—Method of Fitting an Interior Table Leg. Fig. 141.—How to Fit an Interior Table Leg.
Fig. 142.—Haunched Tenon for     Skylight or Garden Frame.

Fig. 142.—Haunched Tenon for Skylight or Garden Frame.

Fig. 142.—Haunched Tenon for Skylight or Garden Frame.

Fig 143.—Long and Short     Shouldered Tenon.

Fig 143.—Long and Short Shouldered Tenon.

Fig 143.—Long and Short Shouldered Tenon.

Fig. 141 indicates the method of fixing an interior leg to a table having a circular or straight top rail. The inlaid leg in this case is stump-tenoned into the top rail, and the inlaid portion of the leg is allowed to run through the rail, thus giving continuity of design.

Fig. 141 shows how to attach an interior leg to a table with either a circular or straight top rail. In this situation, the leg is joined to the top rail using a stump tenon, and the inlaid part of the leg extends through the rail, creating a seamless design.

Fig. 142 shows the application of the haunched tenon[Pg 71] (Fig. 135) to the making of a skylight or garden frame. In this and similar cases the side rails are rebated as shown in the section, and the bottom rail is thinner than the side rails to allow the glass to finish level upon it.

Fig. 142 demonstrates how to use the haunched tenon[Pg 71] (Fig. 135) for creating a skylight or garden frame. In this scenario and similar ones, the side rails are notched as illustrated in the section, and the bottom rail is thinner than the side rails to ensure that the glass sits flush on it.

Long and Short Shouldered Joint.Fig. 143 shows a haunched mortise and tenon joint having a long and short shoulder. This is a fairly common joint in framed partitions for offices, framing for greenhouses, tool sheds, etc., and is a frequent source of annoyance to the amateur. It is necessary to use this joint when both the stiles and uprights are rebated, and it calls for accurate marking out and great care in the making.

Long and Short Shouldered Joint.Fig. 143 shows a haunched mortise and tenon joint with a long and short shoulder. This is a pretty common joint in framed partitions for offices, framing for greenhouses, tool sheds, and so on, and it often frustrates beginners. This joint is necessary when both the stiles and uprights are rebated, and it requires precise marking and careful craftsmanship.

Fig. 144.—Joint for Fencing.

Fig. 144.—Joint for Fencing.

Fig. 144.—Fencing Joint.

Fig. 145.—Example of     Faulty Tenon.

Fig. 145.—Example of Faulty Tenon.

Fig. 145.—Example of Bad Tenon.

Fig. 144 shows the upright and rails of common garden or field fencing. The tenons are bevelled to fit and wedge each other in the mortise. The illustration gives both cross rails as shouldered, but in many cases shoulders are omitted when the rails are not thick enough to carry them.

Fig. 144 shows the posts and rails of typical garden or field fencing. The tenons are angled to fit and interlock with each other in the mortise. The illustration depicts both cross rails as shouldered, but in many instances, shoulders are left off when the rails aren't thick enough to support them.

Fig. 145 indicates faulty methods of working a tenon. At A the saw has been allowed to run too far when cutting the shoulder, thus greatly weakening the tenon. At B faulty sawing has again occurred, and to remedy this defect the worker has resorted to paring the shoulder with a chisel. Had the chisel been used[Pg 72] vertically an undercut shoulder (as at B) would not have occurred. The trouble now is that the slightest amount of shrinkage in the width of the stile will show an open joint. The result will be the same if it is necessary to remove a shaving or two when planing or levelling up the face of the frame.

Fig. 145 shows incorrect techniques for working a tenon. At A, the saw has been pushed too far when cutting the shoulder, significantly weakening the tenon. At B, there's been another mistake in sawing, and to fix this issue, the worker has used a chisel to pare the shoulder. If the chisel had been used[Pg 72] vertically, an undercut shoulder (like at B) wouldn't have happened. The problem now is that even a small amount of shrinkage in the width of the stile will create a visible gap. The outcome will be the same if the worker needs to remove a shaving or two while planing or leveling the face of the frame.

Fig. 146.—Self-wedging     Japanese Tenon Joint.

Fig. 146.—Self-wedging Japanese Tenon Joint.

Self-wedging Japanese Tenon Joint.

Fig. 147.—Tenoned and     Scribed Joint.

Fig. 147.—Tenoned and Scribed Joint.

Fig. 147.—Mortise and Tenon Joint.

Fig. 148.—Mitred and     Moulded Tenon Joint.

Fig. 148.—Mitred and Moulded Tenon Joint.

Fig. 148.—Mitered and Molded Tenon Joint.

Fig. 149.—Twin Tenons.

Fig. 149.—Twin Tenons.

Fig. 149.—Twin Tenons.

A Japanese Tenoned Joint, little known and rarely used in this country, is shown at Fig. 146. For clearness the two parts are here shown separate. The joint is self-wedging and will be of interest to Handicraft Instructors.

A Japanese Tenoned Joint, not well known and seldom used in this country, is displayed at Fig. 146. For clarity, the two parts are shown separately here. The joint is self-wedging and will interest Handicraft Instructors.

A Tenoned and Scribed Joint is seen at Fig. 147. The cross rail is cut at the shoulder, so as to fit the moulding[Pg 73] which is worked on the stile. This is a good joint in everyday use.

A Tenoned and Scribed Joint is seen at Fig. 147. The cross rail is cut at the shoulder to fit the molding[Pg 73] worked on the stile. This is a reliable joint for everyday use.

Mitred and Moulded Joint.Fig. 148 shows a type of joint largely used in light cabinet work. The method of mitreing the moulding and tenoning the stile to rail is indicated.

Mitred and Moulded Joint.Fig. 148 shows a type of joint commonly used in light cabinet work. The technique for mitreing the moulding and fitting the stile to the rail is indicated.

Twin Tenons (Fig. 149).—The method of tenoning the bearers which carry the drawers, or the midfeather between two drawers, in a dressing table or similar carcase is here shown. On completion, the tenons on the midfeather are wedged diagonally.

Twin Tenons (Fig. 149).—This is the technique for creating tenons on the supports that hold the drawers, or the midfeather between two drawers, in a dressing table or a similar structure. Once finished, the tenons on the midfeather are secured with diagonal wedges.

Fig 150.—Method     of Pinning.

Fig 150.—Method of Pinning.

Fig 150.—Pinning Method.

Fig. 151.—Joining Top     Rails to Upright Post.

Fig. 151.—Joining Top Rails to Upright Post.

Fig. 151.—Connecting Top Rails to Vertical Post.

Pinning.Fig. 150 shows the tenoning of the inside end of a wardrobe to the top of the carcase. This is also called pinning. The tenons should be wedged diagonally. The tenons and the distance between the tenons are more satisfactory if made equidistant, because if slight shrinkage occurs this is partially equalised. The width between the tenons should in no case exceed 3 ins.

Pinning.Fig. 150 shows how the inside end of a wardrobe is connected to the top of the carcase. This process is also known as pinning. The tenons should be wedged diagonally. The tenons and the space between them are more effective if they are equally spaced, as this helps to balance out any slight shrinkage that may happen. The width between the tenons should never exceed 3 inches.

Top Rails.—At Fig. 151 is shown the method of joining the top rails to the post of a tool shed or similar outhouse. The two rails, which are at right angles to[Pg 74] each other, are half-lapped and mortised; the tenon on the post runs entirely through them.

Top Rails.—At Fig. 151 is shown how to connect the top rails to the post of a tool shed or similar structure. The two rails, which are perpendicular to each other, are half-lapped and mortised; the tenon on the post goes all the way through them.

A Tusk Tenon Joint, with wedge, as used to secure the binder to the girder when making floors, is indicated at Fig. 153. The tenon here is narrow and engages the mortise, which is situated in the compressional fibres immediately adjoining the neutral layer. Fig. 152 shows a tusk tenon furnished with a drawbore pin.

A Tusk Tenon Joint, with a wedge, is used to attach the binder to the girder when constructing floors, as shown at Fig. 153. The tenon here is slim and fits into the mortise, which is located in the compressional fibers right next to the neutral layer. Fig. 152 displays a tusk tenon equipped with a drawbore pin.

Fig. 152.—Tusk Tenon. Fig. 152.—Tusk Joint.
Fig. 153.—Wedged Tusk Tenon. Fig. 153.—Wedged Tusk Joint.

Fig. 154 is a variation of Fig. 152.[Pg 75]

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is a version of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Fig. 155 shows tusk and wedged tenons as used when making a portable book or medicine cabinet. The shelf is housed into the end, and the tenons run through the end and are secured by wedges. This allows the article to be quickly and easily taken to pieces for removal or re-polishing. The dotted line in Fig. 155 indicates that the shelf may be shaped if desired.

Fig. 155 shows tusk joints and wedged tenons used for making a portable book or medicine cabinet. The shelf is fitted into the end, and the tenons pass through the end and are secured with wedges. This makes it easy to take the piece apart for removal or re-polishing. The dotted line in Fig. 155 indicates that the shelf can be shaped if desired.

Fig. 154.—Another Type of Tusk Tenon.

Fig. 154.—Another Type of Tusk Tenon.

Fig. 154.—Another Type of Tusk Tenon.

Fig. 155.—Tusk Tenon and Wedge.

Fig. 155.—Tusk Tenon and Wedge.

Fig. 155.—Tusk Tenon and Wedge.

Fig. 156.—Wheelwright's Self-wedging Tenon Joint. Fig. 156.—Wheelwright's Self-locking Tenon Joint.

In Fig. 156 a self-wedging mortise and tenon joint used by wheelwrights is shown. The dotted line (left-hand diagram) will indicate the amount of taper given to the mortise.

In Fig. 156 a self-locking mortise and tenon joint used by wheelwrights is shown. The dotted line (left-hand diagram) indicates the amount of taper given to the mortise.

Dovetailed and Wedged Tenon (Fig. 157).—When two pieces such as the cross rail and leg of a carpenter's[Pg 76] bench are required to be held together by a mortise and tenon, and to be readily taken apart, the tenon is dovetailed on one side and the mortise is made of sufficient width to permit the widest part of the dovetailed tenon to pass into it. When the tenon is in its position a hardwood wedge is driven in above the tenon, as shown.

Dovetailed and Wedged Tenon (Fig. 157).—When two pieces, like the cross rail and leg of a carpenter's[Pg 76] bench, need to be held together with a mortise and tenon but also need to be easy to take apart, the tenon is shaped with a dovetail on one side, and the mortise is made wide enough for the widest part of the dovetailed tenon to fit through. Once the tenon is in place, a hardwood wedge is inserted above the tenon, as illustrated.

Fig. 157.—Dovetailed and Wedged Tenon. Fig. 157.—Dovetail and Wedge Joint.
Fig. 158.—Method of Fox-wedging. Fig. 158.—Fox-wedging method.

Fox Wedged Tenon (Fig. 158).—This is the method of securing a stub tenon by small wedges. The mortise is slightly dovetailed and two saw cuts are made in the tenon about 316 in. from each side. Into each saw kerf a wedge is inserted and the joint glued up. The cramping operation forces the wedges into the saw cuts, thus causing the end of the tenon to spread and tightly grip the mortise.[Pg 77]

Fox Wedged Tenon (Fig. 158).—This is a method of securing a stub tenon using small wedges. The mortise is slightly tapered, and two saw cuts are made in the tenon about 316 in. from each side. A wedge is inserted into each saw cut, and then the joint is glued up. The clamping process forces the wedges into the saw cuts, causing the end of the tenon to expand and grip the mortise tightly.[Pg 77]

Mortise and Tenon with Mitred Face (Fig. 159).—This is a useful method of jointing framing which has square edges as shown; and it is equally useful even if the face edges have moulds worked upon them. If the joint has square edges a rebate may be formed to accommodate a panel by fixing a bolection moulding around the frame. A section of the bolection mould planted on the frame is shown in the lower figure.

Mortise and Tenon with Mitered Face (Fig. 159).—This is a practical way to join framing that has square edges, as illustrated; it also works well even if the face edges have decorative profiles on them. If the joint has square edges, a recess can be created to fit a panel by attaching a bolection molding around the frame. A section of the bolection molding attached to the frame is shown in the lower figure.

Fig. 159.—Tenon Joint with Mitred Face. Fig. 159.—Tenon Joint with Mitered Face.
Fig. 160.—Rafter Joint.

Fig. 160.—Rafter Joint.

Fig. 160.—Rafter Connection.

Fig. 161.—Roof Joints.

Fig. 161.—Roof Joints.

Fig. 161.—Roof Connections.

Roof Joints.Fig. 160 shows the method of tenoning the principal rafter to the king post, whilst Fig. 161 illustrates the tenoning of the struts to the king post, and the king post to the tie beam. Both these examples are used in roof work. (See also Fig. 71.)[Pg 78]

Roof Joints.Fig. 160 shows how to cut a notch in the principal rafter to attach it to the king post, while Fig. 161 demonstrates the notching of the struts to the king post, and the connection of the king post to the tie beam. Both of these techniques are used in roofing projects. (See also Fig. 71.)[Pg 78]

Fig. 162.—Drawbore Pinning. Fig. 162.—Drawbore Pinning.
Fig. 163.

Fig. 163.

Fig. 163.

Fig. 164.

Fig. 164.

Fig. 164.

Operation of Pegs in Drawbore Pinning.

Operation of Pegs in Drawbore Pinning.

Drawbore Pinning.—At Fig. 162 is seen the method of securing a tenon by drawbore pinning, employed when it is not convenient to obtain the necessary pressure by using a cramp. The joint is made in the usual manner, and a 38-in. twist bit is used to bore a hole through piece A. The tenon is driven home and the hole is marked on the side of the tenon (B); the tenon is then withdrawn and the hole bored about 18 in. nearer to the shoulder than as marked on the separate diagram[Pg 79] at C. When the tenon is finally inserted the holes will not register correctly, and if a hardwood pin be driven into the joint it will draw the shoulders of the tenon to a close joint and effectually secure the parts.

Drawbore Pinning.—At Fig. 162 is shown the technique of securing a tenon using drawbore pinning, which is used when it's not practical to apply the needed pressure with a clamp. The joint is constructed in the usual way, and a 38-inch twist bit is used to drill a hole through piece A. The tenon is pushed in place, and the hole is marked on the side of the tenon (B); then, the tenon is pulled out and the hole is drilled about 18 inch closer to the shoulder than what was marked on the separate diagram[Pg 79] at C. When the tenon is finally inserted, the holes won't align correctly, and if a hardwood pin is driven into the joint, it will pull the shoulders of the tenon tight together and securely hold the pieces.

Sash Bars.Fig. 165 shows how to tenon a moulded sash bar to the rebated cross rail. In this illustration both shoulders of the moulded bar are shown square, but in the best class work these shoulders may be slightly housed into the cross rail to prevent side play. This type of joint is used for horticultural buildings, etc. If the lower rail be moulded with the same members as the sash bar, the end of the sash bar will have to be scribed on to it to make a fit.

Sash Bars.Fig. 165 shows how to shape a molded sash bar to fit into the rebated cross rail. In this illustration, both shoulders of the molded bar are shown squared off, but in top-quality work, these shoulders can be slightly recessed into the cross rail to prevent any side movement. This kind of joint is common for horticultural buildings and similar structures. If the lower rail is molded with the same profiles as the sash bar, the end of the sash bar will need to be traced onto it for a proper fit.

Fig. 165.—Tenoning     Moulded Sash Bar.

Fig. 165.—Tenoning Moulded Sash Bar.

Fig. 165.—Tenoning Molded Sash Bar.

Fig. 166.—Tenon     with Tongued and     Grooved Shoulder.

Fig. 166.—Tenon with Tongued and Grooved Shoulder.

Fig. 166.—Tenon with Tongued and Grooved Shoulder.

Fig. 167.—Detail     of Table Framing.

Fig. 167.—Detail of Table Framing.

Fig. 167.—Detail of Table Frame.

Tenon with Tongued and Grooved Shoulders (Fig. 166).—The object of the tongues and grooves here is to prevent the face of the work casting, or becoming warped, and thus spoiling the appearance of the surface of the work. If framing is to be veneered on the face side this is an exceptionally good method.

Tenon with Tongued and Grooved Shoulders (Fig. 166).—The purpose of the tongues and grooves in this case is to stop the face of the work from bending or warping, which would ruin the look of the surface. If the framing is going to be veneered on the front side, this is a particularly effective method.

Table Framing.Fig. 167 indicates the framing of a rail to a dining-table leg. In cases similar to this the tenons run into the leg and almost touch each other.[Pg 80] They are therefore mitred on the end as shown in the inset. Chair frames often call for similar treatment.

Table Framing.Fig. 167 shows how a rail connects to a dining table leg. In similar cases, the tenons fit into the leg and nearly meet each other.[Pg 80] Because of this, they are angled at the end as illustrated in the inset. Chair frames often require the same approach.

Twin Tenons with haunch, as used when the timber is of great thickness, are shown in Fig. 168.

Twin Tenons with a haunch, used for very thick timber, are shown in Fig. 168.

An Open Slot Mortise at the end of a right-angled frame is seen in Fig. 169. Fig. 170 shows an open slot mortise and tenon joint at the end of a frame of 60°. Both these joints are occasionally called end bridle joints.

An Open Slot Mortise at the end of a right-angled frame is seen in Fig. 169. Fig. 170 shows an open slot mortise and tenon joint at the end of a frame of 60°. Both these joints are occasionally called end bridle joints.

Fig. 168.—Twin Tenons     for Thick Timber.

Fig. 168.—Twin Tenons for Thick Timber.

Fig. 168.—Twin Tenons for Thick Timber.

Fig. 169.—The Open-slot     Mortise Joint.

Fig. 169.—The Open-slot Mortise Joint.

Fig. 169.—Open-slot Mortise Joint.

Hammer Head Tenons.—At Fig. 171 is shown the method of jointing framing having semicircular or segmental heads. The left-hand diagram indicates the method of wedging the joint so as to draw up the shoulders; the right-hand view shows the tongueing of the shoulders, which is necessary if thick timber has to be wrought. The sketch depicts the stile when taken apart from the shaped head of the frame.

Hammer Head Tenons.—At Fig. 171 is shown the method of joining framing with semicircular or segmental heads. The left diagram illustrates how to wedge the joint to tighten the shoulders; the right view demonstrates the notching of the shoulders, which is needed when working with thick timber. The sketch shows the stile when it is removed from the shaped head of the frame.

Clamping.Fig. 172 shows the method of tenoning drawing boards, desk tops and secretaire falls. This is commonly called clamping. The method is used to prevent wide surfaces from winding. A variation of the joint is shown at the left-hand side, the corners in this[Pg 81] example not being mitred. Fig. 173 shows the tenoning of a wide to a narrow rail when the joint is at an angle.

Clamping.Fig. 172 shows how to tenon drawing boards, desktops, and secretary falls. This is typically called clamping. The method is used to stop wide surfaces from warping. A variation of the joint is shown on the left side, where the corners in this[Pg 81] example are not mitered. Fig. 173 shows how to tenon a wide rail to a narrow one when the joint is at an angle.

Inserted Tenons (Fig. 174).—Where two pieces of timber run together at an acute angle it becomes necessary to use inserted tenons. Both pieces of the timber are mortised and the inserted tenons are secured into the widest piece. On the left is shown the inserted tenon, secured by the method known as fox-wedging; on the right the inserted tenon has been let into the wide rail from the edge. The narrow rail is secured by wedging the tenons from the outside edge in the ordinary manner.

Inserted Tenons (Fig. 174).—When two pieces of wood meet at an acute angle, it's necessary to use inserted tenons. Both pieces of wood are mortised, and the inserted tenons are fixed into the wider piece. On the left, you can see the inserted tenon secured using the method called fox-wedging; on the right, the inserted tenon is set into the wide rail from the edge. The narrow rail is secured by wedging the tenons from the outside edge in the usual way.

Fig. 170.—Open-Slot     Mortise at 60 degrees.

Fig. 170.—Open-Slot Mortise at 60 degrees.

Fig. 170.—Open-Slot Mortise at 60 degrees.

Fig. 171.—Hammer-Head     Tenon Joint.

Fig. 171.—Hammer-Head Tenon Joint.

Fig. 171.—Hammer-Head Tenon Joint.

Dreadnought File.—At Fig. 175 is a sketch of a portion of a dreadnought file. This has superseded the old-fashioned home-made float used to clean out the sides of a mortise.[Pg 82]

Dreadnought File.—At Fig. 175 is a drawing of part of a dreadnought file. This has replaced the outdated, hand-crafted float used to clear the sides of a mortise.[Pg 82]

Fig. 172.—Clamping.

Fig. 172.—Clamping.

Clamping.

Fig. 173.—Tenoning Narrow Rail.

Fig. 173.—Tenoning Narrow Rail.

Fig. 173.—Tenoning Narrow Rail.

Fig. 174.—Inserted Tenons.

Fig. 174.—Inserted Tenons.

Fig. 174.—Inserted Tenons.

Fig. 175.—     Dreadnought File.

Fig. 175.— Dreadnought File.

Fig. 175.— Dreadnought File.

Fig. 176.—External     and Internal Joints.

Fig. 176.—External and Internal Joints.

Fig. 176.—External and Internal Joints.

Fig. 177.—Setting out Stiles     and Rails for Tenoning.

Fig. 177.—Setting out Stiles and Rails for Tenoning.

Fig. 177.—Laying out Stiles and Rails for Tenoning.

General Rule.—In practically all cases where a single tenon is used the thickness of the tenon should be one-third the thickness of the timber. This leaves the timber at each side of the mortise the same strength as the tenon.

General Rule.—In almost all situations where a single tenon is used, the thickness of the tenon should be one-third of the thickness of the timber. This keeps the timber on each side of the mortise as strong as the tenon.

Mortise and tenon joints for inside work may be united with glue. If, however, the work has to stand the weather a better method is to unite the joint with white lead, which is run down to the required consistency with good outside varnish.

Mortise and tenon joints for indoor projects can be joined with glue. However, if the project needs to withstand the weather, a better approach is to use white lead, mixed to the right consistency with quality outdoor varnish.

Setting Out the Joint.—The principal use of the[Pg 83] mortise and tenon joint is in the construction of various types of framing, such as door and window frames. In one or other of its many and varied forms it may be classed as the most important joint in the general woodworking trade. The joint may be used as an internal one, as shown at the lower rail, Fig. 176, or as an external joint, as the upper rail of the same illustration.

Setting Out the Joint.—The main purpose of the[Pg 83] mortise and tenon joint is to build various types of framing, like door and window frames. In its many different forms, it can be considered the most important joint in the overall woodworking industry. The joint can be used internally, as shown at the lower rail, Fig. 176, or externally, like the upper rail in the same illustration.

Whatever type of framing has to be made, it is necessary that the face side of the wood be planed up straight and out of winding, and the face mark (as shown in Fig. 176) pencilled upon it. The best edge of the timber should next be planed up true in length, and square to the face side, and the edge mark (X) clearly placed upon it.

Whatever type of framing needs to be done, it's important that the front side of the wood is planed flat and straight, and that the face mark (as shown in Fig. 176) is penciled on it. The best edge of the timber should then be planed true in length and be square to the front side, with the edge mark (X) clearly marked on it.

The marking gauge is now set to the desired width, and gauge lines are marked on the wood, after which the waste wood is planed off until the timber is the required width. The thickness is gauged and treated in a similar manner, except in such cases where the finished work is to be of a rough and ready character.

The marking gauge is now adjusted to the desired width, and lines are drawn on the wood. After that, the excess wood is planed down until the timber reaches the required width. The thickness is measured and handled similarly, unless the finished product is meant to have a rough and ready look.

The Two Stiles (or uprights) have their faces turned to touch each other, as shown at Fig. 177, and their length may be anything from 1 in. to 3 ins. longer than[Pg 84] the required finished size. This waste wood at each end of the stiles (see arrow HO) is of importance to the work, as it prevents to a great extent the bursting of the mortise whilst cutting the hole or when knocking together[Pg 85] the work. The small projection is called the "horn," and it is cut off after the frame has been put together.

The Two Stiles (or uprights) are positioned so their faces touch each other, as illustrated at Fig. 177, and their length can vary from 1 inch to 3 inches longer than[Pg 84] the final required size. This extra wood at each end of the stiles (see arrow HO) is crucial to the project, as it significantly minimizes the risk of the mortise bursting while cutting the hole or while assembling[Pg 85] the work. The small extension is referred to as the "horn," and it gets trimmed off after the frame is assembled.

Fig. 178.—Setting Out the Stiles with Marking Knife. Fig. 178.—Laying Out the Stiles with a Marking Knife.
Fig. 179.—How to Saw the Tenons—First Operation. Fig. 179.—How to Cut the Tenons—First Step.

The two Cross Rails (Fig. 177), have their faces placed together as shown in the sketch. These rails may with advantage be left 12 in. longer than the finished size, and the portion of the tenon (which will protrude through the stile 14 in. at each end) may be cut off after the work is put together. (See Fig. 92.)

The two Cross Rails (Fig. 177), are aligned face to face as illustrated in the sketch. It's beneficial to leave these rails 12 inch longer than the final dimensions, and the part of the tenon (which will stick out through the stile 14 inch at each end) can be trimmed off once the assembly is complete. (See Fig. 92.)

Set out the stiles with a marking knife or penknife and a try square, as shown at Fig. 178. In this sketch only one stile is shown for clearness of representation, but two or more stiles (as at Fig. 177) may be marked out at the same time, provided a 12-in. try square be used; in fact, marking out the stiles in pairs is to be recommended, as all cross lines will be exact owing to their being marked at the same operation. The cut made by the marking knife should be lightly carried all round the work as the mortising is cut from each edge of the stile, the cutting of the mortising being finished in the centre. The lettering on Fig. 177 is as follows:—HO, horn; M, position of mortise; H, position of haunching; A, inside line, or sight size, as it is occasionally called.

Set out the stiles using a marking knife or penknife and a try square, as shown at Fig. 178. In this sketch, only one stile is shown for clarity, but you can mark out two or more stiles (as at Fig. 177) at the same time as long as you use a 12-inch try square; in fact, it's recommended to mark out the stiles in pairs because all cross lines will be accurate since they're marked in the same process. The cut made by the marking knife should be lightly traced all around the work as the mortising is cut from each edge of the stile, finishing the cutting of the mortising in the center. The lettering on Fig. 177 is as follows:—HO, horn; M, position of mortise; H, position of haunching; A, inside line, or sight size, as it’s sometimes called.

Set out the cross rails as at Fig. 177, lower sketch. The lettering in this figure is as follows:—T, tenons; the small piece of the tenon lettered J is called the haunch, and the shaded portion H is cut away to allow the haunch J to fit the haunching of the stile.

Set up the cross rails as shown in Fig. 177, lower sketch. The labels in this figure are as follows: T stands for tenons; the small part of the tenon labeled J is called the haunch, and the shaded area H is removed to let the haunch J fit into the haunching of the stile.

The Tenons (as already stated) are generally one-third the thickness of the timber, thus leaving the same amount of substance at each side of the tenon as the tenon itself is composed of. The mortise gauge is set to the required distance and used as in the case of the marking gauge (Fig. 82).[Pg 86]

The Tenons (as mentioned before) are typically one-third the thickness of the wood, which keeps an equal amount of material on each side of the tenon as the tenon itself. The mortise gauge is adjusted to the necessary distance and used just like the marking gauge (Fig. 82).[Pg 86]

Fig. 180.—Second Operation in Sawing Tenons. Fig. 180.—Second Step in Cutting Tenons.
Fig. 181.—Cutting Channel at Shoulder of Tenon before Sawing. Fig. 181.—Cutting Channel at the Shoulder of Tenon before Sawing.

To saw the tenons, place the rail in the vice as at Fig. 179 and, with a panel, tenon, or hand saw, according to the size of the work, cut down the outside of the tenon line as shown. Reverse your position and cut as shown at Fig. 180, then place the rail in a vertical position, and you will find little or no difficulty in sawing down square with the shoulder line. Repeat the above methods of sawing until all the tenons are sawn.

To cut the tenons, secure the rail in the vice as shown at Fig. 179 and, using a panel, tenon, or hand saw based on the size of your project, cut along the outer edge of the tenon line as illustrated. Change your position and cut as shown at Fig. 180, then stand the rail up vertically, and you should find it easy to saw straight down with the shoulder line. Repeat these sawing methods until all the tenons are cut.

Next saw out the pieces at the side of the tenon by the following procedure. Place the rail against the bench stop, or in the vice, and cut a small channel in which to run your tenon saw as shown at Fig. 181. If you have scored the line deeply with your knife when you were marking out the work, you will have little difficulty in removing a small portion with the chisel. The amount removed in the illustration is, of course, exaggerated. In the small channel thus made place the tenon saw and, guiding the saw blade with the finger so as to keep it upright or square (Fig. 182), saw away the waste material. Remove the waste material at the sides of the tenons in a similar way, and then saw out the portion marked H, Fig. 177, lower sketch.

Next, cut out the pieces on the side of the tenon using this method. Position the rail against the bench stop or in the vise and cut a small channel for your tenon saw as shown at Fig. 181. If you have scored the line deeply with your knife while marking out the work, you’ll find it easy to remove a small amount with the chisel. The amount removed in the illustration is, of course, exaggerated. In the small channel you created, place the tenon saw and, using your finger to guide the saw blade to keep it upright or square (Fig. 182), saw off the excess material. Remove the excess material from the sides of the tenons in the same way, and then saw out the portion marked H, Fig. 177, in the lower sketch.

The Mortising of the stiles may next be taken in hand by putting the stiles edgeways in the vice and boring away the bulk of the waste wood from the mortise with a suitable-sized twist bit and brace. This method will save a great amount of noise, as to a great extent it does away with the use of the mallet. Take the mallet and chisel and chop down about 38 in. as shown at Fig. 183; then turn the chisel to the position shown at Fig. 184 and remove the small piece as shown. Continue these two operations until you are about half-way through the wood and then start in a similar manner at the line a, Fig. 183, after which turn the other edge of the timber uppermost and repeat the methods shown.[Pg 88]

The Mortising of the stiles can next be tackled by placing the stiles in the vice sideways and drilling out most of the excess wood from the mortise using a properly sized twist bit and brace. This approach will significantly reduce noise since it largely eliminates the need for a mallet. Take the mallet and chisel and chop down about 38 in. as shown at Fig. 183; then turn the chisel to the position shown at Fig. 184 and remove the small piece as demonstrated. Continue these two steps until you're about halfway through the wood, and then start in the same way at the line a, Fig. 183, after which turn the other edge of the timber facing up and repeat the methods shown.[Pg 88]

Fig. 182.—Sawing away Waste Material. Fig. 182.—Cutting Away Waste Material.
Fig. 183.—Using the Chisel and Mallet for Mortising. Fig. 183.—Using the chisel and mallet for mortising.

Fig. 185 shows the sketch of a mortise which has its side removed so as to show the method of successive cuts with a chisel when removing the core from a mortise; this, in conjunction with the other sketches,[Pg 89] clearly shows the methods of working. In many woodwork examinations the examiners insist that the mortise shall be removed by successive cuts with the chisel, but we certainly advise the removal of much of the waste wood with a boring bit, provided the worker can keep straight and well within the limitations of his gauge lines.

Fig. 185 shows a sketch of a mortise with one side taken off to demonstrate the process of making successive cuts with a chisel to remove the core from a mortise. This, along with the other sketches,[Pg 89] clearly illustrates the working methods. In many woodwork exams, the instructors require that the mortise be created with successive chisel cuts, but we definitely recommend removing most of the waste wood with a boring bit, as long as the worker can maintain a straight line and stay within the boundaries of their gauge lines.

Fig. 184.—Removing Waste of Mortise with Chisel. Fig. 184.—Clearing Mortise Waste with a Chisel.

Removing Haunching.—After removing the mortise hole, the small portion which is called the haunching will require to be removed with a chisel. This calls for no special remark, as it is clearly shown in Figs. 187 and 188. Fig. 186 shows an everyday type of mortise and tenon joint separated; it is used in cases where a straight joint is required on the upper or lower edge of the work, whereas the upper rail of Fig. 176 shows the full haunch on the top edge. In cases such as Figs 187 and 188, where the edges of the frames are grooved to receive panels, etc., the width of the tenon is reduced by the width of the groove.[Pg 90]

Removing Haunching.—After getting rid of the mortise hole, the small part called the haunching needs to be taken out with a chisel. This doesn't require any special comments, as it's clearly shown in Figs. 187 and 188. Fig. 186 illustrates a typical mortise and tenon joint separated; it's used in situations where a straight joint is needed on the upper or lower edge of the work, while the upper rail of Fig. 176 displays the full haunch on the top edge. In cases like Figs 187 and 188, where the edges of the frames are grooved to hold panels, etc., the width of the tenon is reduced by the width of the groove.[Pg 90]

Fig. 185.—Mortise with     Side Removed.

Fig. 185.—Mortise with Side Removed.

Fig. 185.—Mortise with Side Cut Out.

Fig. 186.—The Joint Separated.

Fig. 186.—The Joint Separated.

Fig. 186.—Separated Joint.

Fig. 187.—Removal of     Haunching.

Fig. 187.—Removal of Haunching.

Fig. 187.—Removing Haunching.

Fig. 188.—Haunching with     Groove above.

Fig. 188.—Haunching with Groove above.

Fig. 188.—Haunching with groove above.

This must be remembered by the worker when marking out his stiles with the marking knife. Fig. 187 (right-hand sketch) shows the haunch, tenon, and groove G at the bottom. Fig. 188 (left-hand illustration) shows G (groove) at top, and HH (the haunch) at the bottom. Tenons may be glued together and[Pg 91] wedged as shown at Fig. 176 if for inside work; but if for outside work they are generally smeared with thick paint and wedged up. For light-class cabinet work it is usual to cut the mortise about seven-eighths of the distance through the stile and make the tenon to match it; the edge of the finished work does not then show any indication of the joint, and it leaves a nice clean surface at the edge of the work for polishing or varnishing.

This should be kept in mind by the worker when marking out his stiles with the marking knife. Fig. 187 (right-hand sketch) shows the haunch, tenon, and groove G at the bottom. Fig. 188 (left-hand illustration) shows G (groove) at the top and HH (the haunch) at the bottom. Tenons can be glued together and [Pg 91] wedged as shown at Fig. 176 if they are for indoor use; however, for outdoor use, they are usually covered in thick paint and wedged. For lighter cabinet work, it’s common to cut the mortise about seven-eighths of the way through the stile and make the tenon to fit it; this way, the edge of the finished piece doesn’t show any sign of the joint, leaving a clean surface at the edge for polishing or varnishing.

Fig. 189.—Interlocking Joint for Seat Rails of Chair to Leg. Fig. 189.—Interlocking Joint for Connecting Seat Rails of Chair to Leg.

Interlocking Chair Joint.—A joint designed with a view to strengthening the construction of chairs at the point where they are weakest is shown in Fig. 189. The joint is an interlocking one so arranged that, once the chair is glued up, no motion of the side rail can be possible. The groove in the side rail tenon is cut in such a manner that, on the insertion of the back rail tenon, the joint actually draws up and, having done so, is locked in position. The exact location of this groove is obtained in a similar manner to that used in marking[Pg 92] out tenons for drawbore pinning, i.e., the tenon is inserted in its mortise and the position of the back rail mortise transferred to it, after which the lines are set back by 164 in. (approximately) to cause the joint to draw.

Interlocking Chair Joint.—A joint created to enhance the strength of chairs at their most vulnerable points is shown in Fig. 189. The joint is interlocking, designed so that after the chair is assembled, there can be no movement of the side rail. The groove in the side rail tenon is shaped so that when the back rail tenon is inserted, the joint actually tightens and locks into place. The precise location of this groove is determined similarly to how tenons are marked out for drawbore pinning, i.e., the tenon is placed into its mortise, and the position of the back rail mortise is marked on it, followed by moving the lines back by 164 in. (approximately) to allow the joint to tighten.

From the illustration the construction of the joint should be clear. The method is particularly adapted to a section of rectangular form where one side is longer than the other, such as the back leg of a chair, as this shape allows for the accommodation of the extra length of tenon required.[Pg 93]

From the illustration, the construction of the joint should be clear. This method is especially suited for a rectangular section where one side is longer than the other, like the back leg of a chair, since this shape can accommodate the extra length of the tenon required.[Pg 93]


THE DOWELLING JOINT

Dowelling is the term generally given to the method of jointing timber and other materials by wooden or metal pegs, which are called dowels. For cabinet-making and similar work straight-grained beechwood dowels are mostly used; these may be bought by the gross, in lengths of about 36 ins., and of any desired diameter.

Doweling is the term commonly used for the method of joining wood and other materials with wooden or metal pegs, known as dowels. In cabinet-making and similar projects, straight-grained beechwood dowels are mostly used; these can be purchased in bulk, in lengths of about 36 inches, and in any preferred diameter.

Fig. 190.—Steel Dowel Plate. Fig. 190.—Steel Dowel Plate.

Making Dowels.—Many, however, prefer to make what they require for the work in hand, and the following is the method that is generally employed. Pieces of straight-grained wood are wrought to a square section, after which the corners are planed away to form an octagonal section. The sharp corners are now planed away, and the roughly formed dowel is driven through a steel dowel plate, Fig. 190, by the aid of a heavy hammer, thus giving the necessary roundness and finish to the dowels. When hammering dowels through a plate the hammer should on no account be allowed to come in contact with the face of the dowel plate, or the cutting edge of the hole will be spoilt.[Pg 94] Simply drive the dowel to within 18 in. of the plate and knock it out with the next dowel.

Making Dowels.—Many people, however, prefer to create what they need for the task at hand, and the following is the method that is generally used. Pieces of straight-grained wood are shaped into a square section, then the corners are planed off to form an octagonal section. The sharp corners are planed away, and the roughly shaped dowel is pushed through a steel dowel plate, Fig. 190, using a heavy hammer to give the dowels the necessary roundness and finish. When hammering dowels through a plate, the hammer should never touch the face of the dowel plate, or it will ruin the cutting edge of the hole.[Pg 94] Just drive the dowel to within 18 in. of the plate and knock it out with the next dowel.

Fig. 191.—Cradle for Planing Dowels. Fig. 191.—Cradle for Planing Dowels.
Fig. 192.—Dowel     with Groove.

Fig. 192.—Dowel with Groove.

Fig. 192.—Dowel with Groove.

Fig. 193.—Sawing Groove     in Dowel.

Fig. 193.—Sawing Groove in Dowel.

Fig. 193.—Cutting Groove in Dowel.

To plane off the corners a "cradle" (Fig. 191) is made and kept for the purpose. The advantage of this cradle is obvious, preventing as it does any tendency of the partly-formed dowel to slip or wobble. A jig, or cradle, is easily made by bevelling the edges of two separate pieces of wood and then glueing and screwing them together as at Fig. 191. A small block of wood is inserted to act as a stop whilst the planing operation is in progress. It is usual to bevel both edges of the[Pg 95] timber from which the cradle is formed, thus accommodating all sizes of dowels from 14 in. to 58 in. in diameter.

To shape the corners, a "cradle" (Fig. 191) is created and kept for this purpose. The benefit of this cradle is clear; it stops the partially-formed dowel from slipping or wobbling. A jig, or cradle, is simple to make by beveling the edges of two separate pieces of wood and then gluing and screwing them together as shown at Fig. 191. A small block of wood is added to serve as a stop while the planing is happening. It's common to bevel both edges of the[Pg 95] timber used to make the cradle, allowing it to accommodate all sizes of dowels from 14 in. to 58 in. in diameter.

Fig. 194.—Pricking the Centres ready for Boring. Also showing how Brace is used in conjunction with Try Square. Fig. 194.—Marking the centers for boring. Also shows how the brace is used with the try square.

Fig. 192 shows a completed dowel with a small groove running along its entire length. The object of this groove is to allow the air and superfluous glue to escape and thus avoid splitting the work on hand; the groove also secretes a certain amount of glue, which increases its hold on the timber.[Pg 96]

Fig. 192 shows a finished dowel with a small groove running its entire length. The purpose of this groove is to let air and excess glue escape, preventing the workpiece from splitting; it also holds a small amount of glue, which enhances its grip on the wood.[Pg 96]

Fig. 198 illustrates the method of marking out and gauging two boards for dowelling. The edges of the boards are first shot to a true joint; then the face sides are placed together and the lines for the dowels are marked across the edges with a fine pencil and the aid of a try square. The boards are then gauged from the face side, thus giving the points indicated in the sketch.

Fig. 198 shows how to mark and measure two boards for doweling. First, the edges of the boards are trimmed for a perfect joint; then, the face sides are pressed together, and the lines for the dowels are drawn across the edges with a fine pencil using a try square. The boards are then measured from the face side, marking the points shown in the sketch.

Fig. 195.—Countersink. Fig. 195.—Countersink tool.
Fig. 196.—Dowel Rounder. Fig. 196.—Dowel Rounder.
Fig. 197.—Twist Bit. Fig. 197.—Twist Bit.

To start the twist bit (Fig. 197) it is a good plan to prick the board at the point of intersection of the marked lines with a sharp, circular-pointed marking awl. This obviates any tendency of the boring bit to run out of truth and thus cause unevenness on the face side of the jointed board. (See Fig. 194.)

To begin with the twist bit (Fig. 197), it's a smart idea to make a small mark on the board where the marked lines intersect using a sharp, pointed marking awl. This prevents the boring bit from misaligning and causing an uneven surface on the front side of the joined board. (See Fig. 194.)

A safe rule for the spacing of dowels when jointing sideboard tops, dressing table and wardrobe ends, etc., is to place the dowels 9 ins. to 10 ins. apart, and place two dowels at each end as shown at Fig. 198. The length of the dowels should be about 78 in. to 114 in. long.

A good guideline for spacing dowels when joining sideboard tops, dressing table ends, wardrobe ends, and similar items is to place the dowels 9 to 10 inches apart, and use two dowels at each end as shown at Fig. 198. The length of the dowels should be about 78 to 114 inches long.

Fig. 199 shows the two boards prepared ready for[Pg 97] glueing. The back one is bored to receive the dowels, and the front one shows the dowels glued in position. It is customary to warm the edges of the boards before spreading the glue, and cramps are required to squeeze the joint tight. These should be left on the jointed board from one to four hours according to the state of the weather. In cases where thick timber (say 2-in. or 212-in. boards) is to be jointed, two rows of dowels may be used, the position of the dowels being as Fig. 200.

Fig. 199 shows the two boards ready for glueing.[Pg 97] The back one has holes for the dowels, and the front one has the dowels glued in place. It's common to warm the edges of the boards before applying the glue, and clamps are needed to hold the joint tightly. These should stay on the joined board for one to four hours, depending on the weather conditions. For thicker timber (like 2-inch or 212-inch boards), two rows of dowels can be used, positioned as Fig. 200.

Fig. 198.—Marking and Gauging Boards for Dowelling. Fig. 198.—Marking and Measuring Boards for Dowelling.
Fig. 199.—Dowelled Joint ready for Glueing. Fig. 199.—Dowel Joint Ready for Gluing.

Fig. 201 shows the plan of a 3-in. cornice pole made to fit a bay window; the straight portions of the pole are generally turned in the lathe, the corner portions being afterwards jointed and worked up to the required shape. To avoid any difficulty in the setting out of the dowels, a disc of cardboard or sheet metal is made to the same[Pg 98] diameter as that of the cornice pole; this disc is called a template. The positions of the dowels are set out geometrically, and the centres are pricked through with a fine-pointed marking awl (see sketch of template, a, Fig. 201). The template is put on the ends of the straight pole, and the dowel centres are pricked into the wood. The process is repeated on the ends of the corner block (b, Fig. 201), and if the holes be now bored at the centres indicated a true fit will be obtained.

Fig. 201 shows the design of a 3-inch cornice pole made for a bay window. The straight parts of the pole are usually shaped using a lathe, while the corner pieces are later joined and formed into the required shape. To make it easier to set the dowels, a disc of cardboard or sheet metal is created with the same diameter as the cornice pole; this disc is known as a template. The positions of the dowels are marked out geometrically, and the centers are marked with a fine-pointed awl (see the sketch of the template, a, Fig. 201). The template is placed on the ends of the straight pole, and the dowel centers are marked onto the wood. This process is repeated on the ends of the corner block (b, Fig. 201), and if the holes are drilled at the indicated centers, a precise fit will be achieved.

Fig. 200.—Method     of Dowelling     Thick Timber.

Fig. 200.—Method of Dowelling Thick Timber.

Fig. 200.—How to Dowell Thick Timber.

Fig. 201.—Method of Dowelling Cornice     Pole by Means of Template.

Fig. 201.—Method of Dowelling Cornice Pole by Means of Template.

Fig. 201.—How to Dowell Cornice Using a Template.

Fig. 201 c shows two portions of the circular pole jointed up to a corner block, and the dotted lines P indicate the direct line of pressure and shows the position for the cramp. When the glue is thoroughly set the corner block is sawn and spokeshaved to the desired shape as shown by the dotted line. This method is illustrated to show that, by the use of a suitable template, dowels may be exactly set out even when there is no straight or square face from which to use a marking gauge, and the method may, of course, be applied to many other examples of dowelling at the discretion of the workman.

Fig. 201 c shows two parts of the circular pole connected to a corner block, and the dotted lines P indicate the direct line of pressure and the position for the cramp. Once the glue has fully set, the corner block is sawed and shaped with a spokeshave to the desired form as shown by the dotted line. This approach is illustrated to demonstrate that, by using a suitable template, dowels can be precisely positioned even when there isn't a straight or square face to use a marking gauge, and this method can, of course, be applied to many other doweling situations at the workman's discretion.

Fig. 202.—Dowelling a Mitred Frame.

Fig. 202.—Dowelling a Mitred Frame.

Fig. 202.—Joining a Mitered Frame.

Fig. 203.—Method of Frame Dowelling.     (Long and Short Shoulders.)

Fig. 203.—Method of Frame Dowelling. (Long and Short Shoulders.)

Fig. 203.—Method of Frame Doweling. (Long and Short Shoulders.)

Fig. 204.—Table Leaf with Dowels.

Fig. 204.—Table Leaf with Dowels.

Fig. 204.—Table Leaf with Dowels.

Fig. 205.—     Block for     Twist Bit.

Fig. 205.— Block for Twist Bit.

Fig. 205.— Block for Twist Bit.

Fig. 206.—Dowelling     for Moulded Frame.

Fig. 206.—Dowelling for Moulded Frame.

Fig. 206.—Doweling for Molded Frame.

Fig. 207.—     Cap.

Fig. 207.— Cap.

Fig. 207.— Cap.

[Pg 99]

Fig. 202 shows one corner of a mitred and dowelled[Pg 100] frame. It needs little or no explanation beyond the fact that the dowels should be at right angles to the line of joint, and consequently the dowel at the outside edge of the frame will have to be much shorter than the others. This gives a strong and serviceable joint, suitable for many purposes.

Fig. 202 shows one corner of a mitered and dowelled[Pg 100] frame. It needs very little explanation except that the dowels should be perpendicular to the joint line, meaning the dowel at the outer edge of the frame will have to be much shorter than the others. This creates a strong and functional joint, suitable for various purposes.

Frame Dowelling.Fig. 203 shows one corner of a frame with long and short shoulders, such as occurs when the upright is rebated through its entire length. The holes in both pieces are bored for the dowels before they are rebated. This avoids any difficulty in endeavouring to bore with only one side of the twist bit in the wood. A similar type of joint is used on nearly all kinds of glass and door frames in cabinet work.

Frame Dowelling.Fig. 203 shows one corner of a frame with long and short shoulders, which happens when the upright is set back along its entire length. The holes in both pieces are drilled for the dowels before they are cut. This prevents any issues that might come from trying to drill with just one side of the twist bit in the wood. A similar type of joint is used in almost all types of glass and door frames in cabinet making.

Fig. 204 is a leaf for the screw type of table. Circular dowels are shown at one end, and rectangular wooden pegs at the other; both methods are equally good, and, of course, the dowels are only glued into one leaf. The object of these dowels is to guide the table leaf into its proper position when the leaf engages the table proper, and to make the flat surface of the table top and leaf register correctly and thus ensure a level surface.

Fig. 204 is a leaf for a screw-type table. Circular dowels are shown at one end, and rectangular wooden pegs at the other; both methods work equally well, and, of course, the dowels are glued into one leaf only. The purpose of these dowels is to help align the table leaf into its proper position when it connects with the main table, and to ensure that the flat surfaces of the table top and leaf match up correctly, thereby creating a level surface.

Fig. 205 is a wooden block made in two portions and held together by screws; it is used to fasten around a twist bit, the object being to ensure that all the dowel holes are of uniform depth. It may be adjusted as desired and firmly screwed round the twist bit; if the hole is made 14 in. in diameter it will clip round a 14-in. or 38-in. bit and will answer a dual purpose. It is a preventative for bad dowelling.

Fig. 205 is a wooden block made in two pieces and held together by screws; it’s used to secure around a twist bit, and its purpose is to make sure that all the dowel holes are the same depth. It can be adjusted as needed and tightly fastened around the twist bit; if the hole is made 14 in. in diameter, it will fit around a 14-in. or 38-in. bit and will serve a dual purpose. It helps prevent poor dowelling.

Fig. 206 is an example of dowelling framing when the moulding on the edge has to be mitred. It is necessary to cut the shoulders away so as to allow the members of the moulding to intersect. The section of the mould is not shown in the sketch for clearness of representation.[Pg 101] The portion marked H is called the "horn," and it is not cut off until after the frame is glued up; its object is to prevent the rail splitting or bursting when knocking up the frame or during the cramping process.

Fig. 206 is an example of dowelling framing when the moulding on the edge needs to be mitred. It's necessary to trim the shoulders away so that the moulding pieces can intersect. The section of the mould isn't shown in the sketch for clarity. [Pg 101] The part labeled H is called the "horn," and it isn't removed until after the frame is glued together; its purpose is to prevent the rail from splitting or breaking when assembling the frame or during the cramping process.

Fig. 207 shows the method of dowelling a moulded cap to the top of a wooden bedstead post or similar pillar where it is desired to avoid any unsightliness.

Fig. 207 demonstrates how to dowel a shaped cap onto the top of a wooden bedpost or similar pillar where it's important to maintain a clean look.

Fig. 208 is a dining-table leg and portion of the framing, showing the method of dowelling the frame to the leg. Chairs, couch frames, etc., are made in a similar manner.

Fig. 208 is a dining table leg and part of the framework, illustrating how to dowel the frame to the leg. Chairs, couch frames, and similar items are constructed in the same way.

Fig. 209 shows the top portion of a table leg and a home-made dowel gauge. The gauge is made of any hardwood, and steel wire pins are driven through at the required positions and sharpened similar to the spur of a marking gauge. The legs are sawn and planed up true and square, and the advantage of the gauge is that all legs are marked exactly alike and are therefore interchangeable until glued up. A gauge of this type is easily and quickly made and may be kept for its specific purpose or altered for other work.

Fig. 209 shows the top part of a table leg and a DIY dowel gauge. The gauge is made from any hardwood, and steel wire pins are pushed through at the needed spots and sharpened like the spur of a marking gauge. The legs are cut and planed to be straight and square, and the benefit of the gauge is that all legs are marked exactly the same and are therefore interchangeable until glued. A gauge like this is easy and quick to make and can be kept for its specific purpose or modified for other tasks.

Fig. 210 indicates the Queen Anne type of leg, a sketch of same broken below the knee also being given. Here we have another type of irregular setting out, which is accomplished in the following manner. Saw and plane the broken portion of the leg true as shown; take the timber which is to be jointed and treat it in a similar manner; now place four ordinary pins on the lower portion. Carefully place the top portion to the required position and smartly give it one tap with the hammer; this will cause the pin-heads to leave indentations, and if these be taken as centres for boring, accurate work will result. The new portion of the leg is afterwards sawn and wrought to the desired shape.

Fig. 210 shows the Queen Anne style leg, with a sketch of it broken below the knee provided. Here, we have another type of uneven setting, which is done like this: saw and plane the broken part of the leg to make it even as shown; take the piece of wood to be joined and treat it the same way; then place four regular pins on the lower part. Carefully position the top part where it needs to go and give it a quick tap with the hammer; this will leave indentations from the pin heads, which can be used as centers for drilling, ensuring precise work. The new piece of the leg is then sawed and shaped as needed.

This is an example of work where it is next to impossible[Pg 102] to use a gauge, and as only one joint is required it is not worth the time taken to make a template.

This is an example of work where it's nearly impossible[Pg 102] to use a gauge, and since only one joint is needed, it's not worth the time spent making a template.

Fig. 208.—Dowelling a Dining-Table Leg.

Fig. 208.—Dowelling a Dining-Table Leg.

Fig. 208.—Joining a Dining Table Leg.

Fig. 209.—Dowel Gauge     for Legs.

Fig. 209.—Dowel Gauge for Legs.

Fig. 209.—Dowel Gauge for Legs.

Fig. 210.—Dowelling a Cabriole Leg. Fig. 210.—Joining a Cabriole Leg.

The tools used in dowelling are: Brace, countersink, dowel-rounder, twist bit, try-square, marking-awl, and the usual bench tools. The first four are illustrated at Figs. 194, 195, 196 and 197 respectively.

The tools used in doweling are: brace, countersink, dowel-rounder, twist bit, try-square, marking awl, and the regular bench tools. The first four are illustrated at Figs. 194, 195, 196 and 197 respectively.

The method of working is: Plane up, mark out, bore holes, countersink, glue dowels and complete joints.[Pg 103]

The process is: Plane the wood, mark the outlines, drill holes, countersink, glue in dowels, and finish the joints.[Pg 103]


THE SCARF JOINT

The method known as "scarfing" is used for the joining of timber in the direction of its length, enabling the workman to produce a joint with a smooth or flush appearance on all its faces. One of the simplest forms of scarfed joint is known as the half lap, in which a portion is cut out at the end of each beam or joist, equal in depth to half the full depth of the beam, and of equal length to the required scarf.

The technique called "scarfing" is used for joining timber along its length, allowing the craftsman to create a joint that looks smooth or flush on all sides. One of the simplest types of scarf joint is the half lap, where a section is cut out at the end of each beam or joist, going halfway through the depth of the beam and matching the length of the desired scarf.

The two pieces before they are placed together form a joint as shown at Fig. 211, the projecting part (A) fitting into the recessed portion marked B and the two pieces being secured in their respective positions by screws.

The two parts before they are joined create a joint as shown at Fig. 211, with the projecting part (A) fitting into the recessed section labeled B, and the two pieces being held in place by screws.

Fig. 212 shows a dovetailed scarf joint. This is a variation of Fig. 211, the length of the dovetail lap being from 6 ins. to 8 ins. in length.

Fig. 212 shows a dovetailed scarf joint. This is a variation of Fig. 211, with the length of the dovetail lap ranging from 6 inches to 8 inches.

Fig. 213 is an illustration of a joint designed to resist a cross strain. The face side is left flush, whilst the underside is assisted by an iron plate. The joint is secured with nuts, bolts, and washers. This type of joint is frequently used for joining purlins in roof work; the iron plate on the underside is in this case omitted.

Fig. 213 is an example of a joint made to handle cross strain. The outer side is kept level, while the bottom is supported by a metal plate. The joint is fastened with nuts, bolts, and washers. This type of joint is often used for connecting purlins in roofing; in this situation, the metal plate on the bottom is usually not included.

Fig. 214 is designed to resist both tension and compression and is an excellent joint for all purposes. The joint is brought together by using folding wedges as shown in the centre.

Fig. 214 is built to withstand both pulling and pushing forces and is a great joint for all uses. The joint is secured using folding wedges as shown in the center.

Fig. 211.—Half-Lap Scarf Joint for Light Timber. Fig. 211.—Half-Lap Scarf Joint for Light Timber.
Fig. 212.—Dovetailed Scarf Joint. Fig. 212.—Dovetail Scarf Joint.
Fig. 213.—Plated Scarf Joint Used in Roof Work. Fig. 213.—Plated Scarf Joint Used in Roofing.

Fig. 215 is a variation of Fig. 214, and it will be noticed that tenons are provided on the face and underside[Pg 104] to resist cross strain. Probably this is one of the best varieties of the scarfed joint. Unfortunately, however, its production is somewhat costly, and this may[Pg 105] be the reason that it is not more universally used. Folding wedges are used to secure the two pieces in position.

Fig. 215 is a type of Fig. 214, and you'll notice that tenons are placed on both the front and back[Pg 104] to handle cross strain. This is likely one of the best types of scarf joints. Unfortunately, its production is a bit expensive, which might[Pg 105] explain why it's not more widely used. Folding wedges are used to keep the two pieces in place.

Fig. 214.—Tenoned Scarf Joint. Fig. 214.—Tenoned Scarf Joint.
Fig. 215.—Double Tenoned Scarf Joint. Fig. 215.—Double Tenon Scarf Joint.
Fig. 216.—Scarf Joint with Vee'd ends. Fig. 216.—Scarf Joint with Vee'd ends.

Fig. 216 is a scarfed joint with undercut vee'd ends which prevent the joint from lipping up or down or sideways. It is a useful joint, calling for careful setting out and accurate craftsmanship. Folding wedges are used in this case to draw up and secure the joint.

Fig. 216 is a scarf joint with tapered ends that prevent it from lifting or shifting in any direction. It's a practical joint that requires careful planning and skilled workmanship. Folding wedges are used here to tighten and secure the joint.

Fig. 217 is a "fished joint," and the following difference between a scarfed and fished joint should be noted. A fished joint need not necessarily reduce the total length of the beams to be joined, and fish plates of wood or iron (or a combination of both) are fastened at[Pg 106] each side of the joint. In a scarf joint all surfaces are flush. In Fig. 217 the beams are butt-jointed and secured by wooden plates and iron bolts. The upper plate is let into each beam, and the lower plate is provided with two wooden keys to prevent the beams sliding (or "creeping") upon the lower plate. Iron nuts, bolts, and washers are used to complete the joint.

Fig. 217 is a "fished joint," and the following difference between a scarfed and fished joint should be noted. A fished joint doesn’t have to decrease the total length of the beams being connected, and fish plates made of wood, iron, or a mix of both are attached on each side of the joint. In a scarf joint, all surfaces are even. In Fig. 217, the beams are butt-jointed and secured with wooden plates and iron bolts. The upper plate is recessed into each beam, and the lower plate has two wooden keys to keep the beams from sliding (or "creeping") on the lower plate. Iron nuts, bolts, and washers are used to finish the joint.

Fig. 217.—Fished Joint. Fig. 217.—Fishing Joint.

In the case of the scarfed joint at Fig. 218 (used for purlins) the length of the scarf is usually made about four times that of the depth of tie beam. It has two hardwood keys which force the pieces together and thus tighten the joint.

In the case of the scarfed joint at Fig. 218 (used for purlins), the length of the scarf is typically about four times the depth of the tie beam. It has two hardwood keys that push the pieces together and tighten the joint.

Fig. 218.—Detail of Scarfed Joint in Purlins. Fig. 218.—Close-up of Scarf Joint in Purlins.

The methods of scarfing and fish-jointing are many and varied, and, in selecting a joint, the nature of the pieces to be joined and the direction and the amount of the load should be carefully taken into consideration.

The methods of scarfing and fish-jointing are numerous and diverse, and when choosing a joint, it's important to carefully consider the type of pieces being joined as well as the direction and magnitude of the load.

The above joints come under the heading of carpentry,[Pg 107] and the ordinary tools such as the saw, plane, boring-bit and chisels are all that are requisite and necessary to produce a sound and serviceable joint. Scarfed joints are generally of large size, and they are usually made by placing the work upon sawing trestles owing to the bench being too small to accommodate the large timbers.

The joints mentioned above fall into the category of carpentry,[Pg 107] and basic tools like a saw, plane, boring bit, and chisels are all you need to create a strong and useful joint. Scarf joints are typically large, and they're usually made by placing the work on sawing trestles since the bench is often too small to hold the large timbers.

Fig. 219.—Example of Tabled Joint with Straps. Fig. 219.—Example of a Tabled Joint with Straps.
Fig. 220.—Lapped Scarf Joint with Bolts for Heavy Timber. Fig. 220.—Lapped Scarf Joint with Bolts for Heavy Timber.

Fig. 219 is a tabled scarf joint which admirably resists tension and compression. It is very easy to[Pg 108] make and fit, and is not materially affected by shrinkage. The rectangular wrought iron straps are knocked up over the joint after the two pieces engage. The length of the joint should be approximately five times its thickness.

Fig. 219 is a scarf joint that effectively withstands tension and compression. It’s simple to[Pg 108] create and fit, and it isn’t significantly impacted by shrinkage. The rectangular wrought iron straps are secured over the joint after the two pieces connect. The length of the joint should be about five times its thickness.

Fig. 220 is an example of a lapped scarf joint which is secured with nuts and bolts. It effectively resists compressional stress in vertical posts and it may, if required, be strengthened by the addition of wrought iron fish plates. It is quite a serviceable joint for all general purposes, such as shed or garage building where fairly heavy timbers are used.[Pg 109]

Fig. 220 is an example of a lapped scarf joint held together with nuts and bolts. It effectively withstands compression stress in vertical posts and can be reinforced with wrought iron fish plates if needed. This joint is quite practical for all general uses, such as building sheds or garages where heavier timbers are utilized.[Pg 109]


THE HINGED JOINT

One of the most common forms of hinged joint in use to-day is that formed by using the "butt" hinge, and many troubles experienced by the amateur, such as "hinge-bound," "stop-bound," and "screw-bound" doors, etc., are due to a lack of knowledge of the principles of hingeing. Hinges call for careful gauging and accurate fitting, otherwise trouble is certain to occur.

One of the most common types of hinged joints used today is the "butt" hinge, and many issues faced by beginners, such as "hinge-bound," "stop-bound," and "screw-bound" doors, stem from a lack of understanding of hinge principles. Hinges require careful measurement and precise fitting; otherwise, problems are bound to arise.

A "Bound" door or box lid is said to be hinge-bound when the recess which contains the hinge is cut too deep. The frame and the body portion engage too tightly when closed, the result being that the door has always a tendency to open a little. This fault may be in many cases remedied by packing behind the hinge with one or two thicknesses of good stiff brown paper. For packing purposes such as this paper will be found to be of much more value than thin strips of wood or knife-cut veneer, the latter always having a great tendency to split when a screw or bradawl is inserted.

A "Bound" door or box lid is considered hinge-bound when the recess that holds the hinge is cut too deep. When closed, the frame and body portion fit together too tightly, which causes the door to always tend to open slightly. This issue can often be fixed by adding one or two layers of sturdy brown paper behind the hinge. For this type of packing, brown paper is much more useful than thin strips of wood or knife-cut veneer, as the latter has a strong tendency to split when you insert a screw or bradawl.

A stop-bound door is the name applied when the door is not finished to exactly the same thickness as originally intended. This causes the door to bind on the stops at the back, as shown at Fig. 221. The difficulty may be remedied by thinning the door a little at the back, or slightly rounding away the portion which[Pg 110] binds.

A stop-bound door refers to when the door isn't finished to the exact thickness that was originally planned. This causes the door to stick at the stops at the back, as shown at Fig. 221. This issue can be fixed by trimming a bit off the back of the door or by slightly rounding the area that’s sticking.[Pg 110]

Screw-bound is a common fault often overlooked by the amateur. It is caused by using screws of which the[Pg 111] heads are too large for the countersunk holes in the hinge, and may be avoided by slightly sinking the holes in the brasswork with a countersink or rose-bit.

Screw-bound is a common mistake that beginners often miss. It happens when screws have heads that are too large for the countersunk holes in the hinge, and you can avoid it by slightly enlarging the holes in the brasswork with a countersink or rose-bit.

Fig. 221.—Stop-bound     Door.

Fig. 221.—Stop-bound Door.

Fig. 221.—Stop-bound Door.

Fig. 222.—Butt Hinge.

Fig. 222.—Butt Hinge.

Fig. 222.—Butt Hinge.

Fig. 223.—Gauging. Fig. 223.—Measuring.
Fig. 224.—Marking     for Recess.

Fig. 224.—Marking for Recess.

Fig. 224.—Recess Marking

Fig. 225.—Sawing for     the Recess.

Fig. 225.—Sawing for the Recess.

Fig. 225.—Cutting for the Recess.

Alignment.—Another fault that is fairly common is having the axes of the hinges out of alignment. Especially is this the case when three hinges are used to hang a wardrobe or other large door. It is absolutely necessary in all cases that the exact centres of the pivot-pins of the hinges should be in a straight line.

Alignment.—Another common issue is having the hinge axes misaligned. This is especially true when three hinges are used to hang a wardrobe or another large door. It is crucial in all cases that the exact centers of the pivot pins of the hinges line up perfectly.

Particular attention to alignment is necessary when the body and the door frame are shaped on the face side. A familiar example that every reader may inspect for himself is the curved side of a railway carriage body and railway carriage door, where he will notice that a specially wide hinge has to be used at the bottom of the door to give the necessary alignment. Hinges fixed on work with their centres out of truth are often overlooked by the inexperienced worker, and this is a frequent cause of creaking.

Particular attention to alignment is necessary when the body and the door frame are shaped on the front side. A familiar example that anyone can check for themselves is the curved side of a train car body and train car door, where you will see that a specially wide hinge needs to be used at the bottom of the door to maintain proper alignment. Hinges installed on work with their centers misaligned are often overlooked by inexperienced workers, and this is a common cause of creaking.

Gauging.Fig. 222 is a sketch of a brass butt hinge, open. Fig. 223 illustrates a similar hinge closed, and shows the gauge set so that the point of the marker is exactly to the centre of the pivot-pin. This distance we will call C. Now turn to Fig. 224. The distance C has been gauged from the face side of the frame. The gauge is then set to the thickness of the hinge at its thickest portion, and to prevent "hinge-bind" see that the gauge is set on the fine side. Remember that the tapered point of the steel spur or marking awl will part the fibres of the timber a little more than the fine point, and give you a wider gauge line than was anticipated when you set the gauge. The inexperienced worker nearly always overlooks this. The result is a hinge-bound door, the cause of which is not discovered by the[Pg 112] worker because he is so sure that he has set the gauge correctly. The distance B, Fig. 226, shows the line gauged for the thickness of the hinge.

Gauging.Fig. 222 is a drawing of an open brass butt hinge. Fig. 223 shows a similar hinge in the closed position, with the gauge set so that the marker's point is exactly in the center of the pivot pin. We will refer to this distance as C. Now, look at Fig. 224. Distance C has been measured from the face side of the frame. The gauge is then adjusted to the thickness of the hinge at its thickest part, and to avoid "hinge-bind," make sure the gauge is set on the fine side. Keep in mind that the tapered point of the steel spur or marking awl will push the wood fibers apart a bit more than the fine point would, resulting in a wider gauge line than expected when you set the gauge. The inexperienced worker often misses this detail. The consequence is a hinge-bound door, with the cause going unnoticed by the worker because they are convinced they set the gauge correctly. The distance B, Fig. 226, indicates the line measured for the hinge's thickness.

Position of Hinges.—Another difficulty to the beginner is the position for his hinges, and it may here be stated that the general rule is to carry a line across the face of the work from the inside of the cross rail and place the hinge at E, as Fig. 224.

Position of Hinges.—Another challenge for beginners is figuring out where to place the hinges. Generally, the rule is to draw a line across the surface from the inside of the cross rail and position the hinge at E, as Fig. 224.

Fig. 226.—Tool Operation when Paring Out the Hinge Recess in the Door. Fig. 226.—Tool Operation for Removing the Hinge Recess in the Door.

Sawing for the Recess.—After marking out for the hinge, as shown at Fig. 224, take a fine-toothed saw (a dovetail saw is considered the best) and saw down as shown at Fig. 225, care being taken not to cut beyond the gauge lines. In this sketch three intermediate saw kerfs are shown, but if the hinge is of great length, say 5 or 6 ins., the removal of the waste wood will be[Pg 113] greatly facilitated by the addition of more intermediate saw kerfs. These cuts sever the cross fibres and allow the timber to be easily pared away in short lengths.

Sawing for the Recess.—After marking the spot for the hinge, as shown at Fig. 224, take a fine-toothed saw (a dovetail saw is the best choice) and saw down as indicated at Fig. 225, making sure not to cut past the gauge lines. In this illustration, three intermediate saw cuts are shown, but if the hinge is particularly long, around 5 or 6 inches, adding more intermediate cuts will make removing the excess wood much easier. These cuts break the cross fibers and allow the wood to be pared away in short sections.

In Fig. 226 we see the tool operation when paring out the hinge recess. At the left of the drawing the recess is shown marked. Take a 34 in. chisel and, using it as a knife (see A), deepen the gauge lines. Then stab the chisel downwards, as at B, to deepen the end lines. Next, take the chisel and pare away the back of the recess as at C. The work may then be completed by paring neatly till the bottom of the recess is flat.

In Fig. 226, we see how the tool works when cutting out the hinge recess. On the left side of the drawing, the marked recess is shown. Take a 34 in. chisel and use it like a knife (see A) to deepen the gauge lines. Then, stab the chisel downwards, as shown at B, to deepen the end lines. Next, take the chisel and shave off the back of the recess as shown at C. You can then finish the work by neatly paring until the bottom of the recess is flat.

Fig. 227.

Fig. 227.

Fig. 227.

Fig. 228.

Fig. 228.

Fig. 228.

The Hingeing of a Box Lid.

The Hingeing of a Box Lid.

Stopped Hinged Joints for Box Work.Fig. 227 is a section through a small box similar to a lady's work-box (the back of the box in the illustration is enlarged in thickness to clearly show the position of the hinge). In this case the knuckle of the hinge is let into the woodwork until it is flush with the back of the box, and the gauge would have to be set to the total width of the hinge. The back edges of the lid and the back edge of[Pg 114] the lower portion of the box are planed away at an angle of 45 degrees as indicated by the dotted lines.

Stopped Hinged Joints for Box Work.Fig. 227 is a section through a small box similar to a lady's workbox (the back of the box in the illustration is thickened to clearly show the position of the hinge). In this case, the knuckle of the hinge is embedded into the woodwork until it is flush with the back of the box, and the gauge needs to be set to the total width of the hinge. The back edges of the lid and the back edge of[Pg 114] the lower part of the box are planed away at a 45-degree angle as shown by the dotted lines.

Fig. 228 shows the same box with the lid open, and it will be observed that the chamfered edges come together and form a stop which prevents the lid falling backwards and breaking the box. This method of letting-in the knuckle flush is a useful one for box work because the ordinary stock brass butt hinge can be used. Attention may, however, be called to the "stopped butt-hinge," which is specially made to answer the above purpose; in its action a similar mechanical principle as the one applied to the box is used.

Fig. 228 shows the same box with the lid open, and you can see that the beveled edges come together to create a stop, which prevents the lid from falling back and damaging the box. This technique of fitting the knuckle flush is helpful for box making since it allows for the use of standard brass butt hinges. However, it's worth mentioning the "stopped butt-hinge," which is specifically designed for this purpose; it operates on a similar mechanical principle to that used in the box.

Fig. 229.—Strap Hinge.

Fig. 229.—Strap Hinge.

Fig. 229.—Strap Hinge.

Fig. 230.—Reversible or     Double-folding Screen     Hinge.

Fig. 230.—Reversible or Double-folding Screen Hinge.

Fig. 230.—Reversible or Double-folding Screen Hinge.

Fig. 231.—Pivot Hinge     for Screens.

Fig. 231.—Pivot Hinge for Screens.

Fig. 231.—Pivot Hinge for Screens.

Fig. 232.—Non-reversible     Screen Hinge.

Fig. 232.—Non-reversible Screen Hinge.

Fig. 232.—One-way Screen Hinge.

Types of Hinges.Fig. 229 is an elongated variety of the butt hinge, known in the trade as "strap hinge," "desk hinge," or "bagatelle hinge." As its name indicates, it is used on folding bagatelle tables, small writing desks, and other types of work that have but a narrow margin on which to fix the hinges. The long, narrow plates are sunk flush into the wood, the knuckle or rounded portion projecting.[Pg 115]

Types of Hinges.Fig. 229 is an elongated version of the butt hinge, commonly called a "strap hinge," "desk hinge," or "bagatelle hinge." As the name suggests, it's used on folding bagatelle tables, small writing desks, and other types of furniture that have a very narrow space to attach the hinges. The long, narrow plates are set flush into the wood, while the knuckle or rounded part sticks out.[Pg 115]

Fig. 233.—Back Flap Hinge.

Fig. 233.—Back Flap Hinge.

Fig. 233.—Back Flap Hinge.

Fig. 234.—Card Table Hinge.

Fig. 234.—Card Table Hinge.

Fig. 234.—Card Table Hinge.

Fig. 235.—Pivot Hinge.

Fig. 235.—Pivot Hinge.

Fig. 235.—Pivot Hinge.

Fig. 236.—Rising Butt Hinge.

Fig. 236.—Rising Butt Hinge.

Fig. 236.—Rising Butt Hinge.

Fig. 230 is an illustration of the reversible or double-folding screen hinge. Half the thickness of this hinge is let into each wing of the draught screen, allowing the screen to be folded either way. The hinge is costly, but effective in use.[Pg 116]

Fig. 230 shows the reversible or double-folding screen hinge. Half the thickness of this hinge is recessed into each side of the draft screen, enabling the screen to fold in either direction. The hinge is expensive, but it works well.[Pg 116]

Fig. 231 is a type of pivot hinge which is used to fix at the top and bottom of a screen.

Fig. 231 is a type of pivot hinge that's used to secure the top and bottom of a screen.

Fig. 232 is the non-reversible screen hinge and, as its name implies, will only fold in one direction.

Fig. 232 is the one-way screen hinge and, as its name suggests, will only fold in one direction.

Fig. 233 is a back flap hinge with a specially wide wing, used for the fall-down leaf of small tables and similar articles.

Fig. 233 is a back flap hinge with a uniquely wide wing, designed for the drop-leaf of small tables and similar items.

Fig. 234 is a card table hinge. This is let into the edges of the table, so that all is flush or level both above and below the surface.

Fig. 234 is a card table hinge. This is embedded into the edges of the table, ensuring that everything is flush or level on both the top and bottom surfaces.

Centre or Pivot Hinges.Fig. 235 is a centre or pivot hinge, used on the top and bottom of wardrobe doors, more particularly the interior door of a three-winged wardrobe where the method of fixing is confined to the cornice and plinth. The flange carrying the pins or pivot is let into the top and bottom of the door, the remaining flange being let into the cornice and plinth respectively.

Center or Pivot Hinges.Fig. 235 is a center or pivot hinge, used at the top and bottom of wardrobe doors, specifically the interior door of a three-wing wardrobe where the installation method is limited to the cornice and base. The flange holding the pins or pivot is recessed into the top and bottom of the door, while the other flange is fitted into the cornice and base respectively.

Rising Butt Hinges.Fig. 236 is the rising butt hinge, used on dining and drawing-room doors, so that when the door is opened the door rises sufficiently to clear the thickness of the carpet. This hinge has also an advantage over the ordinary butt hinge in that it is self-closing, i.e., the weight of the door plus the bevel on the hinge joint causes the door to close. Band and hook hinges and other ordinary varieties are too well known to require illustrating.

Rising Butt Hinges.Fig. 236 is the rising butt hinge, used on dining and living room doors, so that when the door is opened, it rises enough to clear the thickness of the carpet. This hinge also has an advantage over the regular butt hinge because it is self-closing, i.e., the weight of the door plus the bevel on the hinge joint causes the door to close. Band and hook hinges and other common types are too familiar to need illustrating.

Acute Angle Hingeing.—Fig. 237 is a sectional plan of a corner cupboard showing a good method of hingeing the door. The inset a shows an enlarged view of the corner carrying the hinge, also the adaptor piece c, which is fitted to the inside edge of the cupboard so that the hinged edges are at 90 degrees to the face. This is a far better and stronger method than that shown at b,[Pg 117] which is often attempted with disastrous results. The incorrect method b allows insufficient wood for fixing purposes, and in nearly all cases the thin edge of the door breaks away during the making and fitting, or soon after completion. The adaptor piece may have a face mould worked upon it to give a pilaster-like appearance if fancy so dictates.

Acute Angle Hingeing.—Fig. 237 is a sectional plan of a corner cupboard showing an effective way to hinge the door. The inset a provides a close-up view of the corner where the hinge is attached, along with the adaptor piece c, which is fastened to the inside edge of the cupboard so that the hinged edges are at 90 degrees to the face. This is a much better and stronger method than the one shown at b,[Pg 117] which is often attempted with disastrous outcomes. The incorrect method b leaves too little wood for securing purposes, and in almost all cases, the thin edge of the door breaks off during the construction and fitting, or soon after it’s finished. The adaptor piece can have a face mould designed on it to create a pilaster-like look if desired.

Fig. 237.—Hingeing Door of Corner Cupboard. Fig. 237.—Hinged Door of Corner Cupboard.
Fig. 238.—Inside Hingeing: Method of Letting Butt Hinge into Door Frame and Carcase. Fig. 238.—Inside Hingeing: How to Install a Butt Hinge into a Door Frame and Structure.

Inside Hingeing.—When a door is being hung inside the carcase (that is, not hinged over the ends) it is permissible, in the case of light work, to let the whole thickness of the hinge into the door; and when screwing the door to the carcase it is usual to fix the knuckle of the[Pg 118] hinge flush with the face of the carcase, thus allowing the door frame to stand back, making a break of about 18 in. with the face. The marking gauge should be set to the full width of the hinge; the mark, gauged on the[Pg 119] inside of the carcase end, thus forms a line to guide the worker whilst fixing the door. To successfully fix a door it generally requires two persons, one to hold the door in position, whilst the other bores the holes and fixes the screws.

Installing Hinges Inside.—When a door is being hung inside the frame (meaning not hinged over the edges), for lighter work, it's acceptable to let the entire thickness of the hinge be inserted into the door. When attaching the door to the frame, it's common to position the knuckle of the [Pg 118] hinge flush with the face of the frame, allowing the door frame to set back, creating about a 18 inch gap with the face. The marking gauge should be set to the full width of the hinge; the mark gauged on the [Pg 119] inside edge of the frame creates a line to guide the person installing the door. Typically, it takes two people to properly attach a door: one holds the door in place while the other drills the holes and secures the screws.

Fig. 239.—Showing Top and Bottom of Carcase Cut Back to allow Door to Close. Fig. 239.—Showing the top and bottom of the carcass cut back to allow the door to close.
Fig. 240.—Outside Hingeing.

Fig. 240.—Outside Hingeing.

Fig. 240.—External Hinges.

Fig. 241.—Section.

Fig. 241.—Section.

Fig. 241.—Section.

Fig. 238 shows the correct method of fitting butt hinges on high-class work. One wing of the hinge is let into the door, and the other wing is let into the carcase or door jamb, thus distributing a proportion of the weight to the carcase end instead of allowing the whole of the weight to be carried by the screws as would be the case in a, Fig. 237. The method of sinking each portion of the hinge into the door and carcase respectively is costly; hence it is not the general practice in cheap work. In Fig. 239 the top and bottom of carcase (T and B) are shown set back to allow the door to close.

Fig. 238 illustrates the proper way to install butt hinges on high-quality work. One side of the hinge is recessed into the door, and the other side is recessed into the frame or door jamb, which spreads some of the weight to the frame instead of putting all the weight on the screws as would happen in a, Fig. 237. The technique of recessing each part of the hinge into the door and frame is more expensive; therefore, it's not usually done in lower-cost work. In Fig. 239, the top and bottom of the frame (T and B) are shown pulled back to allow the door to close.

Outside Hingeing.Fig. 240 illustrates the portion of a door frame and carcase end when the door is hung on the face of the carcase. The correct method of letting in the hinge is shown in the enlarged section (Fig. 241), but, as previously mentioned, the hinge may have its entire thickness let into the door frame where it is of a light character. The door frame projects slightly over the carcase end, and occasionally a bead mould is worked on the edge of the door so as to give a finish and partly hide the joint. The bead would, of course, be the same size as the diameter of the knuckle of the hinge; and the knuckle, therefore, will form a continuation of the bead and give a workmanshiplike finish.

Outside Hingeing.Fig. 240 shows the part of a door frame and cabinet side when the door is attached to the front of the cabinet. The correct way to install the hinge is shown in the enlarged section (Fig. 241), but as mentioned earlier, the hinge can be installed with its full thickness recessed into the door frame if it is lightweight. The door frame extends slightly beyond the cabinet side, and sometimes a bead molding is added to the edge of the door to provide a finished look and partially conceal the joint. The bead should be the same size as the diameter of the hinge knuckle, so the knuckle will continue the bead and create a professional finish.

Fall Fronts.Fig. 242 is a sectional view of a fall front writing bureau fitted with centre or pivot [Pg 120]hinges and arranged so that the edges form a stop when the desk front is turned to a horizontal position. The position for the fitting of the brass plates carrying the[Pg 121] pivot-pin is somewhat awkward; but, by first sinking the plates into the carcase ends, and then slotting the edges of the fall, it will be found that the fall front may be put in from its horizontal position, and that sufficient room is left to enable the screwdriver to be manipulated without inconvenience.

Fall Fronts.Fig. 242 shows a sectional view of a fall front writing bureau designed with center or pivot [Pg 120]hinges, allowing the edges to act as a stop when the desk front is flipped to a horizontal position. Fitting the brass plates that hold the [Pg 121]pivot-pin can be a bit tricky; however, if you first embed the plates into the sides of the carcase and then create slots in the edges of the fall, you'll find that the fall front can be installed from its horizontal position, leaving enough space to use a screwdriver comfortably.

Fig. 242.—Fall Front of Writing Bureau. Fig. 242.—Fall Front of Writing Desk.
Fig. 243.—Revolving Fly Rail for Table.     See Pivoted Fly or Front Rail.

Fig. 243.—Revolving Fly Rail for Table. See Pivoted Fly or Front Rail.

Fig. 243.—Rotating Fly Rail for Table. See Pivoted Fly or Front Rail.

Fig. 244.—     Draught Screen     Tape Hinge.

Fig. 244.— Draught Screen Tape Hinge.

Fig. 244.— Draft Screen Tape Hinge.

Fly Rail.Fig. 243 is a sketch of a small table with the top removed. A revolving fly rail is shown pivoted upon a piece of 14-in. wire. The object of this fly rail is to form a support to the small hinged drop-leaf of the table. This method is suitable for small occasional tables and similar articles.

Fly Rail.Fig. 243 is a drawing of a small table with the top taken off. A rotating fly rail is shown pivoted on a piece of 14-inch wire. The purpose of this fly rail is to provide support for the small hinged drop-leaf of the table. This method is ideal for small occasional tables and similar items.

Draught Screens.Fig. 244 illustrates the end elevation and plan of a draught screen which is constructed of a light framework and covered with baize or American cloth. The reversible double-folding hinge (Fig. 230) would answer admirably for such a screen. Cases occur, however, where it is desired to hinge a screen to be used for an invalid's bedside, and it is then important that all draught should be excluded through the jointed edges. The double reversible hinge will not fulfil these conditions, and the following method is therefore adopted.

Draught Screens.Fig. 244 shows the side view and layout of a draught screen made with a lightweight frame and covered in baize or American fabric. The double folding hinge (Fig. 230) would work perfectly for this kind of screen. However, there are situations where a screen needs to be hinged for use beside a bed for someone who is ill, and in these cases, it’s crucial to make sure no drafts can come through the jointed edges. The double reversible hinge won’t meet these requirements, so the following method is used.

In the plan, Fig. 244, A and B, two laths of hardwood (beech, birch or mahogany answer splendidly) are shown. They are made the same length and the same width as the edges of the screen, the corners being slightly rounded away.

In the plan, Fig. 244, A and B, two strips of hardwood (beech, birch, or mahogany work great) are shown. They are the same length and width as the edges of the screen, with the corners slightly rounded off.

A double-folding, draught-proof hinge is then made as follows: Procure good fine webbing, about 114 in. wide, and the necessary large-headed tacks. Lay the laths side by side as shown in Fig. 244, and proceed to web them as shown. Commence with the web under the lath A; bring it between the laths and over B; now[Pg 122] take it round the left-hand edge of B, and round the back and between the laths and over A, continuing this method of wrapping the laths until the lower end is reached, and then fastening the webbing as indicated by the dotted lines which represent the tacks. This self-contained hinge is then fixed to the edges of the screen by boring suitable holes through the laths and[Pg 123] using countersunk screws. This is a cheap and efficient method of overcoming the difficulty. A similar method is used for the household clothes horse.

A double-folding, draft-proof hinge is made like this: Get some good, fine webbing, about 114 in. wide, and the necessary large-headed tacks. Lay the laths side by side as shown in Fig. 244, and start webbing them as demonstrated. Begin with the web under lath A; bring it between the laths and over B; now[Pg 122] take it around the left edge of B, then around the back and between the laths and over A, continuing this wrapping method until you reach the lower end, and then secure the webbing as indicated by the dotted lines representing the tacks. This self-contained hinge is then attached to the edges of the screen by drilling suitable holes through the laths and[Pg 123] using countersunk screws. This is a cost-effective and efficient way to resolve the issue. A similar method is used for the household clothes horse.

Fig. 245.—Finger Joint Hinge. Fig. 245.—Finger Joint Hinge.
Fig. 246.—The Knuckle Joint Hinge. Fig. 246.—The Knuckle Joint Hinge.

Finger Joint Hinge.Fig. 245 is a finger joint—a movable interlocking joint used to support the leaf of a Pembroke table. The small portion is screwed to the table rail and the shaped bracket swings out to support the drop leaf. The shaded portion of the bracket shows the timber chamfered away so that the fingers may be easily put behind the bracket to manipulate it. Note that the corners are slightly rounded off, as indicated by the black portion of the sketch, and that the mortises are cut about 14 in. deeper than the thickness of the timber used. This joint has now been almost superseded by a cheap stamped galvanised iron bracket of exactly the same pattern. The joint, however, is still used for repair work and in cases where a stamped metal bracket has not sufficient overhang.

Finger Joint Hinge.Fig. 245 is a finger joint—a movable interlocking joint used to support the leaf of a Pembroke table. A small part is screwed to the table rail, and the shaped bracket swings out to support the drop leaf. The shaded area of the bracket shows the wood that has been chamfered away so that the fingers can be easily placed behind the bracket to move it. Note that the corners are slightly rounded off, as shown by the black area in the sketch, and that the mortises are cut about 14 in. deeper than the thickness of the wood used. This joint has now mostly been replaced by a cheap stamped galvanized iron bracket of the same design. However, the joint is still used for repairs and in situations where a stamped metal bracket doesn't have enough overhang.

Fig. 247.—Open Joint Hingeing. Open Joint Hingeing.

Knuckle Joint Hinge.Fig. 246 is a similar type of joint to the above, and is called the knuckle joint. This arrangement of hingeing allows the table leg to swing in an angle of 180 degrees and is much neater in its appearance. It is often used to connect a movable[Pg 124] table leg to the framing, where it is necessary for the table leg and rail to swing outwards and support a drop leaf. The pivot is formed by a piece of 18-in. or 14-in. round iron rod running through the centre of the joint.

Knuckle Joint Hinge.Fig. 246 is a similar type of joint to the one mentioned above, and it’s known as the knuckle joint. This hinge setup allows the table leg to swing at a 180-degree angle and looks much neater. It’s commonly used to connect a movable[Pg 124] table leg to the frame, where the leg and rail need to swing outward to support a drop leaf. The pivot is created by a piece of 18-inch or 14-inch round iron rod that runs through the center of the joint.

Fig. 248.—Clearing the Architrave Mould. Fig. 248.—Clearing the Architrave Moulding.

Open Joint Hingeing.—The next three illustrations apply more particularly to the hanging of the ordinary household door.

Open Joint Hingeing.—The next three illustrations are specifically related to how a typical household door is hung.

Fig. 247 is termed "open joint hanging," from the fact that when the door is open a certain amount of open space exists between the edge of the door and the doorpost. This open space varies according to the position in which the butt hinge is fixed. A section is shown at which the pin of the hinge is let in level with[Pg 125] the face of the door. This will allow the door to open as shown by the dotted line, and it will not clear the architrave moulding.

Fig. 247 is called "open joint hanging" because when the door is open, there’s a gap between the edge of the door and the door frame. This gap changes depending on how the butt hinge is installed. A section is shown where the hinge pin is installed flush with[Pg 125] the surface of the door. This setup allows the door to open as indicated by the dotted line, but it won’t clear the architrave molding.

Fig. 249.—Close Joint Hingeing. Fig. 249.—Tight Joint Hingeing.

Fig. 248 indicates the position of the hinge fixed so as to allow the door to open and lay flat back to the architrave moulding. In this instance the butts are made with wider wings, and they are generally provided to take three screws (see Fig. 233, right-hand wing of hinge).

Fig. 248 shows where the hinge is attached so that the door can open and rest flat against the door frame. In this case, the hinges have wider wings, and they are typically designed to accommodate three screws (see Fig. 233, right-hand wing of hinge).

To determine the position of the centre pin of the hinge the following rule is observed. The centre of the pivot pin of the hinge must be half the distance between the face of the door, when closed, and the outside of the architrave moulding.

To find the position of the center pin of the hinge, follow this rule. The center of the pivot pin of the hinge must be half the distance between the closed door face and the outside of the architrave molding.

Close Joint Hanging.—The method known as "close joint hanging" ensures the joint at the hanging stile being in close proximity to the hanging rail; this is shown at Fig. 249. The first member of the architrave moulding is generally a bead of the same diameter as the knuckle of the hinge. The butt hinge is let in as shown in the illustration, and the door when opened forms a close-fitting joint.

Close Joint Hanging.—The technique called "close joint hanging" keeps the joint at the hanging stile very close to the hanging rail; this is illustrated at Fig. 249. The first part of the architrave molding is usually a bead that has the same diameter as the knuckle of the hinge. The butt hinge is recessed as depicted in the illustration, allowing the door to create a snug joint when opened.

Fig. 250.—Rule Joint Hinge, with Leaf Open. Fig. 250.—Rule Joint Hinge, with Leaf Open.

The Rule Joint Hinge is used to connect the top and the drop leaf of a table in cases where continuity of design is desired, so that the edge of the top and the leaf will show an ovolo moulding when the table is either open or closed. To the inexperienced worker it presents several difficulties and, if it is a first effort, it is[Pg 126] advisable to try out a sample joint on a couple of odd pieces of timber.

The Rule Joint Hinge connects the tabletop and the drop leaf of a table when a seamless design is wanted, ensuring that the edge of both the top and the leaf displays an ovolo molding whether the table is open or closed. For someone who's new to this, it can be tricky, and if it's your first time trying it, it's a good idea to practice on a couple of scrap pieces of wood first.

Fig. 250 illustrates the joint when the leaf is opened or in a horizontal position. At Fig. 252 we have the joint when the leaf is let down to a vertical position. It should be observed in the latter figure that the edge A of the drop leaf is in alignment with the axis of the hinge. Steel or brass back-flap hinges (Fig. 233) are generally used and they are sunk into the table as suggested.

Fig. 250 shows the joint when the leaf is opened or in a horizontal position. At Fig. 252, we see the joint when the leaf is positioned vertically. Notice in the latter image that edge A of the drop leaf lines up with the hinge axis. Steel or brass back-flap hinges (Fig. 233) are typically used, and they are recessed into the table as shown.

Set out the work full size as at Fig. 251, and mark point 1, which is to be the position of the joint. Draw 1, 2, at right angles to the table top. Mark point 3 on the vertical line for the centre of the hinge, and mark point 4 approximately as shown.

Set up the work at full size as at Fig. 251, and mark point 1, which will be the location of the joint. Draw line 1 to 2 at a right angle to the tabletop. Mark point 3 on the vertical line for the center of the hinge, and mark point 4 roughly as shown.

Fig. 251.—Setting Out for     Rule Joint Hinge.

Fig. 251.—Setting Out for Rule Joint Hinge.

Fig. 251.—Setting Out for Rule Joint Hinge.

Fig. 252.—The Rule Joint     with Leaf Down.

Fig. 252.—The Rule Joint with Leaf Down.

Fig. 252.—The Rule Joint with Leaf Down.

With compass point on 3 and radius 3 to 4, describe an arc 4 to 5. This gives us the true joint line (1, 4, 5). The distance 0 to 3 is usually determined by the hinge. The knuckle of the back flap hinge is always let into the under side of the wood and the further it is inserted into the wood the more the joint will overlap at A (Fig. 252) which shows the joint when the flap or leaf is down.[Pg 127]

With the compass point set at 3 and a radius of 3 to 4, draw an arc from 4 to 5. This gives us the actual joint line (1, 4, 5). The distance from 0 to 3 is typically determined by the hinge. The knuckle of the back flap hinge is always cut into the underside of the wood, and the further it goes into the wood, the more the joint will overlap at A (Fig. 252) which shows the joint when the flap or leaf is down.[Pg 127]


SHUTTING JOINTS

This chapter deals with the joint made by the upright rail of a door frame which carries the lock, or handle, generally called the "slamming stile." Many and varied are the methods used to make a draught and air-tight joint at the meeting of the slamming stile and the carcase end, and our sketches illustrate some of the simplest and also some of the best and most expensive methods.

This chapter discusses the joint created by the vertical rail of a door frame that holds the lock or handle, commonly referred to as the "slamming stile." There are numerous ways to create a draft and airtight joint where the slamming stile meets the carcass end, and our sketches showcase some of the simplest as well as some of the best and most costly methods.

Fig. 253.—Shutting Stile of     Cupboard Door.

Fig. 253.—Shutting Stile of Cupboard Door.

Fig. 253.—Closing Style of Cupboard Door.

Fig. 254.—Showing Cupboard     End Thicknessed (see B).

Fig. 254.—Showing Cupboard End Thicknessed (see B).

Fig. 254.—Showing Cupboard End Thicknessed (see B).

Fig. 255.—Dust-proof Cupboard Door. Fig. 255.—Dust-resistant Cupboard Door.

Fig. 253 is a part plan of the end of a simple cupboard of which the carcase end is all of one thickness (i.e., not lined up in thickness). A small strip of wood (A) is glued and screwed on the end to form a stop to[Pg 128] the door and to prevent the access of dust to the interior of the cupboard.

Fig. 253 is a plan view of the end of a basic cupboard where the side is uniform in thickness (i.e., not layered). A small piece of wood (A) is glued and screwed onto the end to act as a stop for the door and to keep dust from getting into the cupboard.[Pg 128]

Fig. 254 illustrates a similar method; the stop (C) is seen, as in the previous illustration, but it will be noticed also that the carcase end in this case is lined up (see B) to give a pilaster-like appearance to the end, and the moulding is selected on account of its suitability to hide the joint of the lining piece.

Fig. 254 shows a similar approach; the stop (C) is visible, just like in the previous illustration, but you’ll also see that the carcass end here is aligned (see B) to create a pilaster-like look at the end, and the molding is chosen for its ability to conceal the joint of the lining piece.

Fig. 255 is of a more intricate type, and is often used on jewellers' showcases. The end at the right hand is slightly rebated to receive the frame, and both the rail and the end are grooved with a plough plane. A separate bead is made and glued into the groove of the door frame (D), engaging the groove in the carcase end when the door is closed. The shutting stile and the end are worked with a hook joint (E), and if carefully made they are practically dust-tight.

Fig. 255 is a more complex style and is often used on jewelry displays. The end on the right is slightly recessed to fit the frame, and both the rail and the end are carved with a plough plane. A separate bead is crafted and glued into the groove of the door frame (D), fitting into the groove in the cabinet end when the door is closed. The closing stile and the end are joined using a hook joint (E), and if made carefully, they create a nearly dust-tight seal.

Fig. 256.—Meeting Stiles with rebated Astragal. Fig. 256.—Meeting Stiles with notched Astragal.
Fig. 257.—Door Rebated     for Astragal.

Fig. 257.—Door Rebated for Astragal.

Fig. 257.—Rebated Door for Astragal.

Fig. 258.—Door with     Brass Astragal.

Fig. 258.—Door with Brass Astragal.

Fig. 258.—Door with Brass Strip.

Fig. 256 shows the meeting of two doors which open outwards, a separate piece of timber being made to form a rebated astragal mould (F) and glued to the right-hand door. This method gives a neat and effective finish.

Fig. 256 shows the meeting of two doors that swing open outward, with a separate piece of wood shaped to create a rebated astragal mould (F) glued to the right-hand door. This technique provides a clean and effective finish.

Fig. 257 is similar to the above, with the exception that the rail of the door is rebated (G) to receive the[Pg 129] astragal moulding. This method is preferred on the best class of work, because it shows no unsightly joint at the inside of the door frame.

Fig. 257 is like the previous one, except that the door's rail is recessed (G) to accommodate the[Pg 129] astragal molding. This approach is preferred in high-quality work, as it doesn't reveal an unattractive joint on the inside of the door frame.

Fig. 258 illustrates the type of joint made by using a brass astragal mould (H) as employed on high-class work, frequently seen on French furniture of the Louis periods. In Fig. 259 is shown a piece of brass astragal moulding, which may be procured from any cabinetmaker's ironmonger in suitable lengths. It is fixed in position by slightly rebating the edge of the door and fastening with ordinary countersunk brass screws.

Fig. 258 shows the type of joint created using a brass astragal molding (H), typically used in high-quality work, often found in French furniture from the Louis periods. In Fig. 259, you can see a section of brass astragal molding, which can be purchased from any cabinetmaker's supply store in appropriate lengths. It is secured by making a small notch in the edge of the door and attaching it with standard countersunk brass screws.

Fig. 259.—Brass     Astragal.

Fig. 259.—Brass Astragal.

Fig. 259.—Brass Trim.

Fig. 260.—Curved Cupboard Doors with     Rebated Meeting Joint.

Fig. 260.—Curved Cupboard Doors with Rebated Meeting Joint.

Fig. 260.—Curved Cupboard Doors with Rebated Meeting Joint.

Fig. 261.—Rebated     Meeting Joint.

Fig. 261.—Rebated Meeting Joint.

Fig. 261.—Rebated Meeting Joint.

Fig. 262.—Meeting Joint     with applied Astragal.

Fig. 262.—Meeting Joint with applied Astragal.

Fig. 262.—Meeting Joint with applied Astragal.

Fig. 260 is a rebated joint, broken at the front by a bead moulding. The illustration shows its application to a circular-fronted cupboard, and it will be noticed that the hinged rails are received in a rebate which is worked on the carcase ends. The rebated joint at the centre of the two doors is worked slightly on the bevel, so as to allow for clearance when opening the door.[Pg 130]

Fig. 260 is a recessed joint, interrupted at the front by a bead molding. The illustration shows how it's used on a circular-fronted cupboard, and you’ll see that the hinged rails fit into a recess that’s been shaped into the ends of the carcass. The recessed joint at the center of the two doors is angled slightly on the bevel to provide clearance when opening the door.[Pg 130]

Two of the commonest meeting joints of doors are seen in Figs. 261 and 262. In the former case the stiles are rebated (as already shown in Fig. 260), whilst at Fig. 262 an astragal bead is glued to the right-hand stile. In Fig. 261 a bead is worked on the right-hand stile to mask the joint.

Two of the most common door joints are found in Figs. 261 and 262. In the first case, the stiles are rebated (as already shown in Fig. 260), while at Fig. 262 an astragal bead is glued to the right-hand stile. In Fig. 261, a bead is added to the right-hand stile to cover the joint.

Fig. 263 is the hook joint used on good-class joinery and cabinet work. A pair of special wood planes are required to make the joint in a cheap and efficient manner. The cost of a pair of 58-in. hook joint planes is from 6s. to 8s. They are of similar size and general appearance to the ordinary ovolo moulding plane.

Fig. 263 is the hook joint used in high-quality joinery and cabinetmaking. You need a set of special wood planes to create the joint in an affordable and effective way. A pair of 58-inch hook joint planes costs between 6s and 8s. They look similar in size and design to standard ovolo molding planes.

Fig. 263.—The Hook Joint. Fig. 263.—The Hook Joint.
Fig. 264.—Hook Joint with loose Tongues. Fig. 264.—Hook Joint with loose Tongues.
Fig. 265.—Rebated Joint with Tongue Slip. Fig. 265.—Rebated Joint with Tongue Slip.

Fig. 264 is a special type of hook joint as used on larger work. The joint may be made by using the plough plane, the rebate plane and a suitably-sized bead plane, the loose tongues being inserted as shown and fastened by screws and glue.

Fig. 264 is a special kind of hook joint used for larger projects. You can create the joint with a plough plane, a rebate plane, and a properly sized bead plane, with the loose tongues inserted as shown and secured with screws and glue.

Fig. 265 is a rebated joint with loose tongue-slip and astragal mould, suitable for frames over 114 in. in thickness.[Pg 131] The loose tongue-slip is glued into the right-hand door frame.

Fig. 265 is a rebated joint with a loose tongue-slip and astragal molding, suitable for frames over 114 inches thick.[Pg 131] The loose tongue-slip is glued into the right-hand door frame.

Fig. 266 shows a shutting joint used to prevent permeation of dust to the interior of a drawer. The drawer front is grooved and engages a suitably-formed slip which is screwed to the bearer as indicated in the illustration. Occasionally some difficulty is experienced when fitting the slip to a narrow drawer, but this can always be overcome by putting in the screws from the top of the bearer instead of from underneath.

Fig. 266 shows a closing joint designed to stop dust from getting inside a drawer. The front of the drawer is grooved and fits a specially shaped slip that is attached to the support as shown in the illustration. Sometimes, there can be issues when attaching the slip to a narrow drawer, but this can always be fixed by inserting the screws from the top of the support instead of from underneath.

Fig. 266.—Dust-proof Drawer, showing the Front grooved to engage a Slip which is screwed to the Bearer Rail. Fig. 266.—Dust-proof Drawer, featuring a front grooved to connect with a slip that is screwed to the bearer rail.

Shutting joints which are required to be "light-tight," such as those used in photographic work, are generally formed by slightly grooving the frame and inserting a strip of black velvet. The friction of the high pile of the velvet prevents the filtration of light through the joint.

Sealing joints that need to be "light-tight," like those used in photography, are typically made by slightly grooving the frame and inserting a strip of black velvet. The texture of the thick pile of velvet creates enough friction to stop light from filtering through the joint.

When making air-tight showcases, one of the best and simplest tests is to place a lighted candle in the case and close all the doors; if the candle goes out within three minutes you have accomplished your object.[Pg 132]

When creating airtight displays, one of the best and easiest tests is to put a lit candle inside the case and shut all the doors; if the candle goes out within three minutes, you've achieved your goal.[Pg 132]


THE DOVETAIL JOINT

Nothing definite is known as to the origin of dovetailing, but a quaint and pleasing little story which is well worth repeating runs as follows: A farmer had called in the local "joyner" to do sundry repairs at the homestead. One day, whilst enjoying a humble meal, he sat watching some doves as they hopped about the yard. Struck by the movement of their wedge-shaped tails, it occurred to him to joint his timber by the interlocking method; hence we have dovetails.

Nothing definite is known about the origin of dovetailing, but there's a charming story worth sharing: A farmer hired the local carpenter to do some repairs around his home. One day, while having a simple meal, he watched some doves hopping around the yard. Inspired by the shape of their wedge-shaped tails, he thought of joining his wood using the interlocking method; that's how we got dovetails.

Fig. 267.—A Single     Through Dovetail.

Fig. 267.—A Single Through Dovetail.

Fig. 267.—Single Through Dovetail.

Fig. 268.—Through Dovetails on     Carcase Work (P, Pins; T, Tails).

Fig. 268.—Through Dovetails on Carcase Work (P, Pins; T, Tails).

Fig. 268.—Through Dovetails on Carcase Work (P, Pins; T, Tails).

Through Dovetailing.—One of the simplest forms of the dovetail joint is shown in Fig. 267, where two pieces[Pg 133] of timber are joined by the method known as "through" dovetailing. This method is used in everyday practice for joining the corners of frames, bracket trusses, and a hundred and one other articles.

Through Dovetailing.—One of the simplest types of the dovetail joint is shown in Fig. 267, where two pieces[Pg 133] of wood are connected using the technique called "through" dovetailing. This method is commonly used to join the corners of frames, bracket trusses, and a variety of other items.

Figs. 268 and 269 show the method of through dovetailing as applied to the making of boxes, plinths, and general carcase work; it is used in positions where no objection can be taken to the end grain showing on each side of the finished work. In the case of plinths and furniture cornices the foundation frame is made of yellow pine or other cheap wood, and the more expensive and rare timbers are glued and mitred around in various thicknesses and shapes, thus saving the more costly material and strengthening the construction by the method known as laminating. In many cases all that is necessary is to veneer the face sides, thus covering and hiding any unsightliness.

Figs. 268 and 269 demonstrate the method of dovetail joinery used in making boxes, plinths, and general carcass work. This technique is suitable for areas where showing the end grain on both sides of the finished piece isn't an issue. For plinths and furniture cornices, the base frame is constructed from yellow pine or another economical wood, while more expensive and rare woods are glued and mitered around the edges in various thicknesses and shapes. This approach conserves costly materials and enhances the structure through a process called laminating. Often, all that's needed is to veneer the front faces, effectively covering and concealing any unattractive elements.

Fig. 269.—Dovetails for     Boxes, etc.

Fig. 269.—Dovetails for Boxes, etc.

Fig. 269.—Dovetails for Boxes, etc.

Fig. 270.—Lap-dovetailing     for Drawers.

Fig. 270.—Lap-dovetailing for Drawers.

Fig. 270.—Lap Dovetails for Drawers.

Lap-dovetailing.Fig. 270 is an example of lap-dovetailing, such as is used where a drawer side joins with the drawer front. It is not permissible to allow the end grain of the timber to show at the front of a drawer, and this is why resort is had to the lap-dovetail.[Pg 134] As the most general use of the dovetail is for this and similar purposes, we shall therefore deal fully with the methods of marking out and the making of this class of joint.

Lap-dovetailing.Fig. 270 is an example of lap-dovetailing, which is used where a drawer side connects with the drawer front. It's not acceptable for the end grain of the wood to be visible at the front of a drawer, and that's why we use the lap-dovetail. [Pg 134] Since the dovetail is most commonly used for this and similar applications, we will thoroughly discuss the methods of marking and creating this type of joint.

Angles.—A most important point in the construction of a dovetail is to avoid having the angles of the pins and tails too acute. An inclination of one in eight is considered correct; no hard and fast rule need be obeyed, but the variation should on no account be less than one in six.

Angles.—A key point in building a dovetail is to steer clear of having the angles of the pins and tails too sharp. An angle of one in eight is seen as standard; there’s no strict rule that must be followed, but the angle shouldn’t vary to less than one in six.

Fig. 271.—How to obtain     Correct Angles for Dovetail     Template.

Fig. 271.—How to obtain Correct Angles for Dovetail Template.

Fig. 271.—How to Get Accurate Angles for Dovetail Template.

Fig. 272.—Squaring and     use of Template.

Fig. 272.—Squaring and use of Template.

Fig. 272.—Squaring and use of Template.

Fig. 271 shows a simple method to obtain the correct angle. Take a piece of timber and plane up the face edge (A, B) true and straight; mark out a line (C, D) at right angles to the face edge and space off 8 ins. as shown; now measure a distance of 1 in. (D, E), and join E to point eight. This will give the correct angle for the dovetails, and it may then be transferred to the[Pg 135] joiners' bevel. Many workers who are constantly on dovetail work make a zinc template to the exact angle and keep it specially for the purpose (Fig. 272).

Fig. 271 shows a simple way to get the right angle. Take a piece of wood and plane the face edge (A, B) until it's straight; draw a line (C, D) at a right angle to the face edge and mark 8 inches as shown; then measure 1 inch (D, E) and connect E to point eight. This will give you the correct angle for the dovetails, which can then be transferred to the [Pg 135] joiners' bevel. Many workers who frequently do dovetail work make a zinc template with the exact angle and keep it specifically for this purpose (Fig. 272).

Squaring.—Another important point to remember is that the drawer sides must be true and squared to an exact length and planed up to thickness; otherwise the finished drawer will be in winding and out of truth.

Squaring.—Another important point to remember is that the drawer sides must be straight and squared to a precise length and smoothed to the correct thickness; otherwise, the finished drawer will be warped and misaligned.

To true and square the ends of drawer sides, drawer backs and drawer front, a most useful little machine is the mitre trimmer; failing this, excellent results can be obtained by using the shooting board.

To accurately shape the ends of drawer sides, drawer backs, and drawer fronts, a really handy tool is the miter trimmer; if you don’t have that, you can still achieve great results using a shooting board.

Fig. 273.——Method of Marking with Cutting Gauge. Fig. 273.——How to Mark with a Cutting Gauge.

Gauging.—After squaring up the timber accurate gauging of the ends is another important point. The gauge used should be a cutting gauge, so that the line is incised about 132 in. in depth, thus effectually cutting the cross fibres of the timber.

Gauging.—After properly squaring the timber, accurately measuring the ends is another important step. The tool used should be a cutting gauge, which incises the line about 132 in. deep, effectively cutting through the cross fibers of the wood.

Fig. 273 shows the method of using the cutting gauge. The stock of the gauge must be held well up to the end of the timber. The gauge is a most difficult tool for the novice to use, and his trouble is generally caused by holding it too flat. Tilt the gauge a little so that the[Pg 136] thumbscrew shown in the illustration goes nearer to the floor; the blade will then not bite so keenly, and better results will be obtained. The dotted lines indicate the positions which the dovetails will occupy when marked out.

Fig. 273 shows how to use the cutting gauge. You need to hold the gauge firmly against the end of the wood. It can be a really tricky tool for beginners, and the common issue is holding it too flat. Tilt the gauge a bit so that the[Pg 136] thumbscrew in the picture is closer to the floor; this way, the blade won't cut as sharply, and you'll get better results. The dotted lines indicate where the dovetails will be marked.

The gauge is set a trifle less than the thickness of the drawer sides to allow for the thickness of the steel cutter, and a gauge line is marked on the inside of the front and all round the drawer back. The gauge is now readjusted so as to leave a 14-in. lap on the front, and a line marked on the ends of the front and all round the ends of the sides which will engage the drawer front. A glance at Figs. 270 and 273 will make this clear.

The gauge is set slightly less than the thickness of the drawer sides to account for the thickness of the steel cutter, and a gauge line is marked on the inside of the front and around the entire back of the drawer. The gauge is then readjusted to leave a 14-inch lap on the front, with a line marked on the ends of the front and all around the sides that will attach to the drawer front. A look at Figs. 270 and 273 will clarify this.

Fig. 274.——Removing the Waste Wood. Fig. 274.——Clearing the Waste Wood.

The dovetail pins on drawer part and back are spaced out and marked on the end with the aid of the joiners' bevel, the lines being then squared down to the gauge[Pg 137] line by the method shown at Fig. 272—that is, by using the try-square and marking awl.

The dovetail pins on the drawer part and back are spaced out and marked on the end using the joiner's bevel. The lines are then squared down to the gauge[Pg 137] line using the method shown at Fig. 272—that is, by using a try-square and marking awl.

The drawer front is now put into the bench vice, and the pins are cut as indicated in Fig. 274. The drawer back is treated in a similar manner, but of course in this case it is not "lap" but "through" dovetailing, and the saw kerf goes through the timber and down to the gauge line.

The drawer front is now secured in the bench vice, and the pins are cut as indicated in Fig. 274. The drawer back is handled in a similar way, but in this case, it's "through" dovetailing instead of "lap," and the saw cut goes all the way through the wood down to the gauge line.

Fig. 275.——Cutting away the Half Dovetails. Fig. 275.——Removing the Half Dovetails.

We now come to the point where it is necessary to remove the superfluous material. Fig. 274 shows a method commonly adopted and known as sawing out the waste; the saw is held at an angle and part of the inside portion of the dovetail is cut away as shown. This is a good plan for the amateur, because it shows him at the commencement of his chopping out which will be the pin and which the tail.[Pg 138]

We now reach the point where we need to get rid of the extra material. Fig. 274 demonstrates a method typically used, known as sawing out the waste; the saw is held at an angle and part of the inside section of the dovetail is cut away as illustrated. This is a good approach for beginners, as it allows them to identify at the start of their cutting which will be the pin and which will be the tail.[Pg 138]

Fig. 276.—Showing the Vertical and Horizontal Chisel Operations in Lap-dovetailing.  A: The Preliminary Roughing-out. B: Vertical Chiselling; note that the first stab should be just outside the Gauge Line. C: Marking the Horizontal Cut. Fig. 276.—Illustrating the Vertical and Horizontal Chisel Operations in Lap Dovetailing. A: The Initial Roughing Out. B: Vertical Chiseling; note that the first cut should be just outside the Gauge Line. C: Marking the Horizontal Cut.

Fig. 276 (A) shows another method that answers well for soft woods such as pine, American whitewood and[Pg 139] satin walnut. The drawer front is laid flat on the bench after it has been sawn, and with a mallet and sharp chisel the corner of the dovetail is knocked off as shown. This takes the bulk of the material away and the dovetail is then pared out square in the usual way. The illustration (Fig. 276) also shows how the chisel is held for vertical paring (B) and for horizontal paring (C).

Fig. 276 (A) presents another method that works well for soft woods like pine, American whitewood, and[Pg 139] satin walnut. The drawer front is placed flat on the bench after it’s been cut, and using a mallet and sharp chisel, the corner of the dovetail is knocked off as shown. This removes most of the material, and then the dovetail is squared off in the usual way. The illustration (Fig. 276) also demonstrates how to hold the chisel for vertical paring (B) and for horizontal paring (C).

Fig. 277.—Roughing-out     by Boring.

Fig. 277.—Roughing-out by Boring.

Fig. 277.—Roughing out by Boring.

Fig. 278.—Marking     Pins on Drawer Side.

Fig. 278.—Marking Pins on Drawer Side.

Fig. 278.—Marking Pins on Drawer Side.

A third method is shown at Fig. 277. With hard,[Pg 140] curly timbers, such as tobacco mahogany and satinwood, it is a laborious process to carefully chop away the timber in small pieces, and to overcome this difficulty we occasionally see the workman take a twist-bit and bore a series of holes as shown. A great portion of the timber may then be split away by inserting the chisel end-way into the grain, after which it is pared to a finish.

A third method is shown at Fig. 277. With hard, [Pg 140] curly woods, like tobacco mahogany and satinwood, it’s a tough job to carefully chop the wood into small pieces. To make this easier, we sometimes see the worker use a twist bit to drill a series of holes as shown. A large part of the wood can then be split away by inserting the chisel along the grain, and after that, it’s shaped to finish.

As dovetailing is chiefly used for drawer making, it will be of interest to give several illustrations of variations of the joint and its uses.

As dovetailing is mainly used for making drawers, it will be interesting to provide several examples of the variations of the joint and its applications.

Fig. 278 indicates the method of marking the position[Pg 141] of the holes in the drawer side. When the paring out of the dovetails is completed the drawer front is turned over on to the side as shown, and the position of the recesses which will engage the pin portions are marked with the marking awl as illustrated.

Fig. 278 shows how to mark the spot[Pg 141] for the holes on the side of the drawer. Once the dovetails are finished, the front of the drawer is flipped onto the side as shown, and the spots for the recesses that will fit the pin sections are marked with the marking awl as shown.

Fig. 279.—Marking by means of     Saw Blade.

Fig. 279.—Marking by means of Saw Blade.

Fig. 279.—Marking using a Saw Blade.

Fig. 280.—Gauge Lines,     Scores and Saw Cuts.

Fig. 280.—Gauge Lines, Scores and Saw Cuts.

Fig. 280.—Gauge Lines, Scores and Saw Cuts.

Fig. 281.—Sawing the     Drawer Side.

Fig. 281.—Sawing the Drawer Side.

Fig. 281.—Cutting the Drawer Side.

Fig. 282.——Position of Chisel     for Cutting Channel.

Fig. 282.——Position of Chisel for Cutting Channel.

Fig. 282.——Position of Chisel for Cutting Channel.

The completed drawer back is marked on the sides in an exactly similar manner.

The finished drawer back is marked on the sides in the same way.

Another method of marking through dovetails is shown at Fig 279. The side is held in position on the end, and the dovetail saw is inserted and drawn out of the saw kerf, thus leaving the exact mark on the drawer-back.

Another way to mark through dovetails is shown at Fig 279. The side is held in place on the end, and the dovetail saw is inserted and pulled out of the saw kerf, leaving the precise mark on the drawer-back.

Other workers prefer a pounce-bag instead of a saw. A pounce-bag consists of a piece of fairly open woven muslin filled with a mixture of French chalk and finely-powdered whiting; the muslin is tied up with a piece of thin twine like the mouth of a flour sack. All that is necessary is to place the timber in position and bang the bag on the top of the saw-cuts, when sufficient powder will pass through the bag and down the saw kerf to mark the exact positions of the lines.

Other workers prefer using a pounce bag instead of a saw. A pounce bag is made from a piece of loosely woven muslin filled with a mix of French chalk and finely powdered whiting; the muslin is tied off with a thin piece of twine, similar to the way a flour sack is closed. All you need to do is position the timber and bang the bag on top of the saw cuts, allowing enough powder to pass through the bag and fill the saw kerf to mark the exact positions of the lines.

Sawing the Dovetails.—After marking out the pins on the drawer sides, we proceed with the next operation, that is, sawing the dovetails ready for chopping out the waste material. The drawer side is taken and firmly secured in the bench screw and sawn as at Fig. 281; it is most important that the saw kerf is kept inside the line which has been scratched by the marking awl. See Fig. 280, where the dotted line represents the gauge line and the outside lines indicate the scores of the marking awl. Failure to observe this condition will result in faulty dovetailing, and it will also prove the necessity for using a finely-toothed and thin-bladed dovetail saw.

Sawing the Dovetails.—After marking the pins on the drawer sides, we move on to the next step, which is sawing the dovetails to prepare for removing the waste material. The drawer side is placed securely in the bench screw and sawn as shown at Fig. 281; it's very important that the saw cut stays inside the line made by the marking awl. Refer to Fig. 280, where the dotted line shows the gauge line and the outer lines represent the marks from the marking awl. Not following this guideline will lead to poor dovetailing and emphasize the need for using a thin-bladed dovetail saw with fine teeth.

To cut out the waste wood (or core), the usual procedure is to saw away the half-dovetails as at Fig. 275. With care, this can be accomplished with the dovetail saw, thus avoiding unnecessary labour and the use of the paring chisel.[Pg 142]

To remove the excess wood (or core), the typical method is to saw off the half-dovetails as shown at Fig. 275. With precision, this can be done using a dovetail saw, which helps avoid extra work and the need for a paring chisel.[Pg 142]

After sawing, the drawer side is placed flat upon the bench, one end in contact with the bench to prevent the drawer side from slipping away; a chisel (preferably bevelled edged) of suitable width is now taken and a small channel is cut as at A, Fig. 282. The method of cutting this channel is shown in the same illustration. The chisel-cut is started about 18 in. from the gauge line; the cut is made right up to the gauge line, which (when gauging) was made 132 in. deep so as to cut the cross fibres of the timber. A small piece of waste wood will therefore come away as at A.

After sawing, the side of the drawer is placed flat on the workbench, with one end touching the bench to stop it from slipping. A chisel (preferably with a beveled edge) of the right width is then used to cut a small channel like in A, Fig. 282. The technique for cutting this channel is shown in the same illustration. The chisel cut starts about 18 inches from the gauge line; the cut goes all the way to the gauge line, which (when gauging) was set 132 inches deep to slice through the timber’s cross fibers. As a result, a small piece of waste wood will be removed as shown in A.

The object of cutting this small channel is so that, when the chisel is held vertically on the gauge line and struck with the mallet, the chisel will have no tendency to force its way backward and overshoot the gauge line. The waste or core is now removed by holding the chisel approximately vertical and applying sufficient power to drive it half-way through the timber. The drawer side is now turned over, the operation repeated, and the core pushed out. Care must be exercised whilst cutting away the core to ensure the chisel being held nearly perpendicular; if too much lead (or bevel) be given, a faulty and undercut dovetail will be the result. Undercut dovetails prevent a proper grip of the glue; they give a weak joint, and often cause the face of the drawer side to be splintered whilst driving up the joint. If it be necessary to ease one or two shavings from off the drawer side whilst fitting the completed drawer in the carcase, the joint will show a greater gap as each succeeding shaving is removed.

The purpose of cutting this small channel is so that, when the chisel is held straight up on the gauge line and struck with the mallet, the chisel won’t be pushed backward or overshoot the gauge line. The waste or core is then removed by holding the chisel nearly vertical and applying enough force to drive it halfway through the wood. The drawer side is then flipped over, the process is repeated, and the core is pushed out. Care must be taken while cutting away the core to ensure the chisel is held almost vertical; if too much angle is given, it will result in a faulty and undercut dovetail. Undercut dovetails weaken the grip of the glue, leading to a weak joint and often causing the face of the drawer side to splinter while driving the joint together. If it’s necessary to take off a few shavings from the drawer side while fitting the completed drawer in the carcass, the joint will show a larger gap with each shaving removed.

In common work, especially in soft timbers, many workers allow the pins of a drawer back to run through the sides about 116 in. and hammer down the pins of the dovetail. This is called "bishoping the dovetails," and is unnecessary if the work be properly made and fitted.[Pg 143]

In regular woodworking, especially with soft woods, many workers let the pins of a drawer back stick out about 116 inches and then hammer down the dovetail pins. This is known as "bishoping the dovetails," and it's not needed if the work is done and fitted correctly.[Pg 143]

An alternative method of dovetailing is that of cutting the dovetails first, as shown at Fig. 283. Four or six drawer sides are placed in the vice and the dovetails are sawn at one operation. A little lead (or bevel) from front to back is given whilst sawing, and if this method be used care must be taken to see that the parts of the drawer sides which will be on the inside of the completed drawer are towards the worker, or the lead will be given to the dovetails in the wrong direction.

An alternative way to create dovetails is to cut them first, as shown at Fig. 283. Four or six drawer sides are secured in the vice, and the dovetails are sawed in one go. A slight angle (or bevel) from front to back is applied while sawing, and if this method is used, be careful to make sure that the parts of the drawer sides that will be on the inside of the finished drawer are facing the worker, or else the angle will be applied to the dovetails in the wrong direction.

Fig. 283.—Cutting several Dovetails at once. Fig. 283.—Cutting multiple dovetails at the same time.

After sawing the dovetails in this manner the sides are placed in their respective positions on the drawer fronts or backs, and marked with a pounce-bag or by using the saw-blade method. The pins are then cut in the usual way, care being taken that the saw kerf be on the outside of the marks, otherwise the pins will finish too slack to engage with the tails.

After cutting the dovetails this way, the sides are positioned on the drawer fronts or backs and marked using a pounce bag or the saw-blade method. The pins are then cut as usual, making sure that the saw kerf is on the outside of the marks; otherwise, the pins will end up too loose to fit with the tails.

Frame Dovetails.Fig. 284 is a sketch of a constructional frame such as is used for building up a cornice or plinth. At the joint marked A an edge barefaced dovetail is shown. From the separated sketches of the joint (B) it will be seen that the dovetail[Pg 144] can be put together either from the top or the bottom of the framing as all its edges are parallel; glue is relied upon to hold it in position. The centre stretcher rail at Fig. 284 is similar, except that in this case it is a complete dovetail in place of a barefaced one.

Frame Dovetails.Fig. 284 is a sketch of a structural frame used for constructing a cornice or plinth. At the joint marked A, an edge barefaced dovetail is illustrated. From the separate sketches of the joint (B), you can see that the dovetail[Pg 144] can be assembled from either the top or the bottom of the framing since all its edges are parallel; glue is used to keep it in place. The center stretcher rail at Fig. 284 is similar, except that in this case, it features a complete dovetail instead of a barefaced one.

Fig. 284.—Constructional Frame (as for Plinth or Cornice) showing application of the Dovetail Joint. Fig. 284.—Construction Frame (for Plinth or Cornice) demonstrating the use of the Dovetail Joint.

Some workers, when making either of the above joints, prefer to give a slight bevel to the dovetail, so that it drives tightly into the housing when put together.

Some workers, when creating either of the above joints, like to add a slight bevel to the dovetail so that it fits snugly into the housing when assembled.

A variation of this type of dovetail is frequently used to joint internal uprights to the horizontal shelves of writing desks, cabinets, and bookcases, etc. The dovetailed portion is parallel for about three-fourths of its width; the remaining part is tapered towards the front edge and notched away at the face so as to conceal the method of construction. An illustration of the top portion of a division 14 ins. wide is shown at Fig. 284, C. The other portion is of course dovetailed to fit it.[Pg 145]

A variation of this type of dovetail is commonly used to join internal uprights to the horizontal shelves of writing desks, cabinets, bookcases, etc. The dovetailed section is parallel for about three-quarters of its width; the remaining part narrows towards the front edge and is notched at the face to hide the construction method. An illustration of the top portion of a division 14 inches wide is shown at Fig. 284, C. The other portion is, of course, dovetailed to fit it.[Pg 145]

Blind Lap-Dovetailing.—At Fig. 285 is shown a type of blind lap-dovetailing. This makes a good, sound joint, but it has the disadvantage of showing a small portion of the timber of the front rail end-way of the grain. Joints of this kind are used for cornices, boxes, etc., and also for painted furniture.

Blind Lap-Dovetailing.—At Fig. 285 is shown a type of blind lap-dovetailing. This creates a solid, reliable joint, but it has the downside of exposing a small section of the wood along the grain at the end of the front rail. Joints like this are used for cornices, boxes, and also for painted furniture.

Fig. 285.—Blind Lap-Dovetailing.

Fig. 285.—Blind Lap-Dovetailing.

Fig. 285.—Blind Lap Dovetailing.

Fig. 286.—Housed and     Mitred Dovetail.

Fig. 286.—Housed and Mitred Dovetail.

Housed and Mitred Dovetail.

Housed and Mitred Dovetail.Fig. 286 is another form of dovetail—commonly called a housed and mitred or rebated and mitred dovetail. In this instance we see that a small portion is mitred at top and bottom edges, and when used in plinth or cornice work, or for making tea-caddies, etc., the edges are (when completing the work) covered either with the moulding, which is planted on the cornice or plinth, or with the top and bottom of the box or tea-caddy.

Housed and Mitred Dovetail.Fig. 286 is another type of dovetail—often referred to as a housed and mitred or rebated and mitred dovetail. In this case, we see that a small section is angled at the top and bottom edges, and when used in plinth or cornice work, or for making tea-caddies, etc., the edges are (when finishing the work) covered either with the molding, which is attached to the cornice or plinth, or with the top and bottom of the box or tea-caddy.

The method of making a housed and mitred dovetail joint is seen in Fig. 286. The ends to be joined are[Pg 146] planed up true and square and then rebated as shown. The dotted lines indicate the portion which has been worked away. The dovetails are now sawn and pared out in the usual way and the part denoted by the arrow is afterwards cut away with a chisel and finally finished to a smooth surface with a rebate plane; the method of working is shown at Fig. 287, where the dovetail pins are seen with the waste portions cut away.

The technique for creating a housed and mitered dovetail joint is illustrated in Fig. 286. The ends that need to be joined are[Pg 146] planed to be true and square, then rebated as shown. The dotted lines indicate the area that has been removed. The dovetails are then sawed and pared out in the traditional manner, and the section marked by the arrow is later cut away with a chisel and finally smoothed out with a rebate plane; the working process is shown at Fig. 287, where the dovetail pins are displayed with the waste parts removed.

Fig. 287.—Working a Housed and Mitred Dovetail Joint. Fig. 287.—Creating a Housed and Mitred Dovetail Joint.

Fig. 287 also shows the method of cutting away the mitred part. A temporary piece of wood is planed to a true mitre and placed underneath the dovetailed piece to form a template. Both pieces of the timber are now secured to the bench with a handscrew or cramp; the template A will form a guide for the chisel and rebate plane and allow a sharp edge or arris to be worked on the mitre.

Fig. 287 also shows how to cut away the angled part. A temporary piece of wood is shaped to a precise angle and placed underneath the dovetailed piece to create a template. Both pieces of timber are now secured to the bench with a handscrew or clamp; the template A will serve as a guide for the chisel and rebate plane, allowing a sharp edge or corner to be shaped on the angle.

A Secret Mitred Dovetail joint is illustrated at Fig. 288; it is used in all the better class of cabinet[Pg 147] and box work. Fig. 288 shows the pieces separated; note the mitre at the top and bottom edge.

A Secret Mitred Dovetail joint is shown at Fig. 288; it is used in all higher-quality cabinet[Pg 147] and box work. Fig. 288 displays the pieces apart; notice the mitre at the top and bottom edges.

Fig. 288.—Secret Mitre Dovetailing. Fig. 288.—Hidden Mitre Dovetailing.
Fig. 289.—Dovetailed Keys for Wide Surfaces. Fig. 289.—Dovetailed Keys for Broad Surfaces.

Dovetail Keying.Fig. 289 is a method used to prevent wide boards such as signboards, wide and shaped pediments, etc., from casting or warping. It is[Pg 148] called dovetail keying. Beyond calling attention to the fact that the angles at the edges of the keys, where they are bevelled, should be at or about 75 degrees, nothing further need be said, as the drawing is self-explanatory. Angle dovetail keying is shown at Figs. 290 and 291.

Dovetail Keying.Fig. 289 is a technique used to stop wide boards, like signboards and wide or shaped pediments, from bending or warping. It’s called dovetail keying. Besides noting that the angles at the edges of the keys, where they are beveled, should be around 75 degrees, nothing more needs to be mentioned, as the drawing explains it well on its own. Angle dovetail keying is illustrated at Figs. 290 and 291.

Fig. 290.—Dovetail Key.

Fig. 290.—Dovetail Key.

Fig. 290.—Dovetail Key.

Fig. 291.—Dovetail Keying on     the Angle.

Fig. 291.—Dovetail Keying on the Angle.

Fig. 291.—Dovetail Keying on the Angle.

Fig. 292.—Bow-fronted Door Dovetailed Edgeways. Fig. 292.—Curved Door Dovetailed Edgeways.

Other Varieties.—At Fig. 292 we have an everyday method of jointing circular-fronted cabinet door frames. Great care must be taken in setting out and making, or a twisted frame will result.[Pg 149]

Other Varieties.—At Fig. 292 we have a common way of joining circular-fronted cabinet door frames. It's important to be very careful when measuring and constructing, or you’ll end up with a twisted frame.[Pg 149]

Then at Fig. 293 are shown two familiar examples of dovetailing the bearer to the carcase end of a dressing table or washstand.

Then at Fig. 293 are shown two familiar examples of combining the support with the main part of a dressing table or washstand.

Fig. 294.—Lap-dovetailing the top of a wardrobe to the carcase end. Other examples, such as the top of a bookcase to the sides, will suggest themselves.

Fig. 294.—Joining the top of a wardrobe to the side of the frame. Other examples, like attaching the top of a bookcase to its sides, will come to mind.

Fig. 295.—Side view of a jewel drawer with a moulded drawer front as used on dressing tables, etc. This shows the necessity of bevelled dovetailing in order that the drawer front may be kept as thin and light as possible.

Fig. 295.—Side view of a jewelry drawer with a molded drawer front as used on dressing tables, etc. This shows the importance of beveled dovetailing so that the drawer front can be as thin and light as possible.

Fig. 293.—Carcase Work, showing Bearer Rails Dovetailed. Fig. 293.—Carcass Work, showing Bearer Rails Dovetailed.

Fig. 296.—Bevelled dovetailing when pins are at right angles to the end cut.

Fig. 296.—Beveled dovetailing when the pins are at right angles to the end cut.

Fig. 297.—Bevelled dovetailing when the centre line of the pins is parallel to the edges of the work, used for making "hoppers," food troughs, knife boxes, etc. One corner of the box shows the joint separated.[Pg 150]

Fig. 297.—Beveled dovetailing when the center line of the pins is parallel to the edges of the work, used for making "hoppers," food troughs, knife boxes, etc. One corner of the box shows the joint separated.[Pg 150]

Fig. 294.—Lap-Dovetailing.

Fig. 294.—Lap-Dovetailing.

Fig. 294.—Lap Dovetailing.

Fig. 295.—Jewel     Drawer Side.

Fig. 295.—Jewel Drawer Side.

Fig. 295.—Jewelry Drawer Side.

Fig. 296.—Bevelled     Dovetailing.

Fig. 296.—Bevelled Dovetailing.

Beveled Dovetailing

Fig. 297.—Bevelled and Dovetailed Box, showing the Jointing of One Corner Separated. Fig. 297.—Beveled and Dovetailed Box, illustrating the jointing of one corner separated.

Fig. 298.—An example of oblique dovetailing, as used on "hoppers" when one piece is vertical and the other piece is inclined.

Fig. 298.—An example of oblique dovetailing, as used on "hoppers" when one piece is vertical and the other piece is angled.

Fig. 299.—Method of dovetailing small boxes. The box is dovetailed in one width and the top and bottom glued on; the sides and ends are then cut along the dotted line, thus forming the lid. It will be noticed that a specially wide dovetail pin must be left so as to form part of the lid and part of the lower portion.

Fig. 299.—How to dovetail small boxes. The box is dovetailed in one width, and the top and bottom are glued on; then, the sides and ends are cut along the dotted line, creating the lid. Note that a particularly wide dovetail pin must be left to serve as part of both the lid and the lower section.

Fig. 298.—Oblique Dovetailing. Fig. 298.—Angled Dovetailing.
Fig. 299.—Dovetailing for Small Box. Fig. 299.—Dovetailing for Small Box.

Setting out the Joint.—For constructing a dovetail joint at the corner of a frame, as Fig. 300, it is necessary at the outset to trim up the ends of the timber square and true. This may be accomplished by neatly sawing to the line and paring the end of the wood with[Pg 152] a sharp chisel, or by bringing the wood to a finish with a finely-set plane, such as an iron-faced smoothing plane. The ends of the wood must be perfectly square when tested from either the face side or from the marked edge.

Setting out the Joint.—To create a dovetail joint at the corner of a frame, as Fig. 300, you need to start by trimming the ends of the timber to be square and straight. You can do this by carefully sawing along the line and using a sharp chisel to smooth the end of the wood, or by finishing the wood with a finely-tuned plane, like an iron-faced smoothing plane. The ends of the wood must be perfectly square when checked from either the face side or the marked edge.

Fig. 300.—Corner Dovetail.

Fig. 300.—Corner Dovetail.

Fig. 300.—Corner Dovetail Joint.

Fig. 301.—Squaring.

Fig. 301.—Squaring.

Fig. 301.—Squaring.

Take a cutting gauge and set it to equal the thickness of the timber, and, holding it as already shown at Fig. 273, strike the gauge lines on the wood as illustrated at Fig. 302, G. Proceed to mark out the dovetail pins, as at Fig. 303; in this illustration G again shows the gauge line. The inclination of the lines across the end of the wood should not be too great, or the joint will be a weak one, and the edges of the dovetails will be liable to crumble away when the work is knocked together.[Pg 153]

Take a cutting gauge and set it to match the thickness of the wood. Hold it as shown at Fig. 273 and draw the gauge lines on the wood as shown at Fig. 302, G. Next, outline the dovetail pins as shown at Fig. 303; in this illustration, G again indicates the gauge line. The angle of the lines at the end of the wood shouldn’t be too steep, or the joint will be weak, and the edges of the dovetails might crumble when the pieces are assembled.[Pg 153]

Dovetailing Template.—Many workers who are constantly engaged upon dovetail joints make a small wooden template, as shown at Fig. 304. This template is generally of hardwood, such as beech or walnut. The method of obtaining the correct angles of such a template has already been given on p. 134. Notice that the lines bb (Fig. 303) of the dovetail pins do not bevel; they are parallel to the sides of the wood and at right angles to the end of the wood as shown.

Dovetailing Template.—Many workers who frequently work on dovetail joints create a small wooden template, as shown at Fig. 304. This template is usually made of hardwood, like beech or walnut. The method for achieving the correct angles for such a template has already been explained on p. 134. Note that the lines bb (Fig. 303) of the dovetail pins do not bevel; they are parallel to the sides of the wood and at right angles to the end of the wood as illustrated.

Fig. 302.—Gauging.

Fig. 302.—Gauging.

Fig. 302.—Measuring.

Fig. 303.—Marking the Pins.

Fig. 303.—Marking the Pins.

Fig. 303.—Pin Marking.

Chisel Work.—After marking out, as shown at Fig. 303, place the wood on the bench and proceed to chop away the centre portion in the following manner. Hold the chisel on the bevel and cut out a small piece to form a channel at the gauge line. Now hold the chisel in a vertical position, and with a mallet strike it so as to make a cut about 18 in. deep. Then hold the chisel on the bevel again and cut away more waste wood; proceed alternately, first forcing the chisel down vertically, and then paring the wood away with[Pg 154] the chisel held obliquely, until you have cut half-way through the thickness of the wood.

Chisel Work.—After marking out, as shown at Fig. 303, place the wood on the bench and start removing the center part like this. Hold the chisel at an angle and cut out a small piece to create a channel at the gauge line. Now hold the chisel vertically and strike it with a mallet to make a cut about 18 in. deep. Then hold the chisel at an angle again and remove more excess wood; continue alternating between pushing the chisel down vertically and slicing the wood away with the chisel held at an angle, until you've cut halfway through the thickness of the wood.

Fig. 304.—Hand-made Template for Marking Dovetails. Fig. 304.—Handmade Template for Marking Dovetails.
Fig. 305.—Testing.

Fig. 305.—Testing.

Fig. 305.—Testing.

Fig. 306.—The Marked     Piece.

Fig. 306.—The Marked Piece.

Fig. 306.—The Highlighted Piece.

Turn the wood over and repeat the various operations until the core, or waste piece, is removed. Pare away any little irregularities which may be left in the corners with an 18-in. chisel, thus leaving all smooth and neat. Lay the piece of wood which is to have the dovetail marked on it flat upon the bench, and take the piece with the dovetail pins cut upon it and place in the position shown at Fig. 305.[Pg 155]

Flip the wood over and repeat the different steps until you remove the core or waste piece. Use a 1/8-inch chisel to trim away any small irregularities that might be left in the corners, ensuring everything is smooth and neat. Place the piece of wood where the dovetail will be marked flat on the bench, and take the piece with the dovetail pins cut into it and position it as shown at Fig. 305.[Pg 155]

Saw Work.—Take a marking awl, or a knitting needle which has had its end sharpened, and mark the lines of the dovetail in a similar manner to that shown at Fig. 307. Remove the piece A, Fig. 305, and the lower piece shown at Fig. 305 will clearly show the marks aa as they appear in Fig. 306. Place the piece (Fig. 306) in the vice, and saw outside the lines AA, as shown in Fig. 308.

Saw Work.—Take a marking awl, or a knitting needle with a sharpened end, and mark the lines for the dovetail just like the example at Fig. 307. Remove the piece A, Fig. 305, and the lower piece shown at Fig. 305 will clearly display the marks aa as seen in Fig. 306. Place the piece (Fig. 306) in the vice, and saw outside the lines AA, as demonstrated in Fig. 308.

Fig. 307.—Marking Dovetails with Marking Awl. Fig. 307.—Marking Dovetails with a Marking Awl.

After sawing down the lines AA, Fig. 308, place the wood in the vice and, guiding the saw blade with the index finger of the left hand, cut away the small piece at the side (see Fig. 275). Repeat the operation as may be necessary, and the completed joint will be similar to that shown at Fig. 300. If the sawing is not neatly done it may be found necessary to pare the shoulder with a sharp chisel.[Pg 156]

After cutting along the lines AA, Fig. 308, put the wood in the vise and, using the index finger of your left hand to guide the saw blade, cut off the small piece on the side (see Fig. 275). Do this again as needed, and the finished joint will look like the one shown at Fig. 300. If the cuts aren't clean, you might need to trim the shoulder with a sharp chisel.[Pg 156]

Drawers.—When dovetailing drawers or boxes it is necessary to square up the ends of all the stock and gauge them, as shown at Fig. 273. This illustration shows how to gauge the lines on a drawer side; the dovetailed joint in this case, however, does not run through the drawer front and leave the work unsightly, as the joint at Fig. 300 would do. The method used is shown at Fig. 309, and it is commonly known as lap-dovetailing. Most workers cut the dovetail pins on the drawer fronts and the drawer backs first, after which they mark the drawer sides with the marking awl. The dovetailing of the drawer back is shown at Fig. 310. This is the type known as "through dovetailing," the method being similar in regard to tool operations as the single joint shown at Fig. 300.

Drawers.—When you're making dovetail joints for drawers or boxes, it's important to square up the ends of all the pieces and mark them, as illustrated at Fig. 273. This image shows how to mark the lines on a drawer side; however, in this case, the dovetailed joint doesn't extend through the drawer front, which would make it look messy, unlike the joint at Fig. 300. The technique used is demonstrated at Fig. 309, and it's commonly called lap-dovetailing. Most craftsmen first cut the dovetail pins on the drawer fronts and backs, then use a marking awl to mark the sides of the drawer. The dovetailing of the drawer back is illustrated at Fig. 310. This type is known as "through dovetailing," and the method is similar in terms of tool operations to the single joint shown at Fig. 300.

Fig. 308.—Sawing the Dovetails. Fig. 308.—Cutting the Dovetails.
Fig. 309.—Lap-dovetailing Drawer Front to Drawer Side. Fig. 309.—Lap Dovetailing Drawer Front to Drawer Side.
Fig. 310.—Through     Dovetailing.

Fig. 310.—Through Dovetailing.

Fig. 310.—Dovetailing.

Fig. 311.—Chipping Waste     of Lap Dovetail.

Fig. 311.—Chipping Waste of Lap Dovetail.

Fig. 311.—Chipping Waste of Lap Dovetail.

When the pins on the drawer front have been sawn, the waste material is cut away, as at Fig. 311.[Pg 157] First stab down with the vertical chisel, which must make the cut about 132 in. in front of the gauge line (see illustration). This commencing of the cut slightly in front of the gauge line is a very important feature. The chisel may be likened to a wedge, and if the chisel[Pg 158] edge be placed exactly upon the gauge line and force be applied to the handle, it will force the timber away equally on each side of the gauge line, and the finished depth of the hole will therefore be too deep for the thickness of the drawer side; in other words, it will press itself over the gauge line on both sides.

When the pins on the front of the drawer have been cut, the excess material is trimmed away, as shown at Fig. 311.[Pg 157] First, press down with the vertical chisel, which should cut about 132 in front of the gauge line (see illustration). Starting the cut slightly in front of the gauge line is very important. The chisel acts like a wedge, and if the chisel edge is placed exactly on the gauge line and pressure is applied to the handle, it will push the wood away evenly on both sides of the gauge line, making the final depth of the hole too deep for the thickness of the drawer side; in other words, it will push past the gauge line on both sides.

By taking the first vertical cut on the waste side of the gauge line, and then removing a small piece with the chisel held obliquely, as at Fig. 311, the wood is removed and less resistance is offered to the chisel when the next vertical cut is made. This overshooting the gauge line is a common fault with the beginner, who is puzzled at the result because he is certain he had his chisel exactly on the gauge line when he commenced his vertical cut. It is especially noticeable in soft-grained woods.

By making the first vertical cut on the waste side of the gauge line and then taking out a small piece with the chisel at an angle, as shown at Fig. 311, the wood is cleared away, and there’s less resistance when making the next vertical cut with the chisel. Going past the gauge line is a common mistake for beginners, who often can’t understand why this happens since they were sure their chisel was right on the gauge line when they started their vertical cut. This issue is especially apparent in soft-grained woods.

To cut away the waste of a lap-dovetail (Fig. 311), the vertical and oblique cuts are repeated until the final trimming up is required, and now is the time to finish both the vertical and the horizontal cuts exactly on the gauge lines.

To remove the excess from a lap-dovetail (Fig. 311), the vertical and angled cuts are repeated until the final trimming is needed, and now is the moment to finish both the vertical and horizontal cuts precisely on the gauge lines.

Some workers prefer to cut the drawer sides first, and if this method is preferred (and it has its advantages for cheap work) several drawer sides are cut at once by placing four or six behind one another in the vice and sawing them all at one operation.

Some workers prefer to cut the drawer sides first, and if this method is preferred (and it has its advantages for inexpensive work), multiple drawer sides are cut at once by stacking four or six behind each other in the vise and sawing them all in one go.

The drawer front is placed in the vice, and the drawer side held upon it, whilst the saw blade is placed in the saw kerf and drawn smartly forward. This will give the required marks at the exact position desired. It must be remembered, however, to saw just inside these dovetail-pin lines, otherwise the finished joint will be too slack, owing to the removal of the sawdust, which is practically equal to the thickness of the saw blade.[Pg 159]

The drawer front is secured in the vice, and the drawer side is held against it while the saw blade is positioned in the saw cut and pulled sharply forward. This will create the necessary marks at the exact spot wanted. However, it’s important to remember to saw just inside these dovetail-pin lines; otherwise, the finished joint will be too loose due to the sawdust removal, which is roughly the thickness of the saw blade.[Pg 159]

Machine-made Dovetails.—As a general rule machine-made drawer and box dovetails show both the pins and the tails of exactly the same size. The reason is obvious after an inspection of Fig. 314, which shows the position in which the pieces are held during the machining operations. In spite of a certain amount of prejudice they are satisfactory and thoroughly reliable and have their place in modern shop and office fittings.

Machine-made Dovetails.—Generally, machine-made drawer and box dovetails have both the pins and the tails of the same size. This is clear after looking at Fig. 314, which illustrates how the pieces are held during the machining process. Despite some bias against them, they are effective and completely trustworthy, making them valuable in today’s shop and office designs.

Fig. 312.—Machine-made Drawer Front and Side, Apart. Fig. 312.—Drawer Front and Side Made by Machine, Separate.
Fig. 313.—The Parts Together.

Fig. 313.—The Parts Together.

Fig. 313.—All Parts Combined.

Fig. 314.—Position when     Machined.

Fig. 314.—Position when Machined.

Fig. 314.—Position when Machined.


DOVETAIL GROOVING

The dovetail housing joint should first be carefully[Pg 160] marked out with a marking knife, so as to cut across the fibres of the wood. For obtaining the bevel on the edge of the wood a joiner's bevel may be used, and the angle should not be too acute. (See previous chapter.) Take a chisel and pare away a small channel as at A, Fig. 315, to form a small shoulder to guide the saw.

The dovetail housing joint should first be carefully[Pg 160] marked out with a marking knife to cut across the wood fibers. To create the bevel on the edge of the wood, you can use a joiner's bevel, and the angle shouldn't be too sharp. (See previous chapter.) Take a chisel and shave away a small channel as at A, Fig. 315, to create a small shoulder that will guide the saw.

Fig. 315.—Paring away Channel for Dovetail Grooving. Fig. 315.—Cutting a Channel for Dovetail Grooving.

With a fine tenon or dovetail saw, cut the saw kerf as at Fig. 316. If any difficulty is experienced in cutting the kerf true and square, you may resort to the method shown at C, Fig. 315; a small temporary piece of timber has been screwed on the top of the work to form a guide for the saw.

With a good tenon or dovetail saw, cut the saw kerf like at Fig. 316. If you have trouble cutting the kerf straight and square, you can use the method shown at C, Fig. 315; a small temporary piece of wood has been screwed on top of the work to act as a guide for the saw.

Fig. 316.—Cutting the Saw Kerf.

Fig. 316.—Cutting the Saw Kerf.

Fig. 316.—Making the Saw Cut.

Fig. 317.—Old Woman's     Tooth Plane.

Fig. 317.—Old Woman's Tooth Plane.

Fig. 317.—Elderly Woman's Tooth Plane.

Fig. 318.—Guide Block for Bevelling. Fig. 318.—Beveling Guide Block.

Fig. 315, B, shows the small channel formed by the chisel prior to the sawing operation. The sawing of[Pg 161] the bevelled side is worked in a similar manner; but occasionally we find amateurs who adopt the method shown at Fig. 318. A block of wood (H) is first made by boring a 114-in. hole through its entire length, and afterwards making a saw cut at the desired bevel. The object of this block, which is kept specially for the purpose, is to form a guide for those who have not full control of the dovetail saw; the back of the saw clears the hole, and the required bevel is obtained. When a saw cut has been made at each side of the groove, the[Pg 162] surplus timber is pared away in the following manner: Cut away portion E, Fig. 319; then cut away portion F, and lastly cut away the apex portion marked G. Continue by this method of paring until the approximate depth is reached. To ensure a correct depth throughout the entire groove, the router plane (or, as it is often called, "the old woman's tooth plane," Fig. 317) is used.

Fig. 315, B, shows the small channel created by the chisel before the sawing operation. The sawing of[Pg 161] the beveled side is done in a similar way; however, sometimes we see beginners using the method shown at Fig. 318. First, a block of wood (H) is made by boring a 114-inch hole through its entire length, and then making a saw cut at the desired bevel. The purpose of this block, which is kept specifically for this task, is to act as a guide for those who don't have complete control over the dovetail saw; the back of the saw clears the hole, achieving the required bevel. Once a saw cut has been made on each side of the groove, the[Pg 162] extra wood is removed like this: cut away portion E, Fig. 319; then cut away portion F, and finally cut away the top portion marked G. Keep paring this way until you reach the desired depth. To ensure consistent depth throughout the whole groove, the router plane (or, as it’s often called, "the old woman's tooth plane," Fig. 317) is used.

Fig. 319.—Showing Method of Paring. Fig. 319.—Showing Paring Method.
Fig. 320.—Channelling the Alternate Piece. Fig. 320.—Channeling the Alternate Piece.

With regard to cutting the alternate piece, it is necessary to first plane the end of the shelf true and square. With a cutting gauge strike the line K, Fig. 320; the required bevel on the edge (J) is then set out, and with the chisel a small channel is again formed. With the tenon or dovetail saw cut down the line K to the required depth, and carefully pare away the wood with a sharp chisel to the correct shape.[Pg 163]

To cut the alternate piece, you first need to plane the end of the shelf so it's flat and square. Use a marking gauge to draw the line K, Fig. 320; then mark the required bevel on the edge (J) and create a small channel with a chisel. Use the tenon or dovetail saw to cut down the line K to the right depth, and carefully trim the wood with a sharp chisel to get the correct shape.[Pg 163]


THE MITRED JOINT

Although mitreing is used in everyday woodwork, it comes last in our list of regular joints simply because it has been partly dealt with in almost every previous chapter. For example, we have mitre halving in Fig. 34, a mitre bridle joint in Fig. 74, a tongued and grooved mitre in Fig. 116, mitred mortise and tenon joints in Figs. 148 and 159, a dowelled mitre frame in Fig. 202, and a mitred dovetail in Fig. 286.

Although miter joints are commonly used in woodworking, they are listed last among our regular joints because we've already covered them in almost every previous chapter. For instance, we discussed miter halving in Fig. 34, a miter bridle joint in Fig. 74, a tongued and grooved miter in Fig. 116, mitered mortise and tenon joints in Figs. 148 and 159, a doweled miter frame in Fig. 202, and a mitered dovetail in Fig. 286.

Fig. 321.—     Mitred Skirting.

Fig. 321.— Mitred Skirting.

Mitred Baseboard.

Fig. 322.—     Curved Mitre.

Fig. 322.— Curved Mitre.

Fig. 322.— Curved Miter.

Fig. 323.—     Halving the Angle.

Fig. 323.— Halving the Angle.

Fig. 323.— Bisecting the Angle.

Mitreing.—The term mitreing is generally used to denote the type of joint used at the corner of a picture frame; or where two pieces of wood are bevelled away so as to fit each other, as the skirting or plinth mould at Fig. 321. In these cases the timber is cut so that the joint is at 45 degrees to the face, and the two[Pg 164] pieces, when placed together, form an angle of 90 degrees (a right angle).

Mitreing.—The term mitreing usually refers to the type of joint used at the corner of a picture frame or where two pieces of wood are beveled to fit together, like the skirting or plinth mold at Fig. 321. In these situations, the timber is cut so that the joint is at a 45-degree angle to the face, and when the two[Pg 164] pieces are put together, they form a 90-degree angle (a right angle).

The term mitreing, however, is not confined to the fitting of timber around a right angle; it may be justly applied to the fitting of a moulding around an angle irrespective of the number of its degrees.

The term mitreing, however, is not limited to fitting wood around a right angle; it can also be correctly applied to fitting a molding around an angle, no matter how many degrees it has.

One often hears such terms as "a half mitre," used to denote the fitting of a moulding around an octagonal column or pedestal, and probably it would be more correct to describe the joint as a mitre cut at 2212 degrees. Mitreing consists of halving the angle and making each piece to fit the line of bisection. Should the angle be bounded by straight lines, as at Fig. 321, then the mitred joint will be a straight line, but should the angle be bounded by a curved and a straight line, as at Fig. 322, A, or by two curved lines, then the mitred joint will have to be a curved line if the mouldings are to be of the same section.

One often hears terms like "a half mitre" used to describe fitting a molding around an octagonal column or pedestal, and it might be more accurate to call the joint a mitre cut at 2212 degrees. Mitreing involves halving the angle and making each piece fit the line of intersection. If the angle is defined by straight lines, like at Fig. 321, then the mitred joint will be a straight line. However, if the angle is bordered by a curved line and a straight line, as at Fig. 322, A, or by two curved lines, then the mitred joint will need to be a curved line to keep the moldings consistent in section.

Fig. 324.—Sawing Block for Mitreing. Fig. 324.—Miter Sawing Block.

Finding the Angle.—For straight mitres, the mitre joint line is found by bisecting the angle, as shown in the various examples, and the following instructions are given to enable the reader to follow the diagram (Fig. 323). Take a pair of compasses, or dividers,[Pg 165] and with any convenient opening strike out the arc A, B. Put the point of the compasses on A, and mark another arc C; then, without altering the distance between the points of the compass, put the point on B, and mark the arc D. Draw the line E from the corner, so that it cuts through the intersection made by the arcs C and D. The angle A B is now halved by the line E, and this method may be applied to any angle.

Finding the Angle.—For straight mitres, you find the mitre joint line by bisecting the angle, as shown in the various examples, and the following instructions are given to help you follow the diagram (Fig. 323). Take a pair of compasses or dividers,[Pg 165] and with any convenient opening, draw the arc A, B. Place the point of the compasses on A and mark another arc C; then, without changing the distance between the points of the compass, place the point on B and mark the arc D. Draw the line E from the corner so that it intersects the arcs C and D. The angle A B is now bisected by the line E, and this method can be applied to any angle.

Sawing Block.—For sawing mouldings, etc., to their approximate shape, a home-made sawing block is generally used, as shown at Fig. 324. Two pieces of wood are glued one on the top of the other, the required angle is transferred thereto, and the saw kerf made. In the sketch the saw kerfs are shown at 45 degrees, right and left, and other angles and kerfs may be made where desired.

Sawing Block.—To cut moldings and similar items to their rough shape, a DIY sawing block is commonly used, as illustrated at Fig. 324. Two pieces of wood are glued together, one on top of the other, the necessary angle is marked, and the saw cuts are made. In the illustration, the saw cuts are shown at 45 degrees on both sides, and other angles and cuts can be made as needed.

Planing.—After sawing the piece to approximately the correct angle, it is necessary on high-class work to plane the cut end so as to give a perfect finish and enable a glued joint to be made. This may be accomplished by using the plane on the shooting board, as shown at Fig. 325, and, if the worker is constantly using mitres of various angles, it is an easy matter to make new angle blocks and fix them on to the board. Other workers prefer the screw mitre trap shown at Fig. 326. This apparatus takes wide plinth or cornice moulds, and the angle may be altered by fitting temporary packing pieces under the work so as to tilt the moulding to the desired angle. The method of using the plane is indicated in the illustration.

Planing.—After sawing the piece to roughly the right angle, it's important for high-quality work to plane the cut end to achieve a perfect finish and allow for a glued joint to be made. This can be done by using the plane on the shooting board, as shown at Fig. 325, and if the worker frequently uses mitres of different angles, it's easy to create new angle blocks and attach them to the board. Other workers prefer the screw mitre trap shown at Fig. 326. This tool accommodates wide plinth or cornice moulds, and the angle can be adjusted by placing temporary packing pieces under the work to tilt the moulding to the desired angle. The method of using the plane is shown in the illustration.

Another method in everyday use by those workers who are constantly mitreing wide pieces of stock at 45 degrees is the "donkey's ear" shooting board illustrated at Fig. 327. The plane is laid on its side on the[Pg 166] surface of the board marked A, and used in a similar manner to that shown at Fig. 325.

Another method frequently used by workers who often cut wide pieces of stock at 45 degrees is the "donkey's ear" shooting board shown at Fig. 327. The plane is positioned on its side on the[Pg 166] surface of the board marked A and is used in a way similar to that demonstrated at Fig. 325.

Fig. 325.—Use of Plane and Shooting Board for Mitreing. Fig. 325.—Using a Plane and Shooting Board for Mitering.
Fig. 326.—The Screw Mitre Trap. Fig. 326.—The Screw Miter Trap.

A simple method and one that should always be remembered because it is handy when working without a shooting board is shown at Fig. 328. Set the marking or cutting gauge to the thickness of the wood to be[Pg 167] mitred at 45 degrees; then gauge this distance on the wood, as shown at B; draw from the line to the edge, as shown, and saw and plane to a finish. The diagonals of a square give 45 degrees, and this is the method used to mark out the work. The end of the wood must, of course, be square with its edges before marking out in this manner.

A simple method that you should always keep in mind, especially when you're not using a shooting board, is shown at Fig. 328. Set the marking or cutting gauge to the thickness of the wood that needs to be mitred at 45 degrees; then mark this distance on the wood, as shown at B; draw a line from that mark to the edge, as demonstrated, and saw and plane it to finish. The diagonals of a square give you a 45-degree angle, and this is the technique used to mark out the work. The end of the wood must, of course, be square with its edges before marking it out this way.

Fig. 327.—"Donkey's Ear" Shooting Board. Fig. 327.—"Donkey's Ear" Shooting Board.
Fig. 328.—Gauging     for Mitres.

Fig. 328.—Gauging for Mitres.

Fig. 328.—Measuring for Miter Cuts.

Fig. 329.—Narrow     Inner Moulding.

Fig. 329.—Narrow Inner Moulding.

Fig. 329.—Narrow Inner Molding.

Fig. 330.—Wide     Mitred Moulding.

Fig. 330.—Wide Mitred Moulding.

Fig. 330.—Wide Mitred Molding.

Fig. 329 shows a bevelled framing into which has been mitred a narrow moulding M so as to show a correct margin around the panel.[Pg 168]

Fig. 329 displays a beveled frame into which a narrow molding M has been mitered, creating an accurate margin around the panel.[Pg 168]

Fig. 331.—Door with Curved Mitres. Fig. 331.—Door with Curved Corners.
Fig. 332.—Method of Setting out for a Curved Mitre. Fig. 332.—How to Set Up for a Curved Mitre.

Fig. 330 shows a similar framing, but with a wide moulding M mitred around it. To obtain a correct intersection of this moulding, the angles A and B are bisected. The bisection of the angles meets before the width of the moulding is cleared, therefore the angle C will again have to be bisected, and the finished joint will appear as shown. One of the simplest of mouldings with a large flat face has been chosen to illustrate this. The moulding could be all in one width, as shown, or it could be built into the framing in separate pieces, the wide flat and the piece carrying the mould.

Fig. 330 presents a similar layout, but with a wide molding M cut at an angle around it. To get a precise intersection of this molding, the angles A and B are divided in half. The division of the angles meets before the width of the molding is finished, so the angle C will need to be halved again, and the completed joint will look like this. One of the simplest moldings with a large flat face has been chosen for this example. The molding could be a single width, as shown, or it could be assembled into the framing in separate sections, with the wide flat and the piece holding the molding.

Curved Mitres.—We now come to what are probably the most difficult of all mitres, viz., curved mitres, and the writer well remembers in his apprenticeship days his first experience of attempting to fit the mouldings around the door shown at Fig. 331 by using straight mitres at A. This, of course, is impossible if the mouldings are of the same section and it is desired to make all the members correctly intersect. If straight mitres are used the section of the curved moulding will have to be of a different shape from the section of the straight moulding, and in these days of machine-made mouldings this method is seldom resorted to. It is better, cheaper, and easier to make curved mitres when the necessary machinery is at hand.

Curved Mitres.—Now we come to what are probably the most challenging types of mitres, curved mitres. I clearly remember my first attempt at fitting the moldings around the door shown at Fig. 331 during my apprenticeship, using straight mitres at A. This, of course, is impossible if the moldings are of the same profile and you want all the parts to intersect correctly. If straight mitres are used, the profile of the curved molding will have to be a different shape from the profile of the straight molding, and these days, with machine-made moldings, this method is rarely used. It's better, cheaper, and easier to create curved mitres when the necessary machinery is available.

To Set out a Curved Mitre (see Fig. 332).—Draw a section of the moulding full size, A, as shown at the left hand of the illustration, and project lines round the framing, as shown V, W, X, Y and Z. Where the lines V, W, X, Y and Z intersect at the corner D, it clearly shows that a straight mitre will not cut all the points of intersection. A curved line will cut all the intersections, and a template made of cardboard, sheet zinc, or veneer, should be made to this shape. At the[Pg 170] left-hand side the geometrical setting out is shown for obtaining the curve without having to resort to drawing it freehand.

To Set out a Curved Mitre (see Fig. 332).—Draw a full-size section of the molding, A, as shown on the left side of the illustration, and project lines around the framing, as indicated by V, W, X, Y, and Z. Where the lines V, W, X, Y, and Z meet at corner D, it clearly shows that a straight mitre won't intersect all the points. A curved line will intersect all the points, and a template made from cardboard, sheet zinc, or veneer should be created in this shape. At the[Pg 170] left side, the geometric setup is shown for obtaining the curve without needing to draw it freehand.

Take half the width of the moulding, as shown by dotted line A, and where it cuts the approximation of the curved mitre place the point of the compasses and strike out a circle as shown; with the same radius place the compass point on B—that is, the inside point of the mitre, and cut the circle on the right and left with the small arcs shown at aa. With the same radius put the compass point at the junction of the circle and mitre line, C V, and cut the circle at right and left, viz., ee.

Take half the width of the molding, as indicated by dotted line A, and where it meets the approximation of the curved miter, place the point of the compass and draw a circle as shown. Using the same radius, position the compass point on B—the inside point of the miter—and intersect the circle on the right and left with the small arcs shown at aa. With the same radius, place the compass point at the junction of the circle and miter line, C V, and cut the circle on the right and left, that is, ee.

Fig. 333.—Template for Mitreing. Fig. 333.—Mitreing Template.

Now rule a line through aa, and another line through ee, and where these lines cut each other it will give the[Pg 171] correct radius of the curved mitre. The advantage of knowing the correct radius of a curved mitre is of great benefit to the skilled machinist, as it enables him to set up his machine so as to give a definite result.

Now draw a line through aa, and another line through ee. Where these lines intersect, it will indicate the[Pg 171] correct radius of the curved mitre. Knowing the correct radius of a curved mitre is very helpful for a skilled machinist because it allows them to set up their machine for a precise outcome.

Mitreing a Moulded Door Frame.Fig. 333 illustrates the method of mitreing the moulded portion of a door frame where the joint is dowelled, not tenoned. A small wooden template is made out of beech or other hardwood, having its ends cut at 45 degrees. This template is placed on the rail, as shown, and held in position by placing both the rail and the template in the vice. The face of the template forms a guide for a wide chisel, and enables the worker to gradually pare away the moulding to the correct angle.

Mitreing a Moulded Door Frame.Fig. 333 shows the technique for mitreing the moulded part of a door frame where the joint is dowelled, not tenoned. A small wooden template is created from beech or another hardwood, with its ends cut at 45 degrees. This template is placed on the rail, as shown, and secured in place by putting both the rail and the template in the vice. The face of the template acts as a guide for a wide chisel, allowing the worker to gradually trim the moulding to the right angle.

Fig. 334.—Using Panel Saw in Mitre Box. Fig. 334.—Using a Panel Saw in a Miter Box.

For sawing the mitres on large mouldings such as are used on the lid of a gramophone or wireless cabinet, a mitre sawing box and a panel saw may be used as indicated at Fig. 334.[Pg 172]

For cutting miters on large moldings, like those used for the lid of a gramophone or radio cabinet, a miter box and a panel saw can be used as shown at Fig. 334.[Pg 172]


JOINTS FOR CURVED WORK

Fig. 335 shows a circular frame made up in two thicknesses, the segments being screwed to each other and the joints crossed in two layers. This is a very strong method, and it is used for making circular frames and curbs up to 15 ft. in diameter. The segments can be either long or short, the only important condition being that they must be marked out and sawn to the correct radius. Fig. 337 shows a board marked out in segments for this class of work. The longer the boards the better will they cut up, as it gives more opportunities of cutting one piece out of the other as at A A.

Fig. 335 shows a circular frame made of two different thicknesses, with the segments screwed together and the joints layered in two levels. This is a very sturdy method, and it’s used for creating circular frames and curbs up to 15 ft. in diameter. The segments can be long or short, with the only key requirement being that they must be measured and cut to the correct radius. Fig. 337 shows a board marked into segments for this type of work. The longer the boards, the better they will cut, as it provides more chances to cut one piece out of another as shown at A A.

Fig. 335.—Circular Frame     in Two Thicknesses.

Fig. 335.—Circular Frame in Two Thicknesses.

Fig. 335.—Circular Frame in Two Thicknesses.

Fig. 336.—Circular Rim     in Halved Segments.

Fig. 336.—Circular Rim in Halved Segments.

Fig. 336.—Circular Rim in Halved Segments.

Fig. 338 shows how to begin to put the work together.[Pg 173] To continue this, fit other segments in position and screw them to D and E respectively. The completed work is illustrated at Fig. 335.

Fig. 338 shows how to start assembling the work.[Pg 173] To proceed, place the other pieces in position and attach them to D and E accordingly. The finished work is shown in Fig. 335.

Fig. 337.—Board Marked for     Circular Jointing.

Fig. 337.—Board Marked for Circular Jointing.

Fig. 337.—Board Marked for Circular Jointing.

Fig. 338.—Putting Circular     Work Together.

Fig. 338.—Putting Circular Work Together.

Fig. 338.—Assembling Circular Work.

Fig. 339.

Fig. 339.

Fig. 339.

Fig. 340.

Fig. 340.

Fig. 340.

Method of Building up Semicircular Head of Door Frame.

Method of Constructing a Semicircular Head for a Door Frame.

Fig. 336 shows a circular rim, or curb, made of segments which are halved together. This method is suitable for heavy work, where the timbers are of considerable size. The halvings are cut on the ends of[Pg 174] the segments to any convenient shape or bevel, each one being marked so as to fit its fellow.

Fig. 336 shows a circular rim or curb made from segments that are halved together. This technique is ideal for heavy work where the timbers are quite large. The halvings are cut at the ends of[Pg 174] the segments into any convenient shape or bevel, and each one is marked to ensure a good fit with its counterpart.

Fig. 341.—Part of Laminated Table Frame. Fig. 341.—Section of Laminated Table Frame.
Fig. 342.—Half of Laminated Core Box. Fig. 342.—Half of Laminated Core Box.

When extra length is required, semicircular or circular work is built up out of four or five thicknesses of[Pg 175] wood, and the method is called laminating. The method of building up the semicircular head of a door frame by this method is shown at Figs. 339 and 340.

When extra length is needed, semicircular or circular work is created by layering four or five thicknesses of [Pg 175] wood, and this process is known as laminating. The technique for constructing the semicircular head of a door frame using this method is illustrated at Figs. 339 and 340.

The shaped framing for kidney-shaped writing tables and similar classes of work is built up by laminating pieces of 34-in. or 1-in. wood, after which the face side is veneered so as to hide the glued joints. Fig. 341 shows a sketch of one quarter of an elliptical table frame levelled up and ready for applying the veneer.

The shaped framework for kidney-shaped writing tables and similar types of work is created by layering pieces of 3⁄4-inch or 1-inch wood, after which the front side is covered with veneer to conceal the glued joints. Fig. 341 shows a sketch of one quarter of an elliptical table frame that has been leveled and is ready for veneering.

Lamination.—If we apply to the dictionary for the word "lamination," we find that lamellar structure is the arrangements in thin plates or layers one over the other, usually having the end joints alternating, and it is a condition which allows of cleavage in one direction only. This method is used for nearly all descriptions of free or irregular curves, such as sweeps, bends, ogee shapes, and segments of circles. The timber is marked out in suitable lengths, rough-sawn and then planed true on the face, glued together, and when set the sides are cleaned up to the required shape. It is one of the strongest methods of construction, and necessarily costly. Pulleys, pulley rims, and a hundred and one other jobs are built by this method.

Lamination. — If we look up the word "lamination" in the dictionary, we find that lamellar structure refers to the arrangement of thin plates or layers stacked on top of each other, usually with the end joints alternating. This configuration allows for cleavage in one direction only. This method is used for almost all types of free or irregular curves, like sweeps, bends, ogee shapes, and segments of circles. The wood is measured out in appropriate lengths, rough-sawn, and then planed flat on one side, glued together, and once the glue sets, the sides are shaped to the required form. It's one of the strongest methods of construction, though it tends to be costly. Pulleys, pulley rims, and countless other projects are built using this technique.

Fig. 342 shows one half of a core box built by this method, ready to be worked to the required shape.[Pg 176]

Fig. 342 shows one side of a core box made using this method, ready to be shaped as needed.[Pg 176]


MISCELLANEOUS JOINTS

Weather boards.—For outdoor buildings, such as garages, garden sheds, toolhouses, etc., "weatherboarding" is often preferred to ordinary matchboarding, chiefly because of the facility with which it throws off the rain. The boarding can be bought ready prepared. Three methods of jointing are shown in the sections at Fig. 343. The method indicated at A shows one of the most satisfactory types, its boards being planed and moulded as shown. The other two examples are more common. The boarding at B is rebated, whilst[Pg 177] at C each board overhangs its lower neighbour. The boards for C and D are always cut tapered as indicated.

Weather boards.—For outdoor structures like garages, garden sheds, toolhouses, and so on, "weatherboarding" is often favored over regular matchboarding, mainly because it sheds rain more effectively. The boards can be purchased pre-made. Three jointing methods are illustrated in the sections at Fig. 343. The method shown at A is one of the most effective types, featuring planed and molded boards as displayed. The other two methods are more commonly used. The boarding at B has a rebate, while[Pg 177] at C, each board extends over the one below it. The boards for C and D are always cut to a taper as shown.

Fig. 343.—     Weather Boards.

Fig. 343.— Weather Boards.

Fig. 343.— Weatherboards.

Fig. 344.—Ladder Rungs.

Fig. 344.—Ladder Rungs.

Fig. 344.—Ladder Steps.

The end grain is usually protected by nailing on a strip of timber, chamfered on both edges.

The end grain is typically protected by nailing on a strip of wood that has beveled edges on both sides.

Ladders.Fig. 344 illustrates the method of fastening the rung (or stave) of a ladder to the side. At A the common method is shown, the stave being simply driven into the hole and wedged. At B a much better but more expensive method of construction is given. The stave here is socketed and the pin turned to a smaller diameter. In both cases the rung, or stave, is painted before being driven into the side and wedged.

Ladders.Fig. 344 shows how to fasten the rung (or stave) of a ladder to the side. At A, you can see the common method, where the stave is just driven into the hole and wedged. At B, there’s a much better but pricier construction method. Here, the stave is socketed, and the pin is turned to a smaller diameter. In both cases, the rung, or stave, is painted before being driven into the side and wedged.

Fig. 345.—Cornice Pole Joint.

Fig. 345.—Cornice Pole Joint.

Fig. 345.—Cornice Pole Joint.

Fig. 346.—Veneer Keying.

Fig. 346.—Veneer Keying.

Fig. 346.—Veneer Attachment.

Ladder sides are made in two distinct ways. One method is known as "a plank side," the side being cut from a plank as shown at the section D; the other method is called "a pole side," and is constructed by cutting a straight larch pole in half and using half of the pole for each side of the ladder, as at section C.

Ladder sides are made in two different ways. One method is called "a plank side," where the side is cut from a plank as shown in section D; the other method is known as "a pole side," which is made by cutting a straight larch pole in half and using each half for one side of the ladder, as shown in section C.

Hinged Cornice Poles.Fig. 345 shows a hinged joint for cornice poles and should be of interest to those who are frequently removing from house to house. The joint will adapt itself to fit any bay window (even a square bay) and it is formed by turning and cutting the two pieces shown. To fix a cornice pole to a bay window one of these joints is required for each angle of the bay, the pole being cut into suitable lengths and fixed to the hinged joints by the use of the dowel screw[Pg 178] and a little hot glue. It is perhaps needless to remark that the diameter of the joint should be of the same diameter as the cornice pole, to enable the rings to easily slide over the surface.

Hinged Cornice Poles.Fig. 345 shows a hinged joint for cornice poles and should appeal to those who frequently move from house to house. The joint can adjust to fit any bay window (even a square bay) and is created by bending and cutting the two pieces shown. To attach a cornice pole to a bay window, one of these joints is needed for each angle of the bay, with the pole cut into appropriate lengths and secured to the hinged joints using a dowel screw[Pg 178] and a bit of hot glue. It might be obvious, but the joint's diameter should match that of the cornice pole so that the rings can easily slide along it.

For fastening a turned ornament (or "finial") to the end of a cornice pole a double pointed screw (known in the trade as a "dowel screw") is used, one half of which is screwed into each part of the pieces to be joined.

For attaching a turned ornament (or "finial") to the end of a cornice pole, a double pointed screw (commonly called a "dowel screw") is used, with one half screwed into each part of the pieces being joined.

Veneer Keying.Fig. 346 illustrates the method of strengthening the corners of boxes which are made of 14-in. or 38-in. timber, by securing the corners with veneer keys. The box is mitred and glued in the usual manner, and after allowing sufficient time for the glue to set, saw kerfs are made as shown at a a. A piece of thin saw-cut veneer is afterwards glued into the saw kerfs, and when dry the face is levelled off flush. This method is often used previous to veneering the face side of the box with rare veneers, and it is also useful for repair work. Note that the saw cuts are made at an angle. Small picture frames are sometimes keyed instead of nailed.

Veneer Keying.Fig. 346 shows how to strengthen the corners of boxes made from 14-inch or 38-inch wood by securing the corners with veneer keys. The box is mitered and glued as usual, and after the glue has had enough time to set, saw cuts are made as illustrated at a a. A piece of thin, saw-cut veneer is then glued into the saw cuts, and once dry, the surface is leveled off. This method is often used before veneering the face side of the box with expensive veneers, and it's also handy for repair work. Keep in mind that the saw cuts are made at an angle. Small picture frames are sometimes keyed instead of nailed.

Muntin and Skirting Joint.—In the case of panelled rooms it is usually necessary to scribe the muntins (or uprights) to the skirting. The method is shown in Fig. 347. The bead moulding of the skirting is only partly removed, as indicated, leaving a solid portion to which the muntin is skew-nailed.

Muntin and Skirting Joint.—In panelled rooms, it’s usually necessary to fit the muntins (or uprights) to the skirting. The method is shown in Fig. 347. The bead moulding of the skirting is only partially removed, as indicated, leaving a solid portion to which the muntin is skew-nailed.

Cot Joint.—At Fig. 348 is shown an interesting joint used largely in the making of Indian cots. The illustrations indicate how the cross bar and end bar are mortised into the leg. A turned hardwood peg fits into a suitably provided hole and locks the tenons, which are dry jointed (not glued) in position. The head of this[Pg 179] peg forms an ornament (A) at the top of the leg and should fit tightly in position. At B are seen the end and cross bars in their relative positions when apart from the leg. C shows the end bar and cross bar when the cot is fixed, but in this illustration the leg is purposely left out of the drawing for a clear representation. D shows the joints of the leg portion when the part of the leg above the line at A is sawn off. The hardwood peg is shown at E.

Cot Joint.—At Fig. 348 is an interesting joint commonly used in making Indian cots. The illustrations show how the cross bar and end bar fit into the leg using mortise joints. A turned hardwood peg goes into a pre-drilled hole to secure the tenons, which are held in place without glue. The head of this[Pg 179] peg acts as an ornament (A) at the top of the leg and should fit snugly. At B, you can see the end and cross bars in their positions when separated from the leg. C illustrates the end bar and cross bar when the cot is assembled, with the leg intentionally omitted for clarity. D shows the joints of the leg section when the part above the line at A is cut off. The hardwood peg is shown at E.

Fig. 347.—Fixing Muntin     to Skirting.

Fig. 347.—Fixing Muntin to Skirting.

Fig. 347.—Attaching Muntin to Skirting.

Fig. 348.—Joint for     Home-made Cot.

Fig. 348.—Joint for Home-made Cot.

Fig. 348.—Joint for DIY Cot.

Sideboard Pillars, etc. (Fig. 349).—For economy, sideboard pillars are sometimes built up as indicated, the "shaft," the "base," and the "swell" being made up of three distinct pieces. Turned pins are left on the shaft and the base, and these are secured at the joint by the use of a double-pointed screw called a dowel screw. This does away with the necessity of reducing the squares at the top of the wood and thus getting the turning out of a large piece of wood.[Pg 180]

Sideboard Pillars, etc. (Fig. 349).—To save money, sideboard pillars are sometimes constructed as described, with the "shaft," the "base," and the "swell" made of three separate pieces. Turned pins are left on the shaft and the base, and these are fastened at the joint using a double-pointed screw known as a dowel screw. This eliminates the need to reduce the squares at the top of the wood and allows for turning from a larger piece of wood.[Pg 180]

Notched Joints.Fig. 350 is a "notched joint," where two joists, or scantlings, cross each other, the object of the joint being to prevent the joists moving from their position without materially weakening them. For an end notch, see Fig. 352.

Notched Joints.Fig. 350 is a "notched joint," where two joists or beams cross each other. The purpose of this joint is to keep the joists in place without significantly weakening them. For an end notch, see Fig. 352.

Fig. 349.— Method of Building up Turnings. Fig. 349.— How to Create Turnings.
Fig. 350.—Notched Joint.

Fig. 350.—Notched Joint.

Fig. 350.—Notched Joint.

Fig. 351.—The Saddle Joint.

Fig. 351.—The Saddle Joint.

Fig. 351.—The Saddle Joint.

The "saddle joint" (Fig. 351) is used for connecting[Pg 181] upright posts to heads or sills of framing, and undoubtedly takes its name from its similarity to the way in which the saddle fits the horse. It does not weaken the framing as does a mortise and tenon joint, and shrinkage has little effect upon the joint. The "cogged joint," used for connecting purlins to rafter and joists to girders, is illustrated in Fig. 353.

The "saddle joint" (Fig. 351) is used to connect[Pg 181] upright posts to the heads or sills of framing, and its name comes from the way a saddle fits on a horse. It doesn’t weaken the framing like a mortise and tenon joint does, and shrinkage has little impact on the joint. The "cogged joint," which connects purlins to rafters and joists to girders, is shown in Fig. 353.

Fig. 352.—End Notch.

Fig. 352.—End Notch.

Fig. 352.—End Notch.

Fig. 353.—Cogged Joint.

Fig. 353.—Cogged Joint.

Fig. 353.—Notched Joint.

Fig. 354.—Birdsmouth     Joint.

Fig. 354.—Birdsmouth Joint.

Fig. 354.—Birdsmouth Joint.

Fig. 355.—Another type     of Birdsmouth Joint.

Fig. 355.—Another type of Birdsmouth Joint.

Fig. 355.—Another type of Birdsmouth Joint.

Birdsmouth Joints.Fig. 354 is a "birdsmouth joint," a simple joint which can be readily made by the handsaw, used when a spar fits on the wall plate. A nail is shown securing it in position.[Pg 182]

Birdsmouth Joints.Fig. 354 is a "birdsmouth joint," a straightforward joint that can be easily cut using a handsaw, used when a spar rests on the wall plate. A nail is shown holding it in place.[Pg 182]

Fig. 355 shows the birdsmouth joint where the spar runs over the outside of the wall plate, thus allowing a fixing for an ornamental finish.

Fig. 355 shows the birdsmouth joint where the spar runs over the outside of the wall plate, allowing for a fixing for an ornamental finish.

Fig. 356.—Rafter and Tie Beam Joint. Fig. 356.—Rafter and Tie Beam Joint.

Rafter Joint.Fig. 356 shows an everyday joint, as used at the juncture of the principal rafter and the tie-beam in roof truss work. A sketch of piece A is shown separated, and it should be noted that the depth of the cut portion B should not be more than one-fourth of the total width of the tie-beam.

Rafter Joint.Fig. 356 shows a common joint, used where the main rafter meets the tie-beam in roof truss construction. A sketch of piece A is shown separately, and it’s important to note that the depth of the cut portion B should not exceed one-fourth of the total width of the tie-beam.

Fig. 357.—Method of Pelleting the Corner of a Mitred Picture Frame. Fig. 357.—How to Pellet the Corner of a Mitred Picture Frame.

Pelleting.Fig. 357 indicates the method of pelleting and screwing the corner of a picture frame. The mitre[Pg 183] joint is first screwed and a pellet of the same timber is made to fill the hole which has been bored to receive the screw head. The pellet is glued in position and levelled off.

Pelleting.Fig. 357 describes how to pellet and screw the corner of a picture frame. First, the mitre joint is screwed together, and then a pellet made from the same wood is inserted into the hole drilled for the screw head. The pellet is glued in place and leveled off.

Fig. 358.—Patera Covers to Hide Screws. Fig. 358.—Patera Covers to Conceal Screws.

Patera Covers.—In cases where the style of ornament permits of it, patera covers are used instead of pelleting. Fig. 358 shows the jointing of shaped spandrails, etc., to carcase ends of light portable cabinet work, etc. A hole is bored about 38 in. deep into the end, and a screw is used to hold the shaping in position. After fixing the rail a small turned button, called a turned patera, is inserted in the hole, thus giving an ornamental finish, as shown in the front view. The turned patera is driven fairly tightly into the hole, but not glued. When it is required to take the article apart a chisel is carefully inserted under the edge of the patera to remove it, and the screw can then be taken out. This method is often used for the construction of light hanging bookcases and similar objects. For a bookcase having an end 8 ins. wide three of these turned buttons and three screws would be used to secure the[Pg 184] shelf to the end. Pateras in different styles may be purchased from any dealer in woodworking sundries.

Patera Covers.—When the ornamentation allows for it, patera covers are used instead of pelleting. Fig. 358 illustrates how shaped spandrails, etc., are joined to the ends of lightweight portable cabinet work. A hole is drilled about 38 in. deep into the end, and a screw is used to keep the shaping in place. After attaching the rail, a small turned button, called a turned patera, is inserted into the hole to provide an ornamental finish, as shown in the front view. The turned patera is fitted snugly into the hole but is not glued. When it's necessary to disassemble the item, a chisel is carefully slipped under the edge of the patera for removal, allowing the screw to be taken out afterward. This technique is frequently used in constructing light hanging bookcases and similar items. For a bookcase with an 8-inch wide end, three of these turned buttons and three screws would be needed to secure the[Pg 184] shelf to the end. Pateras in various styles can be purchased from any woodworking supply dealer.

Buttoning.—The tops of tables, sideboards, etc., should not be fixed with screws in the ordinary way. At the front, screws can be driven upwards through the top rail, but at the sides and back, buttons should be employed, as in Fig. 359, so that the top is free to shrink. It is otherwise liable to split if immovably fixed. The tops of kitchen tables are usually fixed in this way, to allow for shrinkage.

Buttoning.—The tops of tables, sideboards, etc., shouldn't be attached with screws in the usual way. At the front, screws can be driven upwards through the top rail, but at the sides and back, buttons should be used, as in Fig. 359, so that the top can shrink. Otherwise, it may split if it's fixed too tightly. Kitchen table tops are typically secured this way to allow for shrinkage.

Fig. 359.—Method of Buttoning a Table Top. Fig. 359.—How to Button a Table Top.

Frames for Oil Paintings.—The method of making joints for frames on which the canvas is stretched for oil paintings is shown at Fig. 360. They are generally mitred at the corners and fitted with loose wedges. The four parts of the frame can be held temporarily by a piece of thin board while the canvas is being tacked to the edges of the frame. In the accompanying illustrations Fig. 360 shows the action of the wedges when[Pg 185] tightening up the frame, the result being to open the mitre joint. Fig. 361 shows the position of the saw cuts for receiving the hardwood wedges. Note that the parallel groove is carried the full length of the material for greater convenience in cutting. The other groove is taken from the outer angle of the mitre joint inwards. The cut finishes with due regard to the necessary taper; see the dotted lines showing taper in Fig. 360. The grooves will be wide enough after being cut with an ordinary hand-rip saw, but for large work they are usually grooved on the circular saw bench.

Frames for Oil Paintings.—The way to create joints for frames that hold the canvas for oil paintings is shown at Fig. 360. They are usually angled at the corners and secured with loose wedges. The four sections of the frame can be temporarily held together by a thin piece of board while the canvas is being attached to the edges of the frame. In the illustrations, Fig. 360 demonstrates how the wedges work when tightening the frame, causing the mitre joint to open. Fig. 361 shows where the saw cuts are made to accommodate the hardwood wedges. Notice that the parallel groove runs the full length of the material for easier cutting. The other groove is cut from the outer angle of the mitre joint inwards. The cut is made with the necessary taper in mind; see the dotted lines indicating taper in Fig. 360. The grooves will be wide enough after being cut with a standard hand-rip saw, but for larger projects, they are typically groove-cut on a circular saw bench.

Fig. 360.

Fig. 360.

Fig. 360.

Fig. 361.

Fig. 361.

Fig. 361.

Joint and Method of Wedging the Frames of Oil Paintings.

Joint and Method of Securing the Frames of Oil Paintings.

Corrugated Steel Fasteners.—It is now many years ago since the steel saw-edge fastener first appeared on the market, but probably 80 per cent. of amateur woodworkers have never yet sampled its advantages.

Corrugated Steel Fasteners.—It's been many years since the steel saw-edge fastener first hit the market, but probably 80 percent of amateur woodworkers have never tried its benefits.

In appearance it resembles a miniature corrugated galvanised sheet such as is used for roofing purposes, with the exception, however, that the corrugations are[Pg 186] divergent instead of being parallel and that one end is ground down to a cutting edge (see Fig. 363, A). They are made in various sizes from 14 in. to 1 in. in length, whilst in regard to width they are classed by the number of corrugations and not by their measurement.

In appearance, it looks like a small piece of corrugated galvanized metal typically used for roofing, except that the corrugations are[Pg 186] diverging rather than parallel, and one end is sharpened to a cutting edge (see Fig. 363, A). They come in various lengths from 14 inch to 1 inch, and they are categorized by the number of corrugations rather than by their width.

Fig. 362.—Jointing     Boards.

Fig. 362.—Jointing Boards.

Fig. 362.—Board Joints

Fig. 363.—Jointing a Frame.

Fig. 363.—Jointing a Frame.

Fig. 363.—Assembling a Frame.

The Use of Saw-edge Corrugated Steel Fasteners.

The Use of Saw-edge Corrugated Steel Fasteners.

To use the fastener no special tools are required; it is simply driven in with a hammer exactly as though it were a nail; once in position, however, to get it out is worse than drawing teeth. The corrugations add to the strength of the device, the wood fibres closing around them, age and rust but emphasising their grip.

To use the fastener, you don't need any special tools; you just drive it in with a hammer like a nail. However, once it's in place, getting it out is harder than pulling teeth. The grooves increase the strength of the device, as the wood fibers tighten around them, and age and rust just make their grip even stronger.

Wall Plugs.—At Fig. 364 four types of wall plugs are shown: a, the ordinary rectangular tapered wall plug to drive between the joints of the brickwork; b, the circular tapered wall plug as used to plug a wall after a star-shaped brick drill has been used; d, a twisted wall plug used for similar purposes to the wedge a, but considered[Pg 187] to be superior in holding power owing to its twisted formation; c is another type of wall plug considered to have great tenacity by reason of its corrugations. Wall plugs are required in nearly all cases where it is necessary to joint woodwork to brickwork, as, for instance, heavily-framed silvered mirrors to the walls of shops.

Wall Plugs.—At Fig. 364 four types of wall plugs are shown: a, the regular rectangular tapered wall plug for inserting between brickwork joints; b, the circular tapered wall plug used for plugging a wall after using a star-shaped brick drill; d, a twisted wall plug used for the same purposes as wedge a, but considered[Pg 187] superior in holding strength due to its twisted design; c is another type of wall plug known for its strong grip because of its corrugations. Wall plugs are essential in almost all situations where woodwork needs to be attached to brickwork, such as heavily-framed silvered mirrors mounted on shop walls.

Fig. 364.—Wall Plugs,     Four Varieties.

Fig. 364.—Wall Plugs, Four Varieties.

Fig. 364.—Wall Plugs, Four Types.

Fig. 365.—     Slot Screwing.

Fig. 365.— Slot Screwing.

Fig. 365.— Slot Screwing.

Fig. 366.—Slot     Screwing a Bracket.

Fig. 366.—Slot Screwing a Bracket.

Fig. 366.—Slot Attaching a Bracket.

Slot Screwing, or Keyhole Screwing, is a most useful way of joining light woodwork in such a manner that the fixing method is not exposed to the eye. A stout screw is inserted to within 38 in. of the head, as at Fig. 365. In the adjoining piece a hole is bored with a centre bit and a slot is cut with an 18 in. chisel. The two pieces of timber are placed together, and by sliding the upper piece forward the screw runs up into the slot or keyhole and secures the joint. Fig. 366 shows the application of the joint fixing a shaped bracket to the shaped shelf; the bracket and shelf are inverted in the illustration to clearly show the method of jointing. For heavy work special brass plates are obtainable for this[Pg 188] purpose; one plate is let flush into the upper piece and the other plate into the lower piece.

Slot Screwing, or Keyhole Screwing, is a really handy way to connect lightweight wood pieces without showing how they’re put together. A strong screw is placed about 38 in. from the head, as shown in Fig. 365. In the other piece, a hole is drilled with a center bit and a slot is made using a 18 in. chisel. The two pieces of wood are brought together, and by pushing the top piece forward, the screw fits into the slot or keyhole and secures the joint. Fig. 366 illustrates the joint’s application for attaching a shaped bracket to a shaped shelf; the bracket and shelf are shown upside down in the image to clearly demonstrate the joining method. For heavier tasks, special brass plates are available for this[Pg 188] purpose; one plate is set flush into the top piece and the other plate into the bottom piece.

Battening (Fig. 367).—A good method of joining cross battens to drawing boards and other wide surfaces is shown here. After boring for the screws, slots are cut so as to allow the screws to move along the slots when shrinkage takes place. In Fig. 368 a similar method is applied to secure the drawer bottom to the drawer back. If shrinkage takes place in the drawer bottom and it leaves the groove in the drawer front, the screws are slackened, the drawer bottom is knocked up into the groove, and the screws again inserted. For drawing boards, etc., specially made elliptical-shaped slotted brass socket cups are made to receive the screw heads.

Battening (Fig. 367).—A good way to attach cross battens to drawing boards and other wide surfaces is shown here. After drilling for the screws, slots are cut to allow the screws to move within the slots when shrinkage occurs. In Fig. 368, a similar method is used to secure the drawer bottom to the drawer back. If the drawer bottom shrinks and comes out of the groove in the drawer front, the screws can be loosened, the drawer bottom can be pushed back into the groove, and the screws can be inserted again. For drawing boards and similar items, specially made elliptical-shaped slotted brass socket cups are used to hold the screw heads.

Fig. 367.—Battening.

Fig. 367.—Battening.

Fig. 367.—Battening.

Fig. 368.—Drawer     Bottom Joint.

Fig. 368.—Drawer Bottom Joint.

Fig. 368.—Drawer Bottom Joint.


PUZZLE JOINTS

Puzzle Joints are not only interesting in[Pg 189] themselves, but are often excellent studies in craftsmanship. The majority of them, if to be satisfactory as puzzles, call for very careful setting out and cutting, entailing the same degree of skill that is demanded for high-class cabinet work. For this reason several examples may well find a place in a volume dealing with woodwork joints. As[Pg 190] a rule, these puzzles should be made in hardwood, such as dark walnut or beech, as in whitewood the joints are soon liable to wear.

Puzzle Joints are not only fascinating in[Pg 189] themselves, but they also make for great examples of craftsmanship. Most of them, if they are to be effective as puzzles, require very precise layout and cutting, demanding the same level of skill needed for high-quality cabinet making. For this reason, several examples would fit well in a book about woodworking joints. As[Pg 190] a general rule, these puzzles should be made from hardwood, such as dark walnut or beech, because whitewood joints are likely to wear out quickly.

Fig. 369.—Sketch of the Completed Chinese Puzzle. Fig. 369.—Drawing of the Finished Chinese Puzzle.

Chinese Puzzle.—The ingenious puzzle of the Chinese type shown in Fig. 369 is probably older than many of us could guess, but as it is one that can be made by any woodworker we give full directions as to how it may be constructed. The complete article may be called, in form, a six-pointed pyramid. It is made up of twenty-one different pieces, each cut from wood 12 in. wide and 12 in. thick; 38 in. wood may be used if preferred. For the purpose either sycamore or white maple is the most useful.

Chinese Puzzle.—The clever puzzle of the Chinese type shown in Fig. 369 is probably older than many of us realize, but since it can be made by any woodworker, we provide detailed instructions on how to build it. The final piece can be described, in shape, as a six-pointed pyramid. It consists of twenty-one different pieces, each cut from wood 1/2 in. wide and 1/2 in. thick; 3/8 in. wood can be used if preferred. For this project, either sycamore or white maple works best.

Fig. 370.

Fig. 370.

Fig. 370.

Fig. 371.

Fig. 371.

Fig. 371.

Fig. 372.

Fig. 372.

Fig. 372.

Fig. 373.

Fig. 373.

Fig. 373.

The Three Cross Pieces.       Key Piece.

The Three Cross Pieces. Key Piece.

The pieces required are as follows:—

The items needed are as follows:—

Fig. 370.—Six pieces, 312 ins. long, with a half slot cut in the centre as shown. This slot must be exactly the width of the wood's thickness, and cut exactly half way through, so that, if two pieces are placed across by means of the halved joint, their surfaces will be flush. The slot must also be exactly in the centre.[Pg 191]

Fig. 370.—Six pieces, 312 inches long, with a half slot cut in the center as shown. This slot needs to be exactly the width of the wood's thickness and cut precisely halfway through, so that when two pieces are joined together using the halved joint, their surfaces will be level. The slot must also be perfectly centered.[Pg 191]

Fig. 371.—Six pieces, size 212 ins. long, with a half-cut centre slot similar to that of Fig. 370.

Fig. 371.—Six pieces, each 212 inches long, featuring a half-cut center slot similar to that of Fig. 370.

Fig. 372.—Six required, these being 112 ins. in length, and with slots in the middle as before.

Fig. 372.—Six are needed, each measuring 112 inches long, and with slots in the middle, just like before.

Fig. 373.—One of these last six requires special treatment, as it forms the key block of the puzzle. After its slot has been cut, one half of the narrow part must be sawn away, as shown in Fig. 373. The inner edge must also be gently rounded. The special use of this vital piece, which we will call the "key," will be fully explained presently.

Fig. 373.—One of these last six needs special attention, as it is the key piece of the puzzle. After its slot has been cut, you must saw away one half of the narrow part, as shown in Fig. 373. The inner edge should also be softly rounded. The specific use of this essential piece, which we will refer to as the "key," will be explained in detail shortly.

Fig. 374.—Then, in addition to these, there are three central bars to make. Like the other parts they are 12 in. by 12 in., but are each 412 ins. long, and are cut as shown in Fig. 374. The end projections a are 12 in. long, and the cut-away part is exactly half the depth of the wood. Two of the three pieces (X and Y in Fig. 374) are similar, but the slot b of the third one (Z) is only 14 in. wide instead of 12 in. As will be noticed, this 14-in. slot is not in the centre, but corresponds with the right-hand half of the larger slots of X and Y.

Fig. 374.—Next, there are three main bars to create. Like the other parts, they measure 12 in. by 12 in., but each is 412 ins. long and should be cut as illustrated in Fig. 374. The end projections a are 12 in. long, and the cut-out section is exactly half the depth of the wood. Two of the three pieces (X and Y in Fig. 374) are similar, but the slot b of the third piece (Z) is only 14 in. wide instead of 12 in. As you will see, this 14-in. slot is not centered, but aligns with the right-hand side of the larger slots in X and Y.

Fig. 374.—The Central Bars. Fig. 374.—The Central Bars.

In making these twenty-one pieces, what should be[Pg 192] borne in mind is that the different parts fit closely into each other. Consequently the slots, in width, must be cut so as to grip the thickness of the wood; in depth they must be exactly half this thickness.

In creating these twenty-one pieces, one should keep in mind that the different parts fit tightly together. Therefore, the slots, in terms of width, must be cut to hold the thickness of the wood snugly; in terms of depth, they must be exactly half of this thickness.

Fitting the Puzzle.—The three central bars must first be joined, as those form the skeleton framework of the structure. Fig. 375 shows them in position, but as it is a puzzle in itself as to how they can be got thus some explanation is necessary.

Fitting the Puzzle.—The three main bars need to be connected first, as they create the backbone of the structure. Fig. 375 shows them in place, but since it's a puzzle to figure out how to assemble them this way, some explanation is needed.

Fig. 375.—The Three Central     Bars in Position.

Fig. 375.—The Three Central Bars in Position.

Fig. 375.—The Three Central Bars in Position.

Fig. 376.—How to Adjust the     Bars. (Note position of     projecting ends, a.)

Fig. 376.—How to Adjust the Bars. (Note position of projecting ends, a.)

Fig. 376.—How to Adjust the Bars. (Note the position of the projecting ends, a.)

First Stage.—First take the bars X and Y (see Fig. 374) and arrange them as shown in Fig. 376. It is most important that the projections a of X face upwards, and that the projections a of Y face towards the centre. Then take the bar Z and bring it flat into the slot of X. The little slot of Z, however, must remain above the slot of X. Then slide the bar Y along to the centre, so that the part lettered c slips into the little slot of bar Z.[Pg 193]

First Stage.—First, take the bars X and Y (see Fig. 374) and arrange them as shown in Fig. 376. It's very important that the projections a of X face upwards and that the projections a of Y face towards the center. Then take the bar Z and lay it flat into the slot of X. However, the small slot of Z must stay above the slot of X. Next, slide the bar Y to the center so that the part labeled c fits into the small slot of bar Z.[Pg 193]

This may seem confusing to read, but it is easy to follow when the pieces are in one's hand. The result of this rather clever arrangement is that the six arms of Fig. 375 are all exactly the same length, width, and thickness. They are also arranged so that in each arm may be clasped one piece each of Figs. 370, 371, and 372. The three central arms may, of course, be set up in a different order, and here we have merely chosen the way that is the most simple to describe and illustrate.

This might seem confusing to read, but it's easy to understand when you have the pieces in your hand. The result of this clever setup is that the six arms of Fig. 375 are all the same length, width, and thickness. They're also arranged so that each arm can hold one piece of Figs. 370, 371, and 372. The three central arms can, of course, be arranged in a different order, and we've just chosen the simplest way to describe and illustrate it.

Fig. 377.—Beginning to place     on the Cross Pieces.

Fig. 377.—Beginning to place on the Cross Pieces.

Fig. 377.—Starting to put on the Cross Pieces.

Fig. 378.—Placing the Key     Piece to overlap end projection     of Central Bar.

Fig. 378.—Placing the Key Piece to overlap end projection of Central Bar.

Fig. 378.—Placing the Key Piece to overlap end projection of Central Bar.

Second Stage.—In the remaining part of the work the chief difficulty is to keep the puzzle from falling to pieces before the key finally locks it. Take the longer cross parts, Fig. 370, and clasp one to each arm. The six need not all be put on meanwhile, but only those which are most easily handled. The next size (Fig. 371) may then be put on.

Second Stage.—In the rest of the task, the main challenge is to prevent the puzzle from coming apart before the final key locks it in place. Take the longer cross parts, Fig. 370, and attach one to each arm. You don’t need to use all six right now, just the ones that are easiest to manage. After that, you can add the next size (Fig. 371).

In the ordinary course each arm could be completed with its three cross pieces till the sixth was attempted, and here the reader would find that, at the last moment,[Pg 194] his attempt was frustrated. He could not get the last small piece in, as other bars lock the puzzle. Here it is that the "key" comes in.

In the usual process, each arm could be finished with its three cross pieces until the sixth was tried, and at this point, the reader would see that, just when it mattered most,[Pg 194] his effort was blocked. He couldn’t fit in the last small piece because other bars are locking the puzzle. This is where the "key" becomes important.

The Key Piece.—When the writer fits up the puzzle he finds that three of the arms may straight away be fitted complete with their three cross parts. These are the ones where the longer cross piece (Fig. 370) lies flush with the back of the central bar (see Fig. 377). This is easily found out when at work on the puzzle. In the case of the other three arms there is, of course, a gap caused by the long slots of the central bars. Adjust the parts on the first-named three arms, and then deal with the fourth arm, putting in all three cross parts. For the little one here, use the "key."

The Key Piece.—When the writer assembles the puzzle, they discover that three of the arms can be immediately fitted with their three cross parts. These are the ones where the longer cross piece (Fig. 370) is flush with the back of the central bar (see Fig. 377). This becomes obvious when working on the puzzle. For the other three arms, there is, of course, a gap created by the long slots of the central bars. Adjust the pieces on the first three arms, and then work on the fourth arm, inserting all three cross parts. For the small one here, use the "key."

By placing the "key" so that it overlaps the end projection of the arm (see Fig. 378) a space is left at the centre, and means is thus afforded for getting in the three cross parts on the remaining two arms.

By positioning the "key" to overlap the end projection of the arm (see Fig. 378), a gap is created in the center, allowing access to fit the three cross parts into the other two arms.

This practically ends the puzzle. While the "key" is in its overlapping position the parts may be separated, but if it is turned round on its narrow neck, so that it is in exactly the same position as the other five small cross parts, it locks the whole thing so tightly that nothing but sheer force could loosen the twenty-one pieces.

This pretty much wraps up the puzzle. While the "key" is in its overlapping position, the parts can be separated, but if it is turned around on its narrow neck, so that it is in exactly the same position as the other five small cross parts, it locks the whole thing so tightly that only sheer force could loosen the twenty-one pieces.

So far as the order of putting together is concerned, there are many equally satisfactory ways, these being determined by the ease or difficulty that one experiences in holding the half-finished puzzle. It all comes to the same in the end, and the "key" must be placed on one bar before the last three arms can be completed. The "key," moreover, must be on one of the bars where a gap is left at the centre, and not on one where Fig. 370 lies flush against the central arm as in Fig. 377.[Pg 195]

As for the order of assembling, there are many equally good methods, depending on how easy or hard it is to hold the partially completed puzzle. Ultimately, it all works out the same, and the "key" needs to be positioned on one bar before the last three arms can be finished. Additionally, the "key" has to be on a bar with a gap in the center, not one where Fig. 370 is flush against the central arm like in Fig. 377.[Pg 195]

Undoing the Puzzle.—To take the puzzle to pieces all that is required is to turn the "key" half round and push the other two cross bars on that arm towards the outer point. The cross bars below may then be removed, and the whole structure falls to pieces.

Taking Apart the Puzzle.—To take the puzzle apart, all you need to do is turn the "key" halfway and push the other two crossbars on that side towards the outer point. You can then remove the crossbars below, and the whole structure will fall apart.

The double dovetail puzzle (Fig. 379) consists of two pieces of wood (usually one dark and the other light) which, upon examination, appear to be dovetailed together from each face. This interlocking arrangement is obviously impossible, and the solution of the puzzle is only apparent on examining Fig. 380, where it will be seen that the joint fits together diagonally.

The double dovetail puzzle (Fig. 379) is made up of two pieces of wood (typically one dark and the other light) that, at first glance, seem to be dovetailed together from each side. This interlocking setup is clearly impossible, and the solution to the puzzle only becomes clear when you look at Fig. 380, where you'll notice that the joint fits together diagonally.

At Fig. 381 are given the diagrams for setting out. Draw the outline of the elevation, plan and end view. The end view in the first instance is indicated by 3, 4, 5 and 6, and it measures 178 ins. square. A 178-ins. square is simply used because 2-ins. wood generally finishes this size after it is planed up. Set out a square (A, B, C, D) which stands corner-ways in the larger square (3, 4, 5, 6). Project the lines D A and C B upwards as at 1, and on to this drawing (1), set out the dovetail according to your own idea of length, width and bevel. Project the four points of your dovetail downwards into the end view, and where these lines cut A, B, and D, C draw them downwards and rebate them into your original plan. This will give the true shape of the two dovetails and it is to this shape that you will cut your joint.

At Fig. 381 you will find the diagrams for layout. Draw the outline of the elevation, plan, and end view. The end view is first shown by points 3, 4, 5, and 6, and it measures 178 inches square. A 178-inch square is used because 2-inch wood typically ends up this size after being planed. Set up a square (A, B, C, D) that stands diagonally in the larger square (3, 4, 5, 6). Project the lines DA and CB upward as shown at 1, and on this drawing (1), outline the dovetail based on your preferred length, width, and bevel. Project the four points of your dovetail downward into the end view, and where these lines intersect A, B, and D, C, extend them downwards and notch them into your original plan. This will give the accurate shape of the two dovetails, and you’ll cut your joint to match this shape.

The joint is in due course glued up, and next day you will plane and waste off the four corners of your model. The end view shows one corner shaded D, 3, A; this and the other three corners are wasted away. The result is that the dovetails are thrown into a plane different from that in which they were made, showing as Fig. 379.[Pg 196]

The joint is glued up in due time, and the next day you'll plane down and remove the four corners of your model. The end view displays one corner shaded D, 3, A; this corner, along with the other three, is reduced. The outcome is that the dovetails are positioned in a different plane than where they were originally created, appearing as Fig. 379.[Pg 196]

Fig. 379.—     Double Dovetail Puzzle.

Fig. 379.— Double Dovetail Puzzle.

Fig. 379.— Double Dovetail Puzzle.

Fig. 380.—     The Two Parts Separated.

Fig. 380.— The Two Parts Separated.

Fig. 380.— The Two Parts Separated.

Fig. 381.—Elevation, Plan and End View, showing how the Puzzle Joint may be correctly Set Out. Fig. 381.—Elevation, Plan, and End View, demonstrating how to properly set out the Puzzle Joint.
Fig. 382.—Dovetail Puzzle. The Finished Joint. Fig. 382.—Dovetail Puzzle. The Completed Joint.
Fig. 383.—Sketch of Dovetail Piece. Fig. 383.—Sketch of Dovetail Joint.

(Note that dovetail is cut on slant, the thickness at front being less than at back. See dotted line on plan below.)[Pg 198]

(Note that the dovetail is cut at an angle, with the thickness at the front being less than at the back. See the dotted line on the plan below.)[Pg 198]

Fig. 384.—Plan, looking upwards. Fig. 384.—Plan, looking up.
Fig. 385A.—Front Elevation. Fig. 385B.—Back Elevation. Fig. 385A.—Front View. Fig. 385B.—Back View.

The model calls for very accurate workmanship and the joints must not be undercut during the sawing and chiselling operations. The completed model measures 6 to 7 ins.

The model requires precise workmanship, and the joints must not be undercut during the sawing and chiseling processes. The finished model measures 6 to 7 inches.

The Dovetail Puzzle joint illustrated at Fig. 382 has perhaps caused more argument and controversy amongst woodworkers than any wooden joint. It may be neatly made in maple, walnut, or mahogany, and afterwards glued up. The question everyone asks is: How was it put together?

The Dovetail Puzzle joint shown at Fig. 382 has probably sparked more debate and disagreement among woodworkers than any other joint. It can be neatly crafted from maple, walnut, or mahogany, and then glued together. The question everyone raises is: How was it assembled?

Fig. 386.—Variation of the Dovetail Puzzle. Fig. 386.—Variation of the Dovetail Puzzle.

Take two pieces of wood such as mahogany, walnut or birch, about 6 ins. long by 178 ins. wide and 114 ins. thick. Truly plane them up and then set out and make the tenon and dovetailed piece (Fig. 383). Next mark out and cut the cross bar to fit its corresponding piece. The joint will go together in a somewhat diagonal direction as it is pushed into position from the back; when closed it will appear as at Fig. 382. For guidance, a plan, part elevation and back elevation are added.

Take two pieces of wood like mahogany, walnut, or birch, about 6 inches long, 1 7/8 inches wide, and 1 1/4 inches thick. Smooth them out nicely, then mark and create the tenon and dovetail piece (Fig. 383). Next, mark and cut the crossbar to match its corresponding piece. The joint will fit together at a slight diagonal angle as it’s pushed into place from the back; when closed, it will look like Fig. 382. For reference, a plan, part elevation, and back elevation are included.

An improvement after you have gained experience in the making of this joint is to make a similar joint, leaving the face (B, Fig. 386) blind; it then does not show the bevelling of the dovetail at the end C. In other words, keep the line C, say, 14 in. back from the face of B. The joint should be glued up and it will then appear to the average worker that it is an impossible proposition. (See Fig. 401, page 208.)

An improvement after you gain experience in making this joint is to create a similar joint, keeping the face (B, Fig. 386) hidden; this way, the beveling of the dovetail at the end C won’t be visible. In other words, maintain the line C, let’s say, 14 in. from the face of B. The joint should be glued, and it will seem to the average worker that it’s an impossible task. (See Fig. 401, page 208.)

Fig. 387.—A Simple Variation of the Dovetail Puzzle. Fig. 387.—An Easy Version of the Dovetail Puzzle.

Carefully note that the edges A, A are parallel to each other in spite of the fact that they slope in one direction.

Carefully note that the edges A and A are parallel to each other even though they slant in one direction.

A further variation of the puzzle is seen in Fig. 387. Here the joint is much simpler, and can easily be followed from the illustration.[Pg 200]

A different version of the puzzle is found in Fig. 387. In this case, the joint is much simpler and can easily be followed from the illustration.[Pg 200]

Fig. 388.—Six-piece Joint Puzzle. Fig. 388.—6-Piece Joint Puzzle.

Cross Puzzle.Fig. 388 illustrates a six-piece puzzle joint, similar in some respects to Fig. 369, but very much simpler. Both a back and front view of the piece D is shown for clearness of illustration. The method of assembling the pieces is as follows: Hold piece B upright, and fit piece D across; at the same time note that the small x marks are opposite each other. Take piece E and, holding it as shown, slide[Pg 201] it up the piece B (see arrow) until E engages D and the small o marks are opposite each other. Piece C is now fitted behind D, and then piece F will slide in position and push downwards. The key-piece A is now put in position, and the puzzle is completed.

Cross Puzzle.Fig. 388 shows a six-piece puzzle joint that's somewhat like Fig. 369, but much simpler. Both the front and back views of piece D are displayed for clarity. Here’s how to put the pieces together: Hold piece B upright and fit piece D across it, making sure the small x marks are facing each other. Next, take piece E, hold it as shown, and slide[Pg 201] it up piece B (see the arrow) until E connects with D and the small o marks are aligned. Now, fit piece C behind D, then slide piece F into position and push it down. Finally, place the key piece A in its spot, and the puzzle is finished.

Fig. 389.—Mortising Puzzle, showing how the Parts Fit. Fig. 389.—Mortising Puzzle, illustrating how the pieces fit together.

Mortising Puzzle.—The ordinary mortising exercise is, after the first two or three attempts, generally voted as uninteresting, but, although the simple puzzle shown in Fig. 389 is practically an exercise in mortising, yet, forming as it does a puzzle, it becomes a fascinating piece of work.

Mortising Puzzle.—The typical mortising exercise is usually considered boring after the first couple of tries. However, even though the simple puzzle shown in Fig. 389 is essentially a mortising exercise, its nature as a puzzle makes it an engaging task.

The puzzle is composed of three pieces of wood, each 4 ins. long, 112 ins. wide, and 12 in. thick. In each piece a mortise 112 ins. by 12 in. should be cut as shown at 1, Fig. 390. In one piece, marked 2, a groove is cut on[Pg 202] one side, 38 in. wide, and in another piece (3) a similar slot, but 12 in. wide, is cut, and this is continued on the other side of the groove to a depth of 18 in. The three pieces should be set out on a 13-ins. by 112-ins. by 12-in. length of wood, as shown at Fig. 391, and when ready sawn apart.

The puzzle consists of three wooden pieces, each measuring 4 inches long, 1½ inches wide, and ½ inch thick. In each piece, a mortise of 1½ inches by ½ inch should be cut as shown at 1, Fig. 390. In one piece, marked 2, a groove is cut on one side, ⅜ inch wide, and in another piece (3), a similar slot, but ½ inch wide, is cut, continuing on the other side of the groove to a depth of ⅛ inch. The three pieces should be arranged on a piece of wood that is 13 inches by 1½ inches by ½ inch long, as shown at Fig. 391, and then sawed apart when ready.

Fig. 390.—The Three Parts, with Sizes marked. Fig. 390.—The Three Parts, with Sizes indicated.
Fig. 391.—How to Cut the Parts. Fig. 391.—How to Cut the Parts.

The puzzle is put together as shown at Fig. 389. In the first place, hold No. 1 piece upright as shown at A, then take No. 2 piece with slot uppermost and push it through the opening in No. 1 piece until the nearest side of the slot projects 18 in. as indicated at B. Next place No. 3 piece on with the slot at the back as shown at C, and push it down until it touches the bottom of the opening in No. 2 piece as illustrated at D. The only[Pg 203] thing to do now is to push No. 2 piece as far as it will go to make the figure as shown at E.

The puzzle is put together as shown at Fig. 389. First, hold piece No. 1 upright as shown at A, then take piece No. 2 with the slot facing up and push it through the opening in piece No. 1 until the nearest side of the slot sticks out 18 in., as indicated at B. Next, place piece No. 3 on with the slot at the back as shown at C, and push it down until it touches the bottom of the opening in piece No. 2 as illustrated at D. The only[Pg 203] thing left to do now is to push piece No. 2 as far as it will go to complete the figure shown at E.

In this puzzle the parts should fit together fairly tight, but should not be too stiff.

In this puzzle, the pieces should fit together snugly, but they shouldn't be too rigid.

Fig. 392.—Chinese Cross     Puzzle.

Fig. 392.—Chinese Cross Puzzle.

Fig. 392.—Chinese Cross Puzzle.

Fig. 393.—Method of     Putting Together.

Fig. 393.—Method of Putting Together.

Fig. 393.—Assembly Method.

Fig. 394.—The Six Pieces, each 4 ins. by 1 in. square. Fig. 394.—The Six Pieces, each measuring 4 inches by 1 inch square.

Chinese Cross.Fig. 392 shows a variation of the Chinese cross, which is perhaps the most fascinating of all woodwork puzzles. Take six pieces of hardwood[Pg 204] (Fig. 394) and accurately plane and saw them so that each piece will measure 4 ins. by 1 in. by 1 in. Bearing in mind that all the cuts are multiples of 12 in., set out, saw and chisel five of the pieces to agree with the sketches 1, 1A, 2, 2A and 3. Leave the key piece intact. The puzzle is of course to fit all the six pieces together so as to form the Chinese cross or block given at Fig. 392. As a clue to the method of assembly we give another sketch (Fig. 393) showing four of the pieces fixed together. The reader can, if he so desires, make the puzzle to a smaller scale by using six pieces of wood each measuring 2 ins. long by 12 in. by 12 in.

Chinese Cross.Fig. 392 shows a variation of the Chinese cross, which is probably the most intriguing of all woodworking puzzles. Take six pieces of hardwood[Pg 204] (Fig. 394) and carefully plane and saw them so each piece measures 4 inches by 1 inch by 1 inch. Remember that all cuts are multiples of 12 inch, then cut and chisel five of the pieces to match sketches 1, 1A, 2, 2A, and 3. Keep the key piece whole. The challenge is to fit all six pieces together to create the Chinese cross or block shown at Fig. 392. As a hint for putting it together, we provide another sketch (Fig. 393) showing four of the pieces connected. If the reader wishes, they can make the puzzle on a smaller scale using six pieces of wood, each measuring 2 inches long by 12 inch by 12 inch.

Fig. 395.—Diagonal Chinese Cross Puzzle. (Two Pieces required of A, Three of B and One of C.) Fig. 395.—Diagonal Chinese Cross Puzzle. (Requires Two pieces of A, Three of B, and One of C.)

Diagonal Chinese Cross.—At Fig. 395 is given a sketch of a completed Chinese block or cross puzzle in which the various pieces of wood go together diagonally. Plane up a piece of hardwood (which may be about 14 ins. or 15 ins. long) so that it measures on its end 12 in. square. Cut the wood into six pieces which measure about 214 ins. long, and then proceed to mark out, saw and pare up with the chisel two pieces like[Pg 205] sketch A, three pieces like B, and one key piece as C. Now fit these together to make the completed cross. The solution is left to the reader.

Diagonal Chinese Cross.—At Fig. 395 is a sketch of a finished Chinese block or cross puzzle where the different pieces of wood fit together diagonally. Smooth a piece of hardwood (about 14 inches or 15 inches long) so that its end measures 12 inch square. Cut the wood into six pieces that are around 214 inches long, and then mark, saw, and shape two pieces like[Pg 205] sketch A, three pieces like B, and one key piece as C. Now assemble these pieces to create the complete cross. The solution is left to the reader.

Fig. 396 shows a combination of six pieces which, when fitted together, will make the Chinese cross similar to Fig. 392. Plane up the strip of hardwood (birch preferred) so that it measures 12 in. square at the end and proceed to mark out and make two pieces[Pg 206] like D, two like E, one like F, and one piece like G. Put the pieces together to form the Chinese cross. Again the reader is left to solve the problem of fitting.[Pg 207]

Fig. 396 shows a combination of six pieces that, when put together, will create the Chinese cross similar to Fig. 392. Plane the strip of hardwood (birch is preferred) so that it measures 12 in. square at the end and then mark out and make two pieces[Pg 206] like D, two like E, one like F, and one piece like G. Assemble the pieces to form the Chinese cross. Once more, the reader is left to figure out the challenge of fitting.[Pg 207]

Fig. 396.—Another Chinese Cross. (Two Pieces required of D, Two of E, and One each of F and G.) Fig. 396.—Another Chinese Cross. (You need two pieces of D, two of E, and one each of F and G.)

Square Puzzles are of endless variety. Four of these are shown, all simple to make, but not equally simple to solve. The only material required for each is a[Pg 208] 5-ins. square piece of 18-in. fretwood or plywood; or, if preferred, pieces of different colour may be used. The diagrams are given exactly half size, and the lines may be set out direct on the wood. It will be noticed that all four puzzles are strictly geometrical in character.

Square Puzzles come in endless varieties. Four examples are shown here, all easy to create, but not all are equally easy to solve. The only material you need for each is a[Pg 208] 5-inch square piece of 18-inch fretwood or plywood; alternatively, you can use pieces of different colors if you prefer. The diagrams are provided at half size, and you can directly draw the lines on the wood. You'll notice that all four puzzles have a strictly geometric design.

Fig. 397.—Six-piece Square Puzzle. (For     Guidance in Setting Out, the Centre of     Top Line is marked at A.)

Fig. 397.—Six-piece Square Puzzle. (For Guidance in Setting Out, the Centre of Top Line is marked at A.)

Fig. 397.—Six-piece Square Puzzle. (To help set it up, the center of the top line is marked at A.)

Fig. 398.—Five-piece Square Puzzle. (In     Setting Out, note that the Angles B B     are Right Angles.)

Fig. 398.—Five-piece Square Puzzle. (In Setting Out, note that the Angles B B are Right Angles.)

Fig. 398.—Five-piece Square Puzzle. (When setting it up, note that the corners B B are right angles.)

Fig. 399.—Ten-piece Square Puzzle. (For     Guidance in Setting Out, the Centre     of the Four Outlines are lettered at     C, C, C, C.)

Fig. 399.—Ten-piece Square Puzzle. (For Guidance in Setting Out, the Centre of the Four Outlines are lettered at C, C, C, C.)

Fig. 399.—Ten-piece Square Puzzle. (For guidance in setting it up, the center of the four outlines are marked C, C, C, C.)

Fig. 400.—Six-piece Square Puzzle. (The     Centres of the Four Outlines are lettered     at D, D, D, D.)

Fig. 400.—Six-piece Square Puzzle. (The Centres of the Four Outlines are lettered at D, D, D, D.)

Fig. 400.—Six-piece Square Puzzle. (The centers of the four outlines are labeled D, D, D, D.)

Fig. 397 is made up of six pieces and is the simplest of the group to solve. Although containing only five pieces, Fig. 398 will be found to give more trouble.

Fig. 397 has six pieces and is the easiest one to solve. Even though it only has five pieces, Fig. 398 will end up being more challenging.

Fig. 399, with ten pieces, is undoubtedly the most trying puzzle, and will be found as baffling as many jig-saw pictures. Fig. 400, again, presents only moderate difficulties.

Fig. 399, with ten pieces, is definitely the most challenging puzzle and will be just as confusing as many jigsaw images. Fig. 400, on the other hand, only offers moderate challenges.

If the reader prefers, he may cut the squares to the size illustrated instead of enlarging them.

If the reader prefers, they can cut the squares to the size shown instead of making them larger.

Fig. 401.—Blind Dovetail Puzzle Joint (see page 199). Fig. 401.—Blind Dovetail Puzzle Joint (see page 199).

INDEX

Angle, mitre, 163, 164

Angles for dovetails, 134

Astragals, 128, 129


Back flap hinges, 115, 116

Barefaced (see under Tenon).

Barred door joint, 55

Barrow-wheel joints, 20

Battening, 188

Bevelled dovetailing, 149

Bevelling, guide block for, 161

Birdsmouth joints, 181

Blind lap-dovetailing, 145

Boards, weather, 176

Bolts for scarf joint, 107, 108

Boring away waste, 41, 42

Box, laminated core, 175

Box lid, hingeing, 113

Boxes, dovetails for, 133

Brace and bit, use of, 41, 42

Brass astragal, 129

Bridle joint, mitred, 36, 37

Bridle joint, oblique, 37, 38

Bridle joints, 35

Bridle joints, setting out, 39

Butt hinge, 110, 111

Butt hinge, rising, 115, 116

Butting mitred joint, 8

Buttoning, 184


Carcase work, dovetailing, 149

Card table hinges, 115, 116

Chair joint, interlocking, 91

Chinese cross puzzle, 203

Chinese cross puzzle, diagonal, 204

Chinese puzzle, 189, 190

Chisel used in dovetailing, 137, 138, 153

Chiselling (bridle joints), 45

Chiselling (halved joints), 30, etc.

Chiselling (mortise and tenon joints), 89, etc.

Circular frames, 172

Clamping, 80, 82

Close joint hingeing, 125

Cogged joints, 181

Column joints, 179

Combing joint, 55

Core box, laminated, 175

Corner dovetail, 152

Corner joints, halved, 14

Corner tongued joints, 55, 56

Cornice frame dovetailed, 143, 144

Cornice pole, dowelling, 97, 98

Cornice pole joints, 177

Corrugated steel fasteners, 185

Cot joints, 178

Countersink bit, 96

Cradle for planing, 52

Cradle for planing dowels, 94

Cramping glued joints, 11, 12

Cramping tongued and grooved mitre joint, 56, 57

Cross halving joints, 18, 23

Cross puzzle, 200

Cross puzzle, Chinese, 203

Cross puzzle, diagonal, 204

Cross tongues, 51, 52

Curved work, joints for, 172


Diagonal cross puzzle, 204

[Pg 210] Dogs, iron, 10, 11

Donkey's ear shooting board, 167

Door frames, semicircular head, 173, 175

Door joints, barred, 55

Doors, "bound," 109

Doors, hingeing, 116-119

Doors, shutting joints of, 127, 129

Dovetail angle template, 134, 154

Dovetail, corner, 152

Dovetail grooving, 160

Dovetail halved joints, 17, 19, 20

Dovetail, housed and mitred, 145

Dovetail joint, the 132

Dovetail puzzles, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199

Dovetail, secret mitred, 146

Dovetail-wedged tenon joint, 75

Dovetailed keys, 147, 148

Dovetailed scarf joint, 103, 104

Dovetailing, bevelled, 149

Dovetailing, blind lap, 145

Dovetailing, lap, 133

Dovetailing, oblique, 151

Dovetailing, through, 132

Dovetails, frame, 143

Dovetails, machine made, 159

Dovetails, sawing, 141, 155

Dovetails, setting out, 151

Dowel cradle for planing, 94

Dowel plate, steel, 93

Dowel rounder, 96

Dowel with groove, 94, 95

Dowelling frames, 100

Dowelling joints, 93

Dowelling table legs, 101

Dowels, making, 93

Drawbore pinning, 78

Drawer bottom joint, 188

Drawer joints, dust-proof, 131

Drawer ploughslips, 10, 11

Drawers, dovetailing, 133, etc., 156

Dreadnought file, 81, 82

Drop table joint, 20

Dust-proof drawer joints, 131


Fall fronts, hingeing, 119

Fasteners, corrugated steel, 185

Feather tongues, 51, 52

Fencing, joint for, 71

File, dreadnought, 81, 82

Finger joint hinge, 122, 123

Fished joint, 105, 106

Flap (back) hinges, 115, 116

Floor boards, 48

Fly rails, 120, 121

Fox-wedging, 76

Frame dovetails, 143

Frame joints, Oxford, 26, 27

Frame, mirror, with bridle joints, 37

Frames, circular, 172

Frames, dowelling, 100

Frames for oil paintings, 184


Gate joint, 68, 69

Gauge, marking, 28, 29, 40

Gauge, marking dovetails with cutting, 135

Gauging boards for dowelling, 97, 98

Gauging for hinges, 110, 111

Glued joint, the, 1

Glueing dowelled joints, 97

Glueing rubbed joints, 2

Grooved joints (see Tongued and Grooved), 48

Grooves, ploughing, 58

Grooving, dovetail, 160


Halved and dovetailed joints, 17, 19, 20

Halved and mitred joints, 16

Halved joint, the, 13,

Halved joints, setting out, 28

Halved scarf joint, 103, 104

Halving joints, cross, 18, 23

Hammer head tenons, 80

Handscrews, 11, 12

Haunched tenons, 65

Hinge, butt, 110, 111

Hinge, finger joint, 122, 123

[Pg 211] Hinge, knuckle joint, 122, 123

Hinge recesses, 112

Hinge, rule joint, 125

Hinged cornice pole, 177

Hinged joints, 109

Hingeing box lid, 113

Hingeing, close joint, 125

Hingeing doors, 116-119

Hingeing draught screens, 121

Hingeing fall fronts, 119

Hingeing, open joint, 124

Hinges, gauging for, 110, 111

Hinges, various, 110, 114, 115, 116

Hook joints, 130

Housed and mitred dovetail, 145


Interlocking chair joint, 91

Iron dogs, 10, 11


Japanese self-wedging tenon joint, 72

Joint, drawer bottom, 188

Joint, fished, 105, 106

Joint, interlocking chair, 91

Joint, tabled scarf, 107

Joint, tie beam scarf, 106

Joints,
barefaced tenon, 64
barred door, 55
barrow wheel, 20
battened, 188
birdsmouth, 181
bridle, 35
butting mitred, 8
cogged, 181
column and pillar, 179
combing or locking, 55
cornice pole, 177
cot, 178
cross halving, 18, 23
dovetail, 132
dovetailed and wedged tenon, 75
dowelling, 93
dust-proof drawer, 131
fencing, 71
for curved work, 172
garden gate, 68, 69
glued, 1
halved, 13
halved and dovetailed, 17, 19, 20
haunched tenon, 65
hinged, 109
hook, 130
ladder, 177
laminated, 10, 11, 172, 175
lap, 13
light-tight, 131
meeting, 129
miscellaneous, 176
mitre-faced tenon, 77
mitre bridle, 36, 37
mitre halved, 16
mitred, 163
mitred and tenoned, 72, 73
mitred and tongued, 56, 57
mortise and tenon, 64
notched, 180
oblique bridle, 37, 38
oblique halved, 15, 23
ogee-shaped, 8
open slot mortise, 80
partition, 24, 25
ploughing for tongued and grooved, 58
puzzle, 189
rafter and tie beam, 182
rafter (tenon), 77
rebated door, 129
roof, 34, 37, 38
roof (tenon), 77
rubbed, 1
saddle, 180
sash bar, 79
scarf, 103
screen, 114, 121
scribed and tenoned, 72
setting out bridle, 39
setting out halved, 28
setting out tenon, 83
shouldered tenon, 70, 71, 79
shutting, 127
skirting and muntin, 178
T, 14, 18
tie, 22, 23
[Pg 212]tongued and grooved, 48
tongued corner, 55, 56
trestle, 24
tusk tenon, 74, 75
weather board, 176
wheelwright's self-wedging tenon, 75


Keyhole screwing, 187

Keying, dovetail, 147

Keying, veneer, 178

Keys, dovetailed, 147

Knuckle joint hinge, 122, 123


Ladder joints, 177

Laminated joints, 10, 11

Lamination, 175

Lap dovetailing, 133

Lap dovetailing, blind, 145

Lap joints, 13

Laths, winding, 3

Lid, hingeing box, 113

Light-tight joints, 131

Locking (inter) chair joint, 91

Locking joint, 55


Marking gauge, 28, 29, 40

Matchboarding, 49

Meeting joints, 129

Mirror frame with bridle joints, 37

Mitre box, saw used in, 171

Mitre bridle joint, 36, 37

Mitre, curved, 163, 164, 168, 169

Mitre faced tenon joint, 77

Mitre halved joints, 16

Mitre sawing block, 165

Mitre, setting out a curved, 168, 169

Mitre template, 170

Mitre trap, screw, 165, 166

Mitred and housed dovetail, 145

Mitred and tenoned joint, 72, 73

Mitred butting joint, 8

Mitred dovetail, secret, 146

Mitred frames, dowelling, 99, 100

Mitred joint, the, 163

Mitred tongued joints, 56, 57

Mitres, curved, 169

Mortise and tenon joints, 64

Mortise, open slot, 80

Mortising, 87

Mortising puzzle, 201

Mouldings, mitreing, 165, 171

Muntin joint, 178


Notched joints, 180


Oblique bridle joint, 37, 38

Oblique dovetailing, 151

Oblique joints, halved, 15, 23

Ogee-shaped joint, 8

Open-joint hingeing, 124

Open slot mortise, 80

Oxford frame, halved joints for, 26, 27


Partition joints, 24, 25

Patera covers, 183

Pelleting, 182

Piano front joint, 9, 11

Pinning, 73

Pinning, drawbore, 78

Pins, dovetail, 136

Pivot hinges, 114, 115, 116

Plane, old woman's tooth, 161, 162

Plane, the plough, 58, 59, 60

Planes, tongueing and grooving, 61

Planing, cradle for, 52

Planing mitred work, 165

Plinth frame dovetailed, 143, 144

Plough plane, the, 58, 59, 60

Ploughing for tongued and grooved joints, 58

Ploughslips, glueing, 10, 11

Plugging, 186

Pole joints, cornice, 177

[Pg 213] Puzzle, Chinese cross, 203

Puzzle, cross, 200

Puzzle, diagonal Chinese cross, 204

Puzzle joints, 189

Puzzle, mortising, 201

Puzzles, dovetail, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 208

Puzzles, square, 205


Rafter and tie beam joints, 182

Rafter joint (tenon), 77

Rebated door joints, 129

Reversible screen hinge, 114, 115

Rising butt hinge, 115, 116

Roof joints, 34, 37, 38

Roof joints (tenon), 77

Roof work, scarfed joints used in, 103, 104, 106

Rubbed joint, 1

Rule joint hinge, 125


Saddle joints, 180

Sash bar joints, 79

Sawing block for mitreing, 165

Sawing (bridle joints), 41, etc.

Sawing dovetails, 141, 155

Sawing for hinge recesses, 112

Sawing (halved joints), 30, 31, etc.

Sawing (tenons), 84, etc.

Scarf joint, fished, 105, 106

Scarf joint for heavy timber, lapped and bolted, 107, 108

Scarf joint, tabled, with straps, 107

Scarf joints, 103

Scarf joints, tie beam, 106

Screen hinges, 114, 115, 116

Screens, hingeing draught, 121

Screwing, slot or keyhole, 187

Screws, hiding with pateras, 183

Scribed tenon joint, 72

Secret mitred dovetail, 146

Setting out dovetails, 151

Shooting board, 7, 10, 11

Shooting board for mitreing, 165, 166, 167

Shoulders, 14, etc., 19, 23

Shoulders of tenons, tongueing, 63

Shoulders, sawing, 45

Shoulders (tenon), 70, 71, 79

Shoulders, tenon with tongued and grooved, 79

Shutting joints, 127

Sideboard pillar joints, 179

Skirting and muntin joint, 178

Skirting, mitred, 163

Skirting mould, double, 56, 58

Slot screwing, 187

Spandrel, jointing shaped, 9, 11

Spandrel with tongued joint, 52, 53

Sprocket wheel, 68

Square puzzles, 205

Steel fasteners, corrugated, 185

Stiles, shutting and meeting, 128

Stopped bridle joint, 37, 38

Stopped dovetail halving, 17

Strap hinge, 114, 115

Straps for scarf joints, 107, 108

Stump tenons, 65


T joints, halved, 14, 18

Table (card) hinges, 115, 116

Table frame, laminated, 174, 175

Table framing, 79

Table joint, drop, 20

Table leg with bridle joint, 36

Table legs, dowelled, 101

Table tops buttoned, 184

Table with circular rim, joint for, 25

Tabled scarf joint, 107

Template, dovetail angle, 134, 154

Template for mitreing, 170

Tenon (and mortise) joints, 64

Tenon joint, dovetailed and wedged, 75

Tenon joint, mitred and moulded, 72, 73

Tenon joint, scribed, 72

Tenon joint, self-wedging, 72

[Pg 214] Tenon joint with mitred face, 77

Tenon joint with tongued and grooved shoulders, 79

Tenon joints, barefaced, 64

Tenon joints, drawbore pinning for, 78

Tenon joints, setting out, 83

Tenon joints, shouldered, 70, 71, 79

Tenon joints, tusk, 74, 75

Tenoned scarf joint, 103, 105

Tenons, hammer head, 80

Tenons, haunched, 65

Tenons, inserted, 81, 82

Tenons, stump or stub, 65

Tenons, tongueing shoulders of, 63

Tenons, twin, 72, 73, 80

Through dovetailing, 132

Tie beam and rafter joints, 182

Tie beam scarf joint, 106

Tie joint, 22, 23

Tongue slips, 130

Tongued and grooved joints, applications of, 52

Tongued and grooved joints, 48

Tongued and grooved joints, ploughing for, 58

Tongued joints, corner, 55, 56

Tongueing and grooving planes, 61

Tongues, cross and feather, 51, 52

Tongues, loose, 55

Toothing plane, 161, 162

Trestle joint, 24

Try square, 9, 28

Tusk tenon joints, 74, 75

Twin tenons, 72, 73, 80

Twist bit, 96


Vee'd matchboarding, 49, 50

Vee'd scarf joint, 105

Veneer keying, 178


Wall plugs, 186

Weatherboards, 176

Wedges for tenon joints, 67

Wedging, fox, 76

Wedging frames, 184

Wheel joints, barrow, 20

Wheel, sprocket, 68

Wheelwright's self-wedging tenon joint, 75

Winding laths, 3

Angle, mitre, 163, 164

Angles for dovetails, 134

Astragals, 128, 129


Back flap hinges, 115, 116

Barefaced (see under Tenon).

Barred door joint, 55

Barrow-wheel joints, 20

Battening, 188

Bevelled dovetailing, 149

Bevelling, guide block for, 161

Birdsmouth joints, 181

Blind lap-dovetailing, 145

Boards, weather, 176

Bolts for scarf joint, 107, 108

Boring away waste, 41, 42

Box, laminated core, 175

Box lid, hingeing, 113

Boxes, dovetails for, 133

Brace and bit, use of, 41, 42

Brass astragal, 129

Bridle joint, mitred, 36, 37

Bridle joint, oblique, 37, 38

Bridle joints, 35

Bridle joints, setting out, 39

Butt hinge, 110, 111

Butt hinge, rising, 115, 116

Butting mitred joint, 8

Buttoning, 184


Carcase work, dovetailing, 149

Card table hinges, 115, 116

Chair joint, interlocking, 91

Chinese cross puzzle, 203

Chinese cross puzzle, diagonal, 204

Chinese puzzle, 189, 190

Chisel used in dovetailing, 137, 138, 153

Chiselling (bridle joints), 45

Chiselling (halved joints), 30, etc.

Chiselling (mortise and tenon joints), 89, etc.

Circular frames, 172

Clamping, 80, 82

Close joint hingeing, 125

Cogged joints, 181

Column joints, 179

Combing joint, 55

Core box, laminated, 175

Corner dovetail, 152

Corner joints, halved, 14

Corner tongued joints, 55, 56

Cornice frame dovetailed, 143, 144

Cornice pole, dowelling, 97, 98

Cornice pole joints, 177

Corrugated steel fasteners, 185

Cot joints, 178

Countersink bit, 96

Cradle for planing, 52

Cradle for planing dowels, 94

Cramping glued joints, 11, 12

Cramping tongued and grooved mitre joint, 56, 57

Cross halving joints, 18, 23

Cross puzzle, 200

Cross puzzle, Chinese, 203

Cross puzzle, diagonal, 204

Cross tongues, 51, 52

Curved work, joints for, 172


Diagonal cross puzzle, 204

[Pg 210] Dogs, iron, 10, 11

Donkey's ear shooting board, 167

Door frames, semicircular head, 173, 175

Door joints, barred, 55

Doors, "bound," 109

Doors, hingeing, 116-119

Doors, shutting joints of, 127, 129

Dovetail angle template, 134, 154

Dovetail, corner, 152

Dovetail grooving, 160

Dovetail halved joints, 17, 19, 20

Dovetail, housed and mitred, 145

Dovetail joint, the 132

Dovetail puzzles, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199

Dovetail, secret mitred, 146

Dovetail-wedged tenon joint, 75

Dovetailed keys, 147, 148

Dovetailed scarf joint, 103, 104

Dovetailing, bevelled, 149

Dovetailing, blind lap, 145

Dovetailing, lap, 133

Dovetailing, oblique, 151

Dovetailing, through, 132

Dovetails, frame, 143

Dovetails, machine made, 159

Dovetails, sawing, 141, 155

Dovetails, setting out, 151

Dowel cradle for planing, 94

Dowel plate, steel, 93

Dowel rounder, 96

Dowel with groove, 94, 95

Dowelling frames, 100

Dowelling joints, 93

Dowelling table legs, 101

Dowels, making, 93

Drawbore pinning, 78

Drawer bottom joint, 188

Drawer joints, dust-proof, 131

Drawer ploughslips, 10, 11

Drawers, dovetailing, 133, etc., 156

Dreadnought file, 81, 82

Drop table joint, 20

Dust-proof drawer joints, 131


Fall fronts, hingeing, 119

Fasteners, corrugated steel, 185

Feather tongues, 51, 52

Fencing, joint for, 71

File, dreadnought, 81, 82

Finger joint hinge, 122, 123

Fished joint, 105, 106

Flap (back) hinges, 115, 116

Floor boards, 48

Fly rails, 120, 121

Fox-wedging, 76

Frame dovetails, 143

Frame joints, Oxford, 26, 27

Frame, mirror, with bridle joints, 37

Frames, circular, 172

Frames, dowelling, 100

Frames for oil paintings, 184


Gate joint, 68, 69

Gauge, marking, 28, 29, 40

Gauge, marking dovetails with cutting, 135

Gauging boards for dowelling, 97, 98

Gauging for hinges, 110, 111

Glued joint, the, 1

Glueing dowelled joints, 97

Glueing rubbed joints, 2

Grooved joints (see Tongued and Grooved), 48

Grooves, ploughing, 58

Grooving, dovetail, 160


Halved and dovetailed joints, 17, 19, 20

Halved and mitred joints, 16

Halved joint, the, 13,

Halved joints, setting out, 28

Halved scarf joint, 103, 104

Halving joints, cross, 18, 23

Hammer head tenons, 80

Handscrews, 11, 12

Haunched tenons, 65

Hinge, butt, 110, 111

Hinge, finger joint, 122, 123

[Pg 211] Hinge, knuckle joint, 122, 123

Hinge recesses, 112

Hinge, rule joint, 125

Hinged cornice pole, 177

Hinged joints, 109

Hingeing box lid, 113

Hingeing, close joint, 125

Hingeing doors, 116-119

Hingeing draught screens, 121

Hingeing fall fronts, 119

Hingeing, open joint, 124

Hinges, gauging for, 110, 111

Hinges, various, 110, 114, 115, 116

Hook joints, 130

Housed and mitred dovetail, 145


Interlocking chair joint, 91

Iron dogs, 10, 11


Japanese self-wedging tenon joint, 72

Joint, drawer bottom, 188

Joint, fished, 105, 106

Joint, interlocking chair, 91

Joint, tabled scarf, 107

Joint, tie beam scarf, 106

Joints,
barefaced tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
locked door, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
wheelbarrow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
battened down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
birdsmouth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
bridle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
butting mitered, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cogged, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
column and pillar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
combing or locking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cornice rod, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
crib, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cross halving, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
fit together, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
dovetailed and wedged tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
dowel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
dustproof drawer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
fencing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
for curved projects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
garden gate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
glued, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
halved, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
halved and joined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
haunched tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
hinged, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
hook, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
ladder, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
laminated, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
lap, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
lightproof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
meeting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
miscellaneous, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
mitre-faced tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
mitre bridle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
mitre cut in half, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
mitred, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
mitred and tenoned, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
mitred and tongued, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
mortise and tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
notched, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
oblique bridle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
oblique halved, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
ogee-shaped, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
open mortise slot, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
partition, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
plowing for tongue and groove, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
puzzle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
rafter and tie beam, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
rafter (tenon), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
rebated door, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
roof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
roof (tenon), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
rubbed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
saddle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
sash bar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
scarf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
screen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
scribed and tenoned, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
setting out bridle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
setting out halved, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
setting out tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
shouldered tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
shutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
skirting and muntin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
T, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
[Pg 212]tongue and groove, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
tongued corner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
trestle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
tusk tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
weather board, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
wheelwright's self-locking tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__


Keyhole screwing, 187

Keying, dovetail, 147

Keying, veneer, 178

Keys, dovetailed, 147

Knuckle joint hinge, 122, 123


Ladder joints, 177

Laminated joints, 10, 11

Lamination, 175

Lap dovetailing, 133

Lap dovetailing, blind, 145

Lap joints, 13

Laths, winding, 3

Lid, hingeing box, 113

Light-tight joints, 131

Locking (inter) chair joint, 91

Locking joint, 55


Marking gauge, 28, 29, 40

Matchboarding, 49

Meeting joints, 129

Mirror frame with bridle joints, 37

Mitre box, saw used in, 171

Mitre bridle joint, 36, 37

Mitre, curved, 163, 164, 168, 169

Mitre faced tenon joint, 77

Mitre halved joints, 16

Mitre sawing block, 165

Mitre, setting out a curved, 168, 169

Mitre template, 170

Mitre trap, screw, 165, 166

Mitred and housed dovetail, 145

Mitred and tenoned joint, 72, 73

Mitred butting joint, 8

Mitred dovetail, secret, 146

Mitred frames, dowelling, 99, 100

Mitred joint, the, 163

Mitred tongued joints, 56, 57

Mitres, curved, 169

Mortise and tenon joints, 64

Mortise, open slot, 80

Mortising, 87

Mortising puzzle, 201

Mouldings, mitreing, 165, 171

Muntin joint, 178


Notched joints, 180


Oblique bridle joint, 37, 38

Oblique dovetailing, 151

Oblique joints, halved, 15, 23

Ogee-shaped joint, 8

Open-joint hingeing, 124

Open slot mortise, 80

Oxford frame, halved joints for, 26, 27


Partition joints, 24, 25

Patera covers, 183

Pelleting, 182

Piano front joint, 9, 11

Pinning, 73

Pinning, drawbore, 78

Pins, dovetail, 136

Pivot hinges, 114, 115, 116

Plane, old woman's tooth, 161, 162

Plane, the plough, 58, 59, 60

Planes, tongueing and grooving, 61

Planing, cradle for, 52

Planing mitred work, 165

Plinth frame dovetailed, 143, 144

Plough plane, the, 58, 59, 60

Ploughing for tongued and grooved joints, 58

Ploughslips, glueing, 10, 11

Plugging, 186

Pole joints, cornice, 177

[Pg 213] Puzzle, Chinese cross, 203

Puzzle, cross, 200

Puzzle, diagonal Chinese cross, 204

Puzzle joints, 189

Puzzle, mortising, 201

Puzzles, dovetail, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 208

Puzzles, square, 205


Rafter and tie beam joints, 182

Rafter joint (tenon), 77

Rebated door joints, 129

Reversible screen hinge, 114, 115

Rising butt hinge, 115, 116

Roof joints, 34, 37, 38

Roof joints (tenon), 77

Roof work, scarfed joints used in, 103, 104, 106

Rubbed joint, 1

Rule joint hinge, 125


Saddle joints, 180

Sash bar joints, 79

Sawing block for mitreing, 165

Sawing (bridle joints), 41, etc.

Sawing dovetails, 141, 155

Sawing for hinge recesses, 112

Sawing (halved joints), 30, 31, etc.

Sawing (tenons), 84, etc.

Scarf joint, fished, 105, 106

Scarf joint for heavy timber, lapped and bolted, 107, 108

Scarf joint, tabled, with straps, 107

Scarf joints, 103

Scarf joints, tie beam, 106

Screen hinges, 114, 115, 116

Screens, hingeing draught, 121

Screwing, slot or keyhole, 187

Screws, hiding with pateras, 183

Scribed tenon joint, 72

Secret mitred dovetail, 146

Setting out dovetails, 151

Shooting board, 7, 10, 11

Shooting board for mitreing, 165, 166, 167

Shoulders, 14, etc., 19, 23

Shoulders of tenons, tongueing, 63

Shoulders, sawing, 45

Shoulders (tenon), 70, 71, 79

Shoulders, tenon with tongued and grooved, 79

Shutting joints, 127

Sideboard pillar joints, 179

Skirting and muntin joint, 178

Skirting, mitred, 163

Skirting mould, double, 56, 58

Slot screwing, 187

Spandrel, jointing shaped, 9, 11

Spandrel with tongued joint, 52, 53

Sprocket wheel, 68

Square puzzles, 205

Steel fasteners, corrugated, 185

Stiles, shutting and meeting, 128

Stopped bridle joint, 37, 38

Stopped dovetail halving, 17

Strap hinge, 114, 115

Straps for scarf joints, 107, 108

Stump tenons, 65


T joints, halved, 14, 18

Table (card) hinges, 115, 116

Table frame, laminated, 174, 175

Table framing, 79

Table joint, drop, 20

Table leg with bridle joint, 36

Table legs, dowelled, 101

Table tops buttoned, 184

Table with circular rim, joint for, 25

Tabled scarf joint, 107

Template, dovetail angle, 134, 154

Template for mitreing, 170

Tenon (and mortise) joints, 64

Tenon joint, dovetailed and wedged, 75

Tenon joint, mitred and moulded, 72, 73

Tenon joint, scribed, 72

Tenon joint, self-wedging, 72

[Pg 214] Tenon joint with mitred face, 77

Tenon joint with tongued and grooved shoulders, 79

Tenon joints, barefaced, 64

Tenon joints, drawbore pinning for, 78

Tenon joints, setting out, 83

Tenon joints, shouldered, 70, 71, 79

Tenon joints, tusk, 74, 75

Tenoned scarf joint, 103, 105

Tenons, hammer head, 80

Tenons, haunched, 65

Tenons, inserted, 81, 82

Tenons, stump or stub, 65

Tenons, tongueing shoulders of, 63

Tenons, twin, 72, 73, 80

Through dovetailing, 132

Tie beam and rafter joints, 182

Tie beam scarf joint, 106

Tie joint, 22, 23

Tongue slips, 130

Tongued and grooved joints, applications of, 52

Tongued and grooved joints, 48

Tongued and grooved joints, ploughing for, 58

Tongued joints, corner, 55, 56

Tongueing and grooving planes, 61

Tongues, cross and feather, 51, 52

Tongues, loose, 55

Toothing plane, 161, 162

Trestle joint, 24

Try square, 9, 28

Tusk tenon joints, 74, 75

Twin tenons, 72, 73, 80

Twist bit, 96


Vee'd matchboarding, 49, 50

Vee'd scarf joint, 105

Veneer keying, 178


Wall plugs, 186

Weatherboards, 176

Wedges for tenon joints, 67

Wedging, fox, 76

Wedging frames, 184

Wheel joints, barrow, 20

Wheel, sprocket, 68

Wheelwright's self-wedging tenon joint, 75

Winding laths, 3

PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN BY THE WHITEFRIARS PRESS, LTD.,
LONDON AND TONBRIDGE.
[Pg 215]

PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN BY THE WHITEFRIARS PRESS, LTD.,
LONDON AND TONBRIDGE.
[Pg 215]

THE WOODWORKER SERIES

WOODWORK JOINTS: HOW MADE AND WHERE USED (Revised Edition). With 400 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

WOODWORK JOINTS: HOW THEY'RE MADE AND WHERE THEY'RE USED (Revised Edition). With 400 Illustrations and an Index. 3/6 net.

CABINET CONSTRUCTION (Revised Edition). With 25 Plates, over 300 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

CABINET CONSTRUCTION (Revised Edition). With 25 Plates, over 300 Illustrations and Index. £3.06 net.

CARPENTRY FOR BEGINNERS. With over 300 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

CARPENTRY FOR BEGINNERS. With over 300 illustrations and an index. £3.60 net.

PRACTICAL UPHOLSTERY. With over 100 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

PRACTICAL UPHOLSTERY. With more than 100 illustrations and an index. £3.60 net.

STAINING AND POLISHING (Revised Edition). Illustrated, and with Appendix of Recipes and Index. 3/6 net.

STAINING AND POLISHING (Revised Edition). Illustrated, and with an Appendix of Recipes and Index. £3.6 net.

FURNITURE REPAIRING AND RE-UPHOLSTERY. With 175 Illustrations, 30 Photographic Plates and Index. 3/6 net.

FURNITURE REPAIRING AND RE-UPHOLSTERY. With 175 illustrations, 30 photographic plates, and an index. £3.60 net.

WOOD TURNING. Fully Illustrated (with enlarged details) and with Index. 3/6 net.

WOOD TURNING. Fully Illustrated (with enlarged details) and with Index. £3.60 net.

WOOD CARVING. With over 200 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

WOOD CARVING. With more than 200 illustrations and an index. 3/6 net.

PERIOD FURNITURE. 200 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

PERIOD FURNITURE. 200 Illustrations and Index. £3.60 net.

HOUSEHOLD REPAIRS AND RENOVATIONS (Revised Edition). Illustrated. 3/6 net.

HOUSEHOLD REPAIRS AND RENOVATIONS (Revised Edition). Illustrated. £3.06 net.

TIMBERS FOR WOODWORK. Illustrated, with Index. 3/6 net.

TIMBERS FOR WOODWORK. Illustrated, with Index. £3.60 net.

WOODWORK TOOLS, AND HOW TO USE THEM (Revised Edition). With 275 Illustrations and Index. 3/6 net.

WOODWORK TOOLS, AND HOW TO USE THEM (Revised Edition). With 275 Illustrations and Index. £3.60 net.

FURNITURE DESIGNS (New Series). 46 pages of Designs. 2/6 net.

FURNITURE DESIGNS (New Series). 46 pages of designs. £2.60 net.

DINING ROOM FURNITURE DESIGNS (New Series). 2/6 net.

DINING ROOM FURNITURE DESIGNS (New Series). 2/6 net.

BEDROOM FURNITURE DESIGNS (New Series). 46 pages of Designs. 2/6 net.

BEDROOM FURNITURE DESIGNS (New Series). 46 pages of Designs. £2.06 net.

MODERN BEDROOM SUITE DESIGNS (New Series). 2/6 net.

MODERN BEDROOM SUITE DESIGNS (New Series). 2/6 net.

LIVING-ROOM FURNITURE DESIGNS. 24 Designs. 2/6 net.

LIVING-ROOM FURNITURE DESIGNS. 24 Designs. £2.06 net.

CABINET DESIGNS (New Series). Over 50 Designs. 2/6 net.

CABINET DESIGNS (New Series). Over 50 Designs. £2.6 net.

TABLE DESIGNS. 46 pages of Designs. 2/6 net.

TABLE DESIGNS. 46 pages of Designs. £2.50 net.

BUREAU AND BOOKCASE DESIGNS (New Series). 2/6 net.

BUREAU AND BOOKCASE DESIGNS (New Series). 2/6 net.

LIGHT CARPENTRY DESIGNS (New Series). 46 pages of Designs. 2/6 net.

LIGHT CARPENTRY DESIGNS (New Series). 46 pages of Designs. £2.30.

TOY AND MODEL DESIGNS. 46 pages of Designs. 2/6 net.

TOY AND MODEL DESIGNS. 46 pages of designs. £2.50 net.

OUTDOOR WOODWORK DESIGNS. 46 pages of Designs. 2/6 net.

OUTDOOR WOODWORK DESIGNS. 46 pages of Designs. £2.60 net.

DOOR MAKING. Fully Illustrated, and with a series of Special Designs. 2/6 net.

DOOR MAKING. Fully Illustrated, with a collection of Special Designs. £2.60 net.


THE WOODWORKER. 6d. monthly. Free specimen sent on application.

THE WOODWORKER. 6d monthly. Free sample available upon request.


EVANS BROTHERS LIMITED, MONTAGUE HOUSE.
RUSSELL SQUARE, LONDON, W.C.1

EVANS BROTHERS LIMITED, MONTAGUE HOUSE.
RUSSELL SQUARE, LONDON, W.C.1


THE

WOODWORKER

MONTHLY: PRICE SIXPENCE

A Free Specimen Copy sent on receipt of postcard

A free sample copy will be sent upon receipt of a postcard

In this Magazine the man who does bench work at home will find month by month the precise guidance he needs for efficient, economical work. The principal features include practical directions, illustrated by working drawings, for the construction of plain and ornamental furniture and all kinds of indoor and outdoor woodwork. Joint making, tool manipulation, staining and polishing, repairing, craft problems and everyday difficulties are also regular features dealt with in an eminently practical way.

In this magazine, a person who works on projects at home will find monthly guidance to help them work efficiently and economically. The main features include practical directions, illustrated with working drawings, for building both simple and decorative furniture, along with various indoor and outdoor woodworking projects. Topics like joinery, tool use, staining and polishing, repairs, craft challenges, and everyday issues are also regularly addressed in a highly practical manner.

The contributors to The Woodworker are expert craftsmen who know exactly where the home woodworker's difficulties lie, and who, from long experience, are able to impart their knowledge to others.

The contributors to The Carpenter are expert craftsmen who understand exactly where home woodworkers struggle, and who, through their extensive experience, can share their knowledge with others.

If you have not yet seen The Woodworker, send a postcard for a specimen copy.

If you haven't checked out The Carpenter yet, send a postcard to get a sample copy.

PUBLISHED MONTHLY       PRICE SIXPENCE

(Free Specimen Copy sent on receipt of postcard)

The Woodworker Annual Volume, 370 pages, 6s. 6d. net

From any newsagent or direct from

Evans Bros., Ltd., Montague House, Russell Square, London, W.C.1

(Free Specimen Copy sent on receipt of postcard)

The Woodworker Annual Edition, 370 pages, 6s. 6d. net

Available from any newsagent or directly from

Evans Bros., Ltd., Montague House, Russell Square, London, W.C.1




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!